Episode 223: How To Create A Transformational Online Course – with April Beach

Sweetlife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Waitlist to Create Your Signature Offer™ with April Beach

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs who are launching online courses.

Summary:

Launching an online course isn’t enough. In fact, the sale of on-demand online courses fell by 13.4 billion dollars because people are weary of buying another course they’ll never finish, the material is not good, or they don’t receive the outcome they had hoped. 
 
For entrepreneurs and businesses looking to scale, online courses are still a powerful tool, but how to curate your content and deliver a transformation to your participants will determine whether your course is a huge hit or a huge fail.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand the basics of Transformational Course Design™
  2. Be able to assess your current course for needed change
  3. Have 4 steps to take action if you’re building an online course right now

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach to the show. I’m April beach host here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast and founder of the Sweetlife company. Thanks for joining me again on another episode where you can take what we deliver to the bank.

 

This show is known for delivering new business trainings and coaching that other businesses and coaches charge thousands for. So thank you so much for tuning in with us before we get started today. And we’re about to talk all about online courses, which I know is a popular topic for so many of you. I want to make sure that you know how you can connect further with us here on the podcast.

 

Delivering information is one thing, but then you usually have questions or you want to know maybe how this applies in your business. So if you are on clubhouse every single week on Wednesdays at 12 o’clock, we host a room and this room is all about the podcast topic of the week. And I take your specific questions on what we talked about on this week show.

 

So if you’re listening right now to episode number 223, and you want to know all about how to launch a transformational online course, you’re listening to this podcast, and then you want to workshop with me and ask your questions. That is where you can find me totally free every single Wednesday on clubhouse at 12 o’clock Eastern time. In order to find that room,

 

you just need to follow me on clubhouse and I can be found at April beach, super simple. So let’s take this podcast from where we are now over to clubhouse, and I’m happy to have a deeper conversation with you and give you support in this area. So who is this episode for this episode is for those of you guys that are in the business launch or scale phase,

 

and you’re thinking about doing so with an online course. So here are a couple of important things to note launching an online course isn’t enough. All right. In fact, the sale of on-demand online courses in free courses actually dropped the consumption of them has dropped over the last couple of years. And that’s because so many people are weary of buying another course or,

 

or even spending their time on a free course. And they understand the material they’re getting really isn’t good, or it isn’t transformational. And they aren’t really getting the outcome that they had hoped that they would receive. So if you are, which you are listening to me here, an entrepreneur or a business, and you’re looking to scale online courses are still really a powerful way to do that.

 

In fact, we help most of our clients watch online courses, but how you curate your content and deliver a transformation to your students, to your clients will determine whether or not your course is a huge hit or a huge fail. And so that’s what we’re talking about today on the show. At the end of this episode, you’re going to understand the basics of transformational course creation and design.

 

You’re going to be able to assess your current courses and whether or not you need to make changes. And you’re going to have four steps to take action if you’re building an online course right now. So if you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive into the show and all of the show notes and everything we have here for you can be found by going to sweet life co.com

 

Okay. So let’s first dive in and talk about what is a transformational course. A transformational course is an online course that delivers measurable transformational results, where your students, your, your clients actually are able to understand what you have taught them and actually practice and put it into action. Instead of so a lot of course, creators, actually, most of them just teach you how to kind of outline your content in benchmarks and basic reverse engineering.

 

You need to do much more of that. If you want to scale your business and become an undisputed leader in your space by creating a transformational online course. So that’s why this is so important. The problem is more content is not better. You know, nobody needs more content. Nobody is out there saying, please inundate me with more content. I know I’m not.

 

And I’m sure you’re not either your students and your clients and the people that are going to go through your course. They just need a transformation. And that transformation could be a micro transformation, or it could be a major transformational outcome for them. So in able to do that, or being able to do that as a course, creator means that you need to understand how to design your course,

 

that includes delivering a transformational measurable result in the end. And according to canto.com content overload is when too many different blog posts and articles and ideas and suggestions cover one specific area. And I know that as entrepreneurs, that you’re struggling with that if you’re talking about something that so many other people are talking about in that same area, it is a huge issue for your business.

 

And it has a couple of negative effects for one, it creates a vast quantity of material covering this one topic, and it makes a really hard for you to stand out. Another problem is that it turns off a potential audience and they don’t want to shift through endless content to find the one thing they’re looking to achieve. And you can read that article.

 

We’ll go ahead and put that link to that article in the show notes for you guys on our website. And so as an entrepreneur, I know you’re struggling with this. I know that you need to understand how to stand out, how to become known, how to become, like what I call undisputed leader. And I talked to hundreds of entrepreneurs every single month that are asking,

 

how do I make my course or my program or my service stand out. And it all starts with simplified transformational program design. So I want you to write those words down in your memory. If you’re driving your car to say with me transformational course or service or program design. Okay. And that’s what we’re talking about here today. That’s what we teach within the Sweetlife company.

 

If you’re looking for a resource beyond this podcast in this area. And so here are some steps I want to give you that you can walk away with though immediately so that you can take a look at your course. Step. Number one is if you already have a course, take a look at your curriculum, take a look at it. And if you’re in the process of building your online course,

 

take a look at what you’re proposing to build, and you need to be able to articulate the injuries Results so that people can expect, know what to expect fully in the end with the transformation they’re going to get from your course, not just what is the end, but what is the detailed transformation that they can expect? You don’t want to just say,

 

Oh, they’ll feel better as a parent, if you’re launching a parent coaching course, or they’ll know how to land speaking gigs, if you’re a speaking coach or they’ll know how to run or moderate a part, a clubhouse room, those are all too general. I recommend that you were able to specifically articulate and identify the transformation like this. So instead of they’ll feel better as a parent,

 

you should be able to say something about your course, like they will have crafted their parenting plan with confidence. So it’s really specific. And you’re talking about how they’re getting the transformation, or instead of they’ll know how to land a speaking gig. It’s something to the effect of, they will have completed the pitch process to land their dream stages. See it’s much more specific.

 

And it also alludes to how you’re teaching them, how to do that. And instead of launching a course that just says, Hey, you know, they’re going to know how to run a great clubhouse room. Instead. We want you to identify the transformation you’re delivering. And an example could be, they understand the guidelines of moderating inclusive clubhouse rooms. You see the difference in that.

 

So step number one is really taken a good look at your curriculum. Number one, do you actually understand the transformation that you’re giving people? Is that really, really clear to you? And if you don’t it’s okay. I don’t want you to feel like, Oh my gosh, I can’t believe, I don’t know the transformation because I literally speak with entrepreneurs all the time that are like,

 

wow, April, I’ve created this course. I bought all these other course creation programs. And I put all this content in there and laid it out. I still can’t articulate the transformation I’m giving people. So if that’s you just, first of all, know that you’re not alone. There’s a lot of people out there talking about how to teach course creation that might not even understand instructional curriculum design.

 

And so that’s not a reflection of you, and it’s certainly not a reflection of your content. So the very first thing to do is to look at the curriculum and be able to clearly identify the transformation in a detailed description. Number two, create transformational benchmarks. And so let’s talk about what I mean by this. I was just hosting a clubhouse room on this topic last week.

 

And I was asked this question and a woman said she’s had a course forever. And they were, I was so excited for her because they were going back through her course and actually understanding the importance of transformational course design they’re going back. And they were updating to redoing their course. It’s been, this killer course has made a ton of money for years.

 

And she asked me, should I measure the transformation in the whole entire course, or also, should I do it in each one of the benchmarks, each one of the modules. And here is the answer to that. Yes. As an expert, you need to understand, to be able to articulate the sub transformations within each benchmark of your course, or of your service,

 

or really this applies to any single business model. We teach transformational program development and design that applies to mastermind creation, membership creation. This can apply to a one hour coaching call with somebody. This can apply to any way that you deliver your content right now in this podcast, we’re just talking specifically about course creation. So step number two is create transformations within each one of your benchmarks and take a look and make sure that you understand them,

 

that you can articulate in a detailed way, the sub transformations within each one of your modules or benchmarks as well. And number three is to curate content the way people learn. Okay, this is really, really important understanding. The more content does not equal a better course or a program. We talked about that in the beginning, right? So your responsibility is to actually remove the content that does not directly apply to the end result that you are giving.

 

That is step number one, take a look at your course, or if you’re in the process of building the course, take a look at it and say, okay, what doesn’t actually have to be in here to deliver the transformation that I’m guaranteeing people, but there’s even more than that. As an entrepreneur, I understand that you’re not an instructional design expert or a scientific learning expert,

 

but if you’re offering a course, you have to curate curriculum with transformational program or service or coaching design. This is how you lead people to amazing results. And this is how you become an undisputed leader in your space. So I want you to understand this. Most people believe that repeated exposure to material, right? So going over the things that you teach them in each module and rereading it and practicing it and memorizing it is like the best way to get people Results.

 

But according to the McGraw center for teaching and learning at Princeton university, this is super time consuming and it’s actually less effective. Instead. They recommend making, learning difficult in strategic and desirable ways to enhance retention, retrieval and transfer of knowledge. Let me see, say that all again. You’re probably going like, Whoa, Whoa, you’re talking about Princeton university,

 

April, I’m a nutritionist or I’m a marketing coach, or, you know, whatever it is is totally doesn’t apply to me, but yet it does as course creators. It is important that we understand instructional design, especially if you are building your company and scaling your business with creating a product that gives people results and they have to go through a process of learning.

 

Let me say that again. A lot of course, creators<inaudible> course creators out there, put a bunch of content in a course, lay it out in a time in line and then give people homework for each benchmark. That is true. Really not the way to get people Results in your program. And what we find is just going over their notes or rereading the things that you’ve done isn’t necessarily the way to do it.

 

In fact, to this study by Princeton university, they actually recommend understanding and absorbing some of your content in your program and intentionally making it difficult, but doing so in desirable ways, creating challenges within your course that people want to overcome. They want to do. And it’s not super easy, but let’s go ahead and dive a little bit more into this because you might just be like,

 

totally tuning me out at this point, which I really hope you’re not because again, as a course creator or somebody that wants to offer a course, it’s important that you understand this in the process of building your curriculum. So does it irritable difficulties? So let’s kind of dive into that. What does that actually mean? Desirable difficulties is a term that Dr.

 

Robert York from UCLA came up with over 20 years and refers to conditions of learning that create challenges for the learners and even slow down some of the rate of learning. But in the end, they actually enhance the long-term retention of the knowledge and the skills that you’re giving that. So tell us, okay, this is, this is very instructional design and scientific learning,

 

and I totally get it. You’re like, okay, April, I’m not offering it MBA. I’m like just teaching somebody how to get more YouTube fans or whatever it may be. I totally totally get it. But you are a course creator and bringing your clients also known as your students from one place to another in knowledge or skill is what you’re promising them.

 

Right? And therefore you should include some measure of desirable difficulties. And again, what is that? So let’s take a look at your course either you’ve created a course or you’re thinking about creating a course. It desirable difficulty is placing a challenges, certain number of challenges and everybody’s program is different within your course, that they’re ready for non a challenge at every single week or every single module,

 

but really great challenges that your clients are ready to face. And by doing so, they get excited about doing it. They want to do it. They want to take what you’ve been teaching them and delivering to them over the past couple of weeks or months or however long or your program is. And they want to put it into action. It’s hard.

 

It’s really, really hard, but it’s the best kind of hard because they know that doing it is for sure. What’s going to raise them from where they are to the next level of where they want to be with you. Here’s an example of this at my company, at the Sweetlife life company, we have a program that’s called your signature offer, and we teach small businesses and entrepreneurs how to develop industry leading online courses.

 

We have taught this for over 13 years, as a matter of fact, way back when in 2008, we launched an online course on how to create online courses like before the whole entire online world was talking about it. And here is why the process of curating your curriculum and building courses in a way that embraces what you are capable of as an expert,

 

as far as scientific learning. But it also levels up your customer’s outcome. Your clients not only retention in your program, but the Results in your program. That’s how we build leading entrepreneurs and businesses. And we teach a process in my program called your signature offer. That actually takes your thoughts out of your mind and your expertise and puts them into a process that creates what we call transformational program design.

 

It is really hard work, but by the time we actually teach that in my, your signature offer program, people are ready for that. And so they’ve gone through the places in the benchmarks where they’re like, okay, bring it on. I am so amped up for this. I’m totally Agra, ready to grow. It’s going to be great work.

 

This is good, important work, because they’re ready for it. If we huge challenges for them throughout the whole entire program, they would never do it. If we created no challenges for them throughout the program, they would learn nothing and they’d have no transformation. So I always loved kind of showing you guys behind the scenes on our company and how we do things.

 

So let’s take that example and let’s look at your course or your program that you’re creating or that you’ve already launched. Do you have desirable levels of difficulty that are strategically placed that cause challenges that enhanced the outcome and the transformation people are getting within your course, if you don’t, then it’s time to take a look at that. And if you feel like you’re actually having a panic attack right now,

 

and you’re like, Oh my gosh, I don’t even know where to start then cruise over to signature offer.com and you can join one of my next white boarding sessions. I do these white boarding sessions for free all the time. And we’ll whiteboard out your course together. Or like I said, join me on clubhouse at noon on Wednesday, the week this show drops and we’ll,

 

we’ll be diving into this together. And here’s some things I want for you to consider as we’re wrapping up this really important episode here on the show. Number one, understand that action is part of your client’s learning process, but how are you going to implement that action? What is the difference between them taking action? And you just giving them work to say you gave them work,

 

or frankly you giving them no work because you just wanted your course easy to get through. Where is the measure there based on the transformation that you are promising they’ll receive from your course, number two, create challenges at the right points within your program, not just to create these challenges, but understand when and where people are ready to be challenged. And of course,

 

number three, which is how we started out this show, cut the content and focus on the transformation and the output of the process that you are teaching more content is not better. And if you take anything away from this episode, because I know we talked about a lot, number one is to simplify the content within your course, don’t overload people with more and more and more content.

 

Instead, look at the content within your course or your program and ask yourself, how am I going to make this transformational it, every single touch point within what I’m delivering to my clients. If you want to take your course, you want your course to take the lead in your space. You’re going to need to design it like a leader designs courses.

 

And this applies to mini courses, signature courses, and frankly, any program that requires learning and implementation based on the information that you teach. So we talked about a lot of things today, today in episode number 222 here on this wheat life entrepreneurial business podcast, we were talking about how to launch a transformational online course. This again is for those of you guys who are just starting to scale your business with online courses,

 

whether you have had a course for years like the woman I was speaking to in clubhouse, or you’re just now trying to tap into the power of scaling your business. Your online courses understand that launching a course alone is not enough. Also understand that the completion of online courses has fallen so much, that you have to understand how to engineer your curriculum in order to get people transformational,

 

measurable, predictable results, and the resources we have for you. Again, our join me in clubhouse. Let’s have a conversation about this. I’m happy to dive in, roll up my sleeves and link arms with you in our regular weekly clubhouse room on Wednesdays at noon. Again, follow me at April beach and we’ll dive in with this together. Or I want you to also check out signature offer.com

 

if you, to the place where you’re ready to take the lead in your industry. And you want to make sure that the courses that you’re developing are transformational industry, leading courses. That is where you get the steps to do it again. That signature offer.com and all of the show notes from this episode here can be found by visiting sweet life co.com. And I kind of geeked out on the research for this one.

 

So in those show notes, there’s a couple of really important resources. We have actually put the Princeton resource in there for you as well, as well as I’m putting a link to how to create strategic levels of difficulty from Dr. Robert Bjork here in the show notes as well. So if you want to dive in deeper to that, I’ve made sure all of these resources are here for you.

 

All right, you guys, thanks so much for tuning into the show. I can’t wait to talk to you again next week on a, another podcast that delivers a business coach. You can take to the bank. You guys have an awesome week. Bye for now.

Episode 222: How To Safeguard Your Content with Copyright Protection – with April Beach and Francesca Witzburg

Francesca Witzburg SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join Francesca live on Clubhouse Wednesday, April 14, 12:00 Eastern time Click here to join the SweetLife Entrepreneurs™ Club and get notifications and room links.

Who This Episode is Great For:

Those who want to know how to file for and use copyright protection. 

Summary:

In this episode we’re talking with The Trademark Attorney, Francesca Witzburg, about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your creative works by filing for copyright protection. If you’re a course or content creator, and you have work that is not protected, this is an urgent episode for you. We dive into who needs copyright protection, what you must be careful to do when hiring help to create works for you, and how to start the process of protecting your work. 
 
This is part 2 of a 2 part show with Francesca Witzburg. In part 1 we dove into Trademark protections for your work.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know if you have work that needs to be protected
  2. Understand how to own the work that others create for you
  3. Have the first steps to file for copyright protection today

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And welcome back. So the show April beach here, host of this show and founder of this wheat life company. I’m so glad that you’ve joined us again. This is part two of a two part series that we’re doing with our special guests,

 

Francesca Whitesburg. Last week, we dove in to trademarking protection who needs trademarking, the difference between word marketing and design marking. And so if you miss that, please pause this show, go back and start with last week of that is an area of need in your business. That was episode number 221. And today this is episode number 222. This episode is for those of you who are in any stage of business development in that stage is connected to our start to scale up system.

 

If you don’t know what phase of business development you’re in, we have an amazing, powerful, free resource for you where you can take a short assessment and get the exact stage and phase of business development you’re in and get a complete list of what you should be working on right now. And you can get that short assessment and access all of those tools by visiting Sweetlife co.com

 

forward slash quiz. If you haven’t done that, or if it’s been a while, since you’ve tested where you are in your business growth phase, I highly recommend you tap into that amazing resource. Now let’s talk about what we can expect from today’s show. So this episode is for those of you who want to know how to step into the process of protecting your creative work through filing for copyright protection,

 

our guest is absolutely hands down amazing. She has done work for our company and many of our clients, and I’m so pleased that she agreed to be on this show. Today, we are talking with the trademarking attorney, Francesca Whitesburg about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your creative works by filing for copyright protection. If you’re a course creator,

 

if you’re a content creator, if you have work that you have actually built, brought to life in tangible form and you have not protected it yet, we need you to be very careful. That is your creative work. That is your genius, and you need to protect it so nobody else can take it from you. And so we’re talking about how to go about that in today’s show clearly a very important show for our audience.

 

Now, the end of this episode, you’re going to know if you have work that needs to be protected. You’re going to know the process of going through the first steps to filing for protection. And you’re going to understand a few other very important things like how to own the work that others create for you. Other independent contractors, and even how to avoid getting into trouble when using protected material from other businesses within your marketing.

 

There’s so many important things that we discuss on today’s show. And so I’m so glad that you’re here and you’re not missing it. So let’s talk about our guest. If you did not hear her amazing introduction last week, let me give you an introduction. Francesca Whitesburg is an award winning intellectual property law attorney specializing in trademarks brands and copyrights. She advises Tom businesses,

 

brands, entrepreneurs, professionals, talent, startups, and individuals. Francesca has experienced working at various in-house global luxury brands. She has also worked in the world’s largest law firm today. She’s a partner at an IP law firm, Loza and Loza and creates content on her Instagram. And she can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram. She’s absolutely amazing.

 

So I’m very glad that you’re here, power packed episode. So let’s go ahead and dive in all of this show notes and the resources that we’re discussing can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com and simply click on podcast. And this is episode number two 22. Also, we have one more important bonus. So Mark your calendar. If you are on clubhouse,

 

we invite you to join Francesca and me in our regular Wednesday room on Wednesday, April the 14th at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Now, what does that mean? That means you get to jump into a clubhouse room and you get to ask Francesca your copyright questions, your direct business questions. That’s what we love clubhouse. And we actually use clubhouses our community extension to this podcast now.

 

So we have a regular room. We host every single Wednesday at noon. You are invited to join us there this week on April, the 14th, Francesca is going to be there taking your copywriting questions as an extension from this podcast episode. So it’s an amazing opportunity of course, completely free and a chance for you to really get your business legal questions answered.

 

If you’d like to join this room, here are the steps to do that. Visit me on Instagram at April beach life. And you can click on the link in my bio and simply follow me on clubhouse and follow our club on clubhouse. When you do that, you’re going to have notifications and with clubs house, when your notifications are on, that gives you access to these very special rooms.

 

So very simply follow me on clubhouse. And I can be found at, at April beach on clubhouse, where you can go to my Instagram at April beach life on Instagram. And both of those opportunities will give you a chance to follow me there or giving you notifications in access to Francesca. So that’s our special bonus with today’s episode. And I know that’s going to be so powerful for so many of you who really do have important business questions you need answered right now.

 

So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast episodes. Welcome back to another episode here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I am joined again by my very favorite person this year, Francesca Whitesburg. She is here diving in with everything legal for you to protect your content, your intellectual property. And this is actually part two of a two part podcast episode we did last week.

 

We dove all into trademarking. So if you miss last week, pause this, go back to episode two 21 and start with that one and then come back here and join us. If you listened to last week, let’s get ready to go. We have so much to cover today and you are going to gain so much knowledge by this wonderful woman who is here just strictly to pour into you to protect your intellectual property.

 

So welcome back to the show. Francesca, thank you so much for me. Thank you for having me April. I’m excited to talk about copyrights. Yeah. Okay. So actually let’s go ahead and dive right in. So really what is copywriting for anybody who is absolutely brand new at this? They know they need to know what it is, but they don’t even have a baseline starting point.

 

Yeah, of course. So copyright is a form of intellectual property protection that the text creative works that can be your videos, your photos, your courses, the layout of their website, your podcasts. It covers anything that you’ve created. That’s fixed in a tangible media. So it can’t be like an idea in your head gotta be written down, actually like manifested in the real,

 

but once it’s out there, it’s protected automatically under copyright law. Okay. So let’s take a step back. I know we talked about it extensively in last week’s episode, but can you just give a general description to our listeners in what is intellectual property, Of course, intellectual property, which is IP, which we refer to as refers to creations of the mind.

 

They’re your invention. Anything that’s proprietary that you can upload your photos, your grants, your slogans, trade secrets. These are all things that you have created that either you or your business owns. I like to say you have your IP toolbox. And then in that tool box, there’s different tools you can use like patents, copyrights, trademarks, and trade secrets.

 

So good. Okay. So incredibly foundational, but yet so many businesses aren’t aware of that. All right. So my next question for you, and I know our listeners, especially those who listened to last week are automatically asking this question right now. What is the difference between a copyright protection and trademarking? Yes. Trademarks really protect source identifiers. So Sweetlife when you read that name,

 

you know, that that’s April beaches programs, she’s offering her consulting services April. You’ve seen, created a full brand around that. And also it’s your company name too, but to consumers, we know that that’s April. So that word tells people that if you get consulting from this person, it’s April, who’s behind it. The same thing. When you see Coca-Cola or burger King,

 

you go to a McDonald’s in Spain, you’re in a know that it’s the same person who’s behind that. That’s the function of a trademark. Now a copyright is a very different tool, but they can overlap. So copyright extends to any creative expressions. So if you have a really unique logo that went along with sweet life, I it’s like a little like circle with some interesting artwork in there that you use.

 

And when I, anyone one sees that I think April, but also it’s very detailed. It’s original. That can also be protected by copyright. So if you are working with IP counsel, a good lawyer is going to advise you holistically and really tell you all the tools that you can use to protect your intellectual property from different angles. Okay. Fascinating.

 

And so for our listeners, do they need to register their works for copyright protection? So copyrights are similar to trademarks in that they are granted automatically. As soon as you create something you posted online, put it, like we said, in the fixed medium, then you have protection. However, if someone is using your work in an unauthorized manner, that your permission,

 

right. To actually get them to stop in the United States, you need a registration certificate. So I like to say, you know, you could send them a letter, you can send them a DM telling them to take it down. Cause it’s, you know, using your copyrighted material. But with that, without a registration, it’s like waving an empty gun.

 

You’re really not gonna have any teeth behind it. Got it. Okay. And so let’s kind of just pause here because I want to get back into content around courses and really big written works that many of our listeners do, but let’s just kind of take a jog for a second and talk about a couple of areas where people tend to run into trouble and they have absolutely no idea when they’re using other people’s works.

 

So the first one is photography and using somebody else’s photography within your business, what do people need to know in relation to copyright? Anytime you use photos taken from the internet or anyone else’s photos, technically you need permission and you can get yourself into a lot of trouble if you use it even on just a random post or you’re using it for something more visible,

 

even mental, a lot of trouble. And so the way that you get around it is you either use photos and images that you’ve taken yourself, or you can purchase the rights to some of these images. That’s where you can use database as like Getty images to buy a license, to use those infants for certain purposes. Yeah. And I think that the,

 

you know, so many new businesses and actually even established businesses that are just trying to scale online, just kind of starting to get their Instagram out there. They don’t realize that grabbing another photo out there, you know, there is a license, but behind that and that you have to be within your legal rights to use that. And so just wanted to make sure that we were discussing that here on the show as well,

 

because I, I know that people have ran into problems with that in the past. Another kind of side question for you here, going back to our listeners original piece of work, their course that they’re creating the content that they’re delivering within their coaching programs or their mastermind, or they’re teaching their intellectual property, their methods, their signature programs, right. With some of our listeners hire other people to create parts of their work for them.

 

What do they need to know and be careful about when they’re doing that? Yeah, that’s a great point April. So when you hire someone to create whether it’s a logo with design web design, anytime you’re paying someone to build software or whatever it is, if they’re not an employee within the scope of employment, paying them a salary or hourly, or the bank benefits,

 

then technically they are the owner of the intellectual property. So you need a written assignment called an assignment for what an assignment means is a transfer of rights. So that person needs to sign a document that says all the intellectual property created around this program. And it’s more detailed than that, but I give all that copyright and all that property is transferred to two and you’re comfortable.

 

It’s very critical, especially if you’re going to pay a lot of money, really need to get this in writing because otherwise they own what you thought you paid for and they can continue to use themselves, or they can give it away to other people and competitors. Yeah. Imagine that nightmare hiring somebody to, you know, create something for you and your course or your program.

 

And then it’s not actually yours. So important. So thank you so much for discussing that. And that assignment is, is really incredibly important. And, you know, I know that the majority of our listeners, their teams that they have are actually independent contractors. So this is completely something that is critical for them to be aware of is this assignment within their independent contractor agreements.

 

And that’s why working with an expert like you to make sure it is, it says exactly what they used to say is so incredibly. Okay. So let’s go back to this process of protecting copyright. So another side question for you when our listeners are using the notation on the bottom of their slides or their PDFs or delivering, or their written work, and they have the little copyright protection and then they have the gear on there and then their ownership,

 

why is that important? And what is the correct way? If there is a correct way just to enter into that sort of, Yeah, you, you hit the nail on the head, you see the copyright symbol, which will say do it in an emoji you’re on like on your phone. And then you put either your name or your company’s name.

 

Whoever’s really claiming rights to that ID. And then the year, and what that does April is that’s putting third parties on notice it’s again, reminding people, Hey, this is my copyright. This is protectable information. If you use it without my authorization, it’s illegal. So don’t do it. We’ll do it. The only way that you can really get them to stop is if you file that registration.

 

Got it. Okay. And so I know that we get that question all the time. Clearly if I don’t answer it because I’m not an attorney and I know that so many of our users are wondering that, you know, they see that when can I use it? How do I use it? Especially those that have multiple years listed on that listing and in exactly how to go about doing that.

 

And so does the year usually reflect the original work or does the year cover when it is currently being protected in that listing on it? It could vary, right? So like sometimes it’s like people open up a book, you’ll see the original publication copyright notice, but then they’ll be the most current version. But for our purposes, I think it’s fine to do it.

 

Like, let’s say you had to create your website in 2020, you can have 20, 20 is the date, but then if you make changes to it, which you’re going to just keep updating, updating the year. Okay. So many, I already know that these are questions people listening or are having, okay. So now let’s go back to kind of the center of what we’re talking about here today for our listeners,

 

how do they start the process of protecting their intellectual property, their content course program outlines, where do they begin with this process? Yeah. I’d love the way you put it April, because you implicitly said, how do they protect what they already have? Everyone already has IP. It’s just a matter of understanding, which are your most important assets and how you go about protecting them.

 

So I actually offer an Ikea audit where I will look at websites, social media pages, courses, some of my clients give me access to their, you know, their subscription-based or whatever, log in to see their forces. I do a very holistic review. And then we will go get on the phone and do a 30 minute call to discuss what their most important assets are or we could talk about,

 

okay, here’s the name of your operating vendor? Have you thought about three markets that’s going to filing for that copyrights? Do you have your independent contractor agreement language? We’ll kind of go through and just do like a checklist, like as if I literally am doing an audit on your seat and make sure you have everything there. I recommend that as a starting point,

 

and there’s also an IP audit and I can action plan, which is like the deluxe version of that, which is going to really do a deep dive. And then we come up with eight phase one plan, which is your first three to six months on what filings to do. And then also the next like six to 12 plus months for the next round of filings,

 

because everyone has so much great content. That’s great IP. It gets a little overwhelming to think, Oh, I have to do everything. The reality is that you don’t, you stage it out. And if you have a plan strategy about it, it’s really not going to be that expensive. It’ll be way more expensive than the end. If you don’t do this.

 

And if you try to do deal with cease and desist letters or sending this letters as they arise. Yeah. Nightmare. So once somebody submits their work for copyright protection, each time they update it, do they need to resubmit that Great question. So anytime you modify a work that it becomes a new popular, it’s a new work. So I would say as long as the modification is substantially similar to the original work,

 

then you can rely on that. But if it’s very different and using that a lot publicly, it’s probably worth at least running it by an IP lawyer to come up with a strategy. Okay. So much great information, Francesca, thank you so much for being our guest again here on the show and joining us in clubhouse rooms where we talk about this.

 

There’s so many places where people can connect with you. You know, we highly recommend that people take up the opportunity to go through an IP audit. And what I love about why I have you on this show is that you understand the way service-based online entrepreneurs work and you understand what they’re creating and you understand courses and masterminds and signature programs, and you understand all these things.

 

And so it’s hard, frankly, to find an expert like you, that fully understands the assets that our listeners are creating. So thank you so much for being on the show and being an amazing resource and the best place for people to connect with you is through your Instagram. Is that correct? Yes. I have a link in my bio. It’s my counselee.

 

I’m happy to get on a 15 minute call just to hear about your business And to discuss if you want to do an IP audit or if you just want to Connect. Yeah. Great. All of you guys should take her up on that. It’s a very, I know it’s crazy. It’s totally free. So you can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram and we will make sure that a link to that of course is in our show notes as well.

 

So it’s the trademark attorney on Instagram. And what is your clubhouse handle the trademark at the trademark attorney on clubhouse as well? Of course. Thank you so much for being here again and being our guest expert this week. I know that everybody really needed to hear a way, the things we’ve been talking about the last two weeks on the show. So certainly appreciate your time.

 

Absolutely. Thanks April. Thank you so much for sticking around with us. What an amazing episode Francesca is a super genius and perfectly in line with what our listeners and our clients need. If you would like to work with Francesca, if you would like to just take her up on her opportunity to connect with her for a free IP audit, please visit Francesca directly by visiting at the trademark attorney on Instagram.

 

So for handle is the trademark attorney on Instagram and the trademark attorney on clubhouse. She can be found at both of those places. Thank you so much for tuning into the show. Again, all the show notes and everything we talked about, and all these links can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. You guys have an awesome day. Bye bye for now.

Episode 221: How To Protect Your Business by Trademarking – with April Beach and Francesca Witzburg

Francesca Witzburg SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Bonus – Join Francesca live on Clubhouse Wednesday, April 7 & 9, 12:00 Eastern time. Click here to join the SweetLife Entrepreneurs™ Club and get notifications and room links.

Who This Episode is Great For:

As you name your business, programs, courses or creative work, you want people to recognize them as your brand, and it’s important that you know how to protect your creations so that others can’t use it. 

Summary:

In this episode, we’re talking with The Trademark Attorney, Francesca Witzburg, about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your company name, tag lines and creative work including your courses, branded programs and more. In this jam-packed powerful episode, we’re diving into; Who needs trademark protection? How much it costs? How to check if the name you want to use is available? How to block someone from using your trademark and more. 
 
This is part 1 of a 2 part show with Francesca Witzburg. In part 2 we dive into Copyright protections for your work.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know if you need to file for trademark protection
  2. Understand the difference between word and design marks
  3. Know where to start in your protection process

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And welcome to episode two. You one here, we’re diving into an important topic today, and that’s how to protect your business through the process of trademarking. And there are so many questions around trademarking.

 

We get this all the time in our business programs, especially in my year signature offer business program, where people are really coming in and branding their method, branding their industry, leading signature programs. And so there are always questions around how do I protect the name of what I’m creating? And so I invited today’s guests to come in, pour into you.

 

And this is what we can expect by spending time together here today. First of all, this episode is for those of you who are in any stage of business growth and development. Now, this really aligns with one of the tools here that we give away completely free with the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And that is a self-assessment where you can find out exactly what stage of business you are in.

 

And you can take this self-assessment by simply visiting Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz. So when we’re talking about who this particular podcast episode is for this episode happens to be for any of you wherever you fall in the phase of business development. Because if you haven’t protected your intellectual property yet through trademarking, then this is an important topic to pay attention to. So as you go through the process of naming your business and your programs and your courses and your creative work,

 

you want people to recognize that they’re yours, they’re your brand. It’s an important part of building your business, a recognizable brand. And so in this episode, we’re talking to trademark attorney Francesca Whitesburg about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your company, name, your tagline, to your creative work, including your courses, your branded programs,

 

and more, this is a jam packed episode. And she talks about powerful things in here that every single business owner needs to know. And then we’re diving into who needs a trademark protection. How much does it cost? How to check if the name that you want is available, how to block someone who could be using your trademark or infringing upon your trademark.

 

And there’s so many different things we’re going to dive into. So I’m going to go ahead and get right over to the episode. However, I want to make sure that you know, that this is part one of two episodes where we have Francesca on the show. And so next week we’re talking all about copyright protection and today is all about trademark. At the end of this episode,

 

you will know if you need to file for trademark protection, you will understand the difference between a wordmark and a design Mark, and you’ll know where to start in your protection process. Everything we’re talking about here can be found@theshownotesbyvisitingusatsweetlifeco.com. This is episode number 221. And one last thing we are going to be live with has got on clubhouse the Wednesday that this show drops.

 

So that will be Wednesday, April the seventh at 12 o’clock Eastern time. So if you were not following me yet on clubhouse at April beach, and you want to connect with Francesca in, take your questions from this episode to her, live in clubhouse, then make sure that you join us. And you can simply do that by following me at April beach on clubhouse and turn on the little bell for the notifications.

 

And you will get notified when we’re going live, which will give you access to Francesca. It will give you access to this room. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training.<inaudible> Hi everybody. I am so excited to be joined by Francesca Wittenberg, who has been instrumental in helping our business, make sure that everything that we have is our ducks in a row.

 

If you will say, and she’s here joining me on the podcast today, talking about quite a few very important legal foundations that you really need to have a no for your business. And so Francesco, welcome to the show. Thank you so much for being here. Tell everybody a little bit about yourself in UHIN, who you serve and really how you got to where you are right now,

 

professionally. Thank you so much, April. I’m super excited to be here. My name is Francesca Pittsburgh. I go by the trademark attorney on Instagram and I’m an IP lawyer. We’re going to talk about what IP is, but basically I help creators businesses, anyone who has created something using their intellectual creativity and especially people who are trying to monetize that I help,

 

whether it’s trademarks, copyrights, helping businesses get started to monetize and protect what they created is what I do. And I service really a variety of industries. I have fashion experience, story brands, online businesses in particular, and navigating how to protect content and all of the assets that you’ve created online. That’s really been my niche for the past year or two.

 

And, you know, I got started by going to law school. I had no idea what intellectual property was like most people. And I thought it was so amazing how, what you create are your real assets. These are real things that you can command. You can protect, you can sell. So I really fell in love with that. And also helping businesses get off the ground.

 

I feel like I’m able to kind of give back really help people launch. And so I got into it. I worked at a small IP boutique. I also had experience working in the legal departments at Prada and Tory Burch and the international jewelry brand from there. I really got the bug and I just wanted to learn everything in anything about intellectual property, in whatever industry.

 

And then I worked at the world’s biggest law firm called Dentons. I worked in Manhattan and Brock center for a little bit over three years, and then I made a big change. Yeah. I mean a big change becoming a partner at an IP boutique firm, meaning we only do intellectual property from start to finish like firms located in LA, but I’m based in New York and New Jersey.

 

I can service clients everywhere. And since September, I’ve just been really hitting the ground, running, helping a lot of online businesses, connecting on clubhouse, meeting people like you April. So I’m super excited to share my knowledge with everyone today. I’m so excited that you’re here and you know what? You do this super hyper niche area of serving online businesses.

 

I mean, you help our listeners protect their ideas and protect their services and their programs and their courses and their actual digital products, which is absolutely right on. And I know that there are so many people in this business space that are creating content that are creating different assets and what we call IP that have no idea, even the first step on, on how to protect that.

 

So let’s go ahead and start there. What actually is IP? What is intellectual property? Sure. So intellectual property refers to creations of the mind. They are inventions designs, creative works, brands, slogans, or anything that you’ve created kind of creatively. And so the law is divided up into certain categories and I like to call it, you know,

 

you have your IP toolbox. So there’s certain tools that you can use to protect whatever it is that you created or your business there’s patents, which protects inventions. Sometimes it protects certain ways of doing things processes, and it also sometimes protects designs. If it meets certain thresholds, then there’s trade secrets, which kind of works in tandem with aunts. If you’re not eligible for a patent may be able to protect confidential and secret information that is proprietary to your business so long as you’ve kept it private and you haven’t publicly disclosed it.

 

Then what we’re really going to focus on today is trademarks and copyrights. Trademarks are your brands. They are the symbols. And the names that you have created to tell that this is my business. I April beach am the owner of your signature offer. I upgraded this course, and that is my protectable content. The function of trademarks are to point to the source.

 

And then there’s copyright. Copyright is the creative regime. It really extends to creative, works such as content photos, certain texts, if it’s eligible videos, website layout. So, you know, just by saying that alone, there are so many different tools that you can use to protect an online business. And so we can talk about that. Wow.

 

Okay. So in, this is exactly why, I mean, just in that definition that you just gave, you talked about four really important areas that our listeners can and should be possibly if they qualify, protecting what they have created and what they plan to create. And I really want to dive specifically into trademarks today and we’re going to have Francesca back on the show.

 

Everybody don’t worry, and we’re going to be diving into other things as well. But I think this is really the most important place to start out. You know, just in my, your signature offer master class, we were having this kind of behind the scenes conversation about this. And even those students of mine that have been in business for over a decade are just almost like in this panic mode when this conversation came up because they realized they might not have done things correctly.

 

And so that’s why I’m really excited to dive into trademarking today. So first of all, I understand that there are two types of different trademarks that you can protect. Is it like a design Mark and a word Mark? Can you explain what those two different types of, of marks are to our, Yeah, I get asked all the time I have a brand name and I have a logo,

 

which one should I file for what’s protectable? And the short answer is that the word market itself, if you file an application with the government, just for the word in standard characters, that will automatically protect the name and any siloization. So if you go to re rebrand and change your logo, if you have a wordmark registration, that’ll extend any specializations colors,

 

whatever format. So we do searches for the word. And if that’s available, I usually say, go for the word Mark, but you’re right, that sometimes clients will have, let’s say it’s not just a script, right? Let’s say that they came up with a unique character or some sort of interesting artwork that they have in a circle next to the word,

 

a good example of this is target, right? You know, target has the word target and red, and then you’ll see the bullseye above that bullseye they use as a trademark. So they could file for the word target without a stylization and be protected. They can also file just for the bullseye, which is the design element, and that will be protected or they can file for a lockup version,

 

which includes the word and the design. So there are a variety of ways and it really is case by case specific, but more importantly, it’s about budget. And I always tell clients, start with your corny for your forklifts and services, because it can get very expensive. And also as a point of strategy, it may not be worth filing for every single variation of the bark.

 

Just start with your core name and your core goods or services. Okay. And who needs to file trademark protection? Let’s kind of really cover some basics like who needs it. You know, what’s funny is that if you were asking this question 10, 15 years ago, the answer different, it used to be fortune 500 companies had trademark lawyers and they were the ones Coca-Cola Pepsi,

 

big brands were the ones registering trademarks that has completely shifted with online businesses. And I think we need to take a step back and explain an important concept April that you and I have discussed. So in the United States, trademark rights are based on use. So I’m sure all of you have one point or another. Someone has said to you, Oh, you don’t need a trademark right now.

 

You don’t need to file the trademark. You have rights just based on use, just continue to use the problem with that is, like I said, 15, 20, 30 years ago, that wasn’t really an issue because you were a store in one particular market in one city, right. Or your restaurant, or you were consulting in one area in person.

 

So it didn’t matter. Really. If someone was using the same name, you’re in New Jersey and someone’s using it in LA necessarily. So the law as it States is you have Commonwealth rights. Your rights are limited to that, to where you’re actually using who you’re servicing with online businesses that has caused to be blunt chaos, because how do you prove where your servicing clients by being on Instagram online,

 

you know, having websites that technically target and market, not only all 50 States, but even outside the us. So the way that you get around those issues is by filing the application with the government, having a registration gives you a presumption of rights in all 50 States. So that way, if someone is using your name, all you have to do is send them that piece of paper.

 

That’s triplicate of registration and show them that you’re the owner and they should in theory. Got it. So many questions that, and I’m obviously, you know, I’m bringing questions from clients that I, that I know have been asking as well. So let’s kind of start back at the beginning. If there’s somebody who’s listening to this and they have program that they’ve named,

 

let’s say it’s best business, one, two, three, or whatever that they have been using for a long period of time. What are their first steps as of now versus somebody who hasn’t even, who’s coming up with a new name, let’s start with the established people that are saying, Hey, listen, my company name isn’t registered my program, or my course name or my mastermind name,

 

isn’t registered. What should those people that are already have an existing piece of work that they own do at this point in time? Yeah. And I think it comes back again to budgeting and understanding that a little bit of money can go a long way if you’re strategic about it. What I like to do differently, I think than most lawyers is clients come to me and say,

 

Oh, for test that I want to file for this. I say, let’s take a step back. We can definitely file. But did you protect your brand name, your core name? I have clients that come and say, Oh, this slogan, I want to protect it’s brand new and it’s new. No one’s using it. So what I do is I do an IP audit for a lot of clients,

 

but when they come to me, I say, let’s just take a step back. Let’s look at all of your websites, all of your courses, and let’s figure out what’s the most important instead of you deciding or someone telling you which trademark to file let’s think strategically and say, what are your most core names, your core content and connection with your core services?

 

Because it gets very expensive very quickly. So I would tell people who are using, and they haven’t had anything registered to really, you know, touch base. I’m happy to do this, to discuss and do the IP audit, but you can also do it yourself and just think like, what are the core names that I’m using and for what particular services,

 

and then get those on file. Yes. Maybe you came up with like a super cool name slogan that you’re using, but are you really going to be using that in six months to a year versus I would say the name that you’re operating under, that may be the first starting point. So I would say, you know, either check in with an IP attorney who can do that with you,

 

for you, or think about it and then get those on file. Okay. And let’s make sure that you guys don’t have to wait until the end of this. If you want to connect with Francesca for that IP audit, find her on Instagram at the trademark attorney. And she actually has a link in her bio on Instagram. You can just schedule a call with her.

 

So we’re making it really easy for you. It’s the trademark attorney on Instagram. And plus she has amazing videos and things on there that you guys will love. And you can schedule a call to set up that IP on it. Okay. So for those people that are listening and they’re new in business, and they’re just trying to, they’re thinking, wow,

 

I really want to name my company. This, what are their first steps? You know, let’s actually talk about how to search the U S PTO. What is that process and is, Yeah. So the first thing is to come up with a name, if you’re just getting started, I would say, come up with names that try to not be so descriptive because as business owners and content creators,

 

we want to express to our viewers what exactly it is that we’re offering. But unfortunately that falls on the lower end of protection. On the trademark scale, the really strong trademarks are the ones that are either made up terms like Google or terms that have nothing to do with the product that you’re selling, like Apple computers. Then there’s this sweet spot that a lot of marketing people like,

 

like April, you do this really well. You will find names that kind of hint at what you’re doing, but don’t literally describe like your signature offer. So those are the sweet spot they’re called suggestive marks. But anything like weaker than that is, is a little bit more descriptive in there. You can still get them as trademarks. They’re just a lot harder to protect and enforce,

 

meaning other people may be able to use them. And then when you go to create a brand that you’re about to invest a lot of money in, you know, you need to think about these things. So the more made up the less related to the actual things that you offer the stronger and the better. Okay. So for those people that are like,

 

okay, this is what I want to do. How do they go search and see if somebody already has that trademark registered? Yeah. So let’s say you came up with an awesome name. The first thing to do is go check on the U S T o.com. That is the government website. The government has a database of registered and pending trademarks. You can plug in the Mark,

 

but unfortunately it’s not very user-friendly. For example, if you put in the Mark, it really may only give you either the exact spelling, maybe with a space, but it really is very limited. It’s going to look for the exact Mark. So if you did work with the trademark where like, for example, I have special software where I plug in the Mark,

 

I plug in the goods and services and then with its AI software, it’ll pull up marks that are medically similar. Maybe they have a translation and a foreign language, and all of those can be potential issues that you’re not going to find yourself. However, for your due diligence. The first thing to do is for you to check on usp.gov, because maybe there is a dead hit,

 

and you’ll find that there, the next thing to do, though, it’s not enough just to look on you as PTO, because there could be people who are using the Mark that may not have a registration. As I mentioned before, trademark rights are based on use. So it’s really important to see who’s using and who can raise a potential objection. You check Google,

 

check, Instagram, check all those platforms, and then if it looks good, that’s when you go and you work with a trademark attorney. Okay. Okay, great. So you do your due diligence, you know, go, you know, was us pto.gov, not.com. It’s not geo OB do that check and then Google the heck out of it as well.

 

And I, I think that that is so important. I know that, you know, some people go, Oh, they’ll just search it and they’ll be like, Oh great, it’s available because it’s not popping up. And that is absolutely nowhere near enough. And then I can speak for experience. You guys, who are listening that I have had Francesca put our trademark names in her AI system and crazy things that there’s no way I ever could have found pop up.

 

So it is definitely an important investment to make. If, if you were in the process of growing your company and you have IP that you want to protect. And so I think that’s really an important thing. So any other last words today, when we’re talking about trademarking moving forward or any other things that our listeners need to know that are often missed,

 

maybe common questions, basically, what am I not asking that I should be asking you? Yeah. Number one, we’re in the middle of a, of a pandemic and a financial downturn. So you’re going to have a lot of people who may not want, or may not have the deans to file trademarks. So I will tell you there’s things you can do to try and protect your name,

 

even without a registration start using those TM symbols. And you may not know what that is. So a TM symbol, now that I’ve mentioned that you’re going to see them everywhere. It means that people are claiming rights to a name or design as a trademark. They’re saying I’ve created this. And when people look at it, it points to me means that’s my website,

 

it’s my services, whatever it is. So you came up with a slogan, or if you have your brand name that isn’t yet registered, put the little TM in the upper right hand corner. And what that does is that puts third parties on notice. So if you have another person to get the Google search went on and found your website, they’re going to see immediately,

 

Oh, this person is claiming trademark rights. I better back off. So that’s an extra element that you can do. It’s not as strong as a registration clearly because your rights are only limited to where you’re using until you get it on file. But at least it’s something. And I would say, think about budgeting for that registration, for some of your four names.

 

It may sound expensive. And I think it’s worth quoting. You know, you’re going to get people who are gonna do this cheaper, and you’re going to find people who are gonna do it more expensive, but my firm has a fixed fee package with a trademark search and the government and the filing. And it’s 1250, you know, that’s a deal,

 

it’s a deal. And I’m just thinking like the cost to respond, who would demand letter or to send a demand letter is that amount. So to get that on file, to kind of not have to worry, think about maybe budgeting that as part of your business process. Yeah. And I will say about, Oh gosh, it’s been about 12 years.

 

We filed a registration for a program that we were licensing to healthcare. And this was 12 years ago. And I think I paid, you know, well over 2,500 for somebody to just file that registration for me. So this is 12 years later, grand Jessica’s team. This is a deal. You guys it’s like the deal of a lifetime and it protects you.

 

And it really covers you. So we love that. So all of you who are listening, if you’re in this place, whether you’re new and you are just coming up with names of really, frankly, especially for those of you guys who have content, you have IP, you have things that you haven’t protected yet. You haven’t done your due diligence.

 

I don’t want you to lose those Francesca. Doesn’t want you to lose those. And so if you have questions about this, I highly recommend that you hit Francesca up for an IP audit. Again, she can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram and she will, of course be back here on this sweet life entrepreneur podcast, again as well. And we’re going to be diving into copywriting next time,

 

which I know so many of our listeners have questions about protecting, like what actually is that? And so I’m excited to talk about that the next time that you are on the show. Thank you so much for being here and for all of your wisdom and pouring into our listeners. Thank you April. Thanks everyone.<inaudible> Wow. What an amazing episode.

 

Thank you so much for hanging out with us today. Again, join us live on clubhouse. You can follow me at April beach, turn on the little bell for notifications and you’ll get exclusive access to this room where Francesca will be here this week on Wednesday, April the seventh at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Taking your questions based on what we talked about on today’s show.

 

And don’t forget to connect with Francesca directly for her IP audit, which is a very important thing. It’s totally free. I don’t know anybody who shouldn’t take this opportunity up. She is absolutely a gifted expert at what she does. You can visit Francesca at the trademark attorney and she can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram and on clubhouse. And on Instagram,

 

you can just very simply click the link and schedule a direct free complimentary consultation to get your intellectual property audit started. All right, again, this is episode one of a two part episode. Next week, episode number 222. We’re coming back with Francesca again, talking all about how to protect your creative works through copyright protection. All right, you guys have an awesome day.

 

It’s so great to chat with you and thanks again for tuning into this sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast.

Episode 218: Entrepreneur Sleep: How To Thrive As A Peak Performer – with April Beach and Mollie McGlocklin

Mollie McGlocklin SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneurs Club on Clubhouse to join an upcoming room with Mollie and April

Who This Episode is Great For:

If you’re a sleepless entrepreneur, this show is for you.

Summary:

Sleep is affecting our businesses. Whether good, or bad, your sleep is connected to your company’s performance in some capacity. And, beyond that… our health and livelihood as humans.  But we all know that, right? 
 
If you’re like me – You have no desire to listen to a podcast that discusses everything you already know!  But this episode is different. Sleep expert, Mollie McGlocklin dives into tracking your sleep with tech, understanding Heart Rate Variability HRV, and simple small-steps you can do each day to work with your Circadian Rhythm. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know how your Circadian Rhythm affects peak performance
  2. Know how to read the date from your wearable sleep technology
  3. And have basic things you can do tomorrow morning towards more productive and healthy sleep

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to episode number 218. And I’m April beach, your host founder of the suite Life company. And I am so glad to be talking to you again, usually on this show,

 

we’re talking about scale strategies, online, offer creation, how to create your courses or your mastermind and funnels and marketing. But we are all about building a business to give you the life that you want. And so that requires a holistic view on strategies for both business and life. And so I love doing shows like the ones that we were doing today.

 

And let me be completely clear with you about why this show really hits home for me. About two weeks ago, I landed in Philadelphia from Denver for a weekend to visit my oldest son who plays lacrosse for the university of Delaware. And I was on my laptop. The whole entire time got out of the airport, got in the rental car, turned on clubhouse,

 

and I was really tired. You guys, I had just gotten to this point where I had been going, going, going, by the way, I thrive on going, going, going, but I turn on clubhouse and I was browsing through the rooms of what I should listen to. And there was a room that popped up regarding sleep and it really hit home for me because I knew that this is something that I do not do well in this area.

 

Now a little bit more behind the scenes. I don’t like sleeping. I love being awake. I do really well from 10:00 PM to 1:00 AM. You know, the world falls away, everything’s silent. And that’s when I really thrive as a creator, frankly. And so I would much rather be awake living life than be sleeping. And that’s the way I’ve been my whole entire life,

 

but it’s really taken a toll on me and let’s even go a little bit deeper in transparency behind the scenes. What I used to think when people talked about, Oh, you know, I hit quote unquote, that wall. These are the things that I thought, Oh, you’re going to love me. Or you are totally going to hate me and never listened to this podcast.

 

Again, here’s the honest truth. When I heard anybody say or tell their stories about how they got like super tired and hit a wall. These were the things that went through my head, keeping it real. I thought I am stronger than those people. I thought that will never happen to me. And I thought I am born to thrive in like this balls to the wall type of a life.

 

It’s always how I have been. I love living like this. These people just aren’t built like me. Okay. Talk about really, really judgmental. And that’s when things like hit us on the face because it is in the face because that’s exactly what happened to me in over the last couple of months, I have gotten completely exhausted. The second part of this and why this episode is so important to me personally right now is that I lost my father to dementia.

 

And I realized that the way my brain is functioning is not the same way. It was 10 to 12 years ago. And for whatever obvious reasons that is, you know, age, maybe being one of them, I’m not taking care of my brain. And it is one of my greatest assets. And so when I heard our guests today speak on this clubhouse room about sleep.

 

I knew that I personally needed for her to come in here and deliver some insane wisdom to me as a CEO, as a business owner. And I believe that there are some of you guys out there that need to hear this message and what she’s talking about as well. Now here’s the deal. If you’re like me, you haven’t seriously, no desire to listen to a podcast that discusses everything you already know that you aren’t doing right?

 

But this episode is different. Our guest today is going to dive into tracking your sleep and understanding technology behind sleep trackers. And she’s talking about simple steps, okay? Simple things that you can do. You know, we’re not going to come in here in this show saying you got to get sleep, but that’s not at all with this show is about,

 

which is why I personally appreciate this episode so much. So let me introduce you to who our guest expert is today. Molly McLaughlin is a creator of sleep as a skill, a company that optimizes people’s sleep through a unique blend of technology, accountability, and behavioral change. She created this company from her own experience when she literally has had not slept well her entire life,

 

she had massive, poor sleep habits. And all of a sudden she found herself in for months. She dealt with insomnia in her background is in behavioral change. And so she went down this rabbit hole to figure out like, what is going on with these disturbances in my sleep. And she really went in a way that did not include sleep AIDS. And because of her experience,

 

now this company was born and she is an absolute expert at helping you know, how to really get the sleep that you need and understand sleep. And that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. So at the end of this episode, you will know how your circadian rhythm affects your peak performance. You will know how to read the data from your wearable technology,

 

which was super cool because I wear sleep technology, but frankly, I really didn’t understand how to read the data. And so that is very cool. We’re talking about this on today’s show as well. And you’re going to walk away with some basic things you can do. First thing tomorrow morning to move towards more productive sleep in more healthy sleep. So here are the background notes,

 

everything we’re talking about, including a link to join the Sweetlife entrepreneurs club in clubhouse, where Molly and I are going to be going live. And she’s going to be chatting with you about your Entrepreneur sleep and peak performance questions can be found by visiting the show notes for this episode. There’s a lot of things in here and even more tools that Molly’s given you.

 

So if you want to know more about, we’re talking about Connect with Molly further, be part of this conversation and frankly learn right alongside me, visit Sweetlife co.com click on the podcast. And this is episode number 218. So let’s go ahead and dive in with Molly.<inaudible> All right. Hi, you guys. Welcome to another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur in business podcast.

 

I am so excited to be joined by my guest today. I’m actually found her on clubhouse. Many of you know, who’ve been listening that I am bingeing clubhouse and can’t get enough of it. And this is exactly why, because I get to dive into spaces that I never would have been able to before in find people like Molly. How do you say your last name off?

 

Yes. Perfect McLaughlin. Absolutely. Yes, I know. Is it phonetic? Is it not? Yes. And find people like Molly McLaughlin. I am so excited to welcome you here on this show. Can you introduce everybody to your area of expertise in super power? And just give us a little bit of background before we dive into what we’re talking about today.

 

Absolutely. Thank you so much for having me here. This has already been a pleasure. I can’t wait to get into more with you. I am the creator of a company called sleep is a skill that helps people optimize their sleep through a blend of technology, accountability, and behavioral change, and a little bit background on me and why I’m so obsessed with the topic of sleep and why it’s totally changed.

 

My life is that for so many years, I did everything not to do for your sleep. You know, every article you read what to do. I was doing the opposite in a lot of ways, but it really didn’t think it was much of a problem. I didn’t think much of it at all. Living in Manhattan as an entrepreneur, burning the candle at both ends stressed to the max.

 

And I just thought of my sleep as a lot of labels. I thought of it as I’m a night owl, I’m a short sleeper. I’m not the greatest sleeper. Oh, it must be in my jeans. That’s just how it is for me. And, and you know, a number of different things, but didn’t think of it as something that I would have much of a say of how to transform.

 

And I didn’t correlate when I was starting to get more and more sick at different things, you know, just getting run down anxious. I had guessed straight as I had shingles. I had a number of things that were just indicators, right. That you are stressed and things are not working. So, so yeah, and then it was not until I went through my own period of insomnia while traveling internationally.

 

So in different countries, you know, not speaking the same language and I cannot sleep. And it was really a lot of the entrepreneurship part of it that, you know, our businesses weren’t ready to be taken on the road yet. My fiance and I, and how it manifested was suddenly I can’t sleep. And the amount of anxiety that was happening during that period,

 

I went to the doctors in Croatia, got, you know, with Google translate and leave with their version of Ambien. And in that moment, kind of like, what is the game plan here am. I’m supposed to just take something like this for the rest of my life, that doesn’t align with my identity of who I think of myself and yet I’m desperate to sleep.

 

So what do I do? So what ended up happening was really just getting up under this area, going really down the rabbit hole of what it would take from a, what I learned to chronobiology and circadian rhythm perspective to transform my sleep. And then from that place, it really just snowballed into like podcasts, newsletters, courses, all of the things.

 

Okay. So you said so many things and we’re just going to kind of come together and pack it. But right now, I mean, your super power is helping high performers and entrepreneurs and small business owners have a healthy life and sleep. Yeah. That we all identify just like you said, I mean, I am you back in the past, right?

 

I definitely, I do not sleep as much. It goes in flows. I have an inconsistent sleep. You know, I have kids which brings a whole nother dynamic into that and I travel about five months a year. So with that being said, I think I have like a recipe for disaster relief disaster. And so I’m so excited to learn from you today.

 

And I know our listeners too, are going to be like, Oh yeah, that’s probably me. I’m like, so let’s start by just really unpacking this. So you said circadian rhythm. What is that for anybody that is not really aware of that term and what part of our bodies function in that capacity? How does that work? Yes. Perfect.

 

And I also want to say for what you’re sharing too, despite that being one of the lowest points at the time of my life was what it felt like, you know, just nothing is working. This is the worst thing is horrible. And yet I do now look back on it as being one of the best things that could have happened to me.

 

So if you are at any given spot in your journey around sleep, I think there really is so much to learn from it. It really, no pun intended woke me up and had me transform my life in ways that I don’t think I would have, unless it was at such a rock bottom place. So having said that, Well, just along the lines to thank you for saying that.

 

Cause I do feel like, I mean, I’m really transparent here with our listeners on the podcast. I mean, I do feel like, like I had hit a wall, I just turned 45 this week and I’ve always been able to push and push and push on a high performer, had tons of energy, always been able to do it. And it was just finally a couple of months ago as a first time in my whole entire life where I was so tired and I couldn’t push through,

 

I’ve still always been able to do that. I like, literally couldn’t think I literally couldn’t speak, like the words were coming out of my mouth incorrectly, but it was the first time ever where I feel like I hit that wall and I couldn’t keep pushing it forward. And so I knew at that point in time, and this was prior to Christmas that like,

 

I’m not healthy. I’m like, it doesn’t matter. I go to the gym every single day. All those things don’t matter. Like I knew that I was literally aging my brain and frankly, as with my father had dementia and these are all things that I’m starting to think about. And I’m saying, listen, I have really hit this wall and I need to sleep.

 

This is no longer something that, and I don’t want any of our listeners too. And this is the whole point of the show. Like, don’t get to the point that Molly did. Don’t you get to the point where I am, where I’m like stalking this woman on clubhouse. You guys help me. I have hit a wall. So we don’t want you to have to be to the point where I frankly am literally at this recording and where Molly was,

 

because how much more are you capable of being before you ever, ever get here and so on and so forth. So thank you for saying that. And that’s why I stopped you. Yeah, absolutely. It’s really important because I won, you know, I was reading nonstop, all these different things around how to improve my sleep and speaking with all these different experts and one thought leader in this area had made the point that when your sleep is not working,

 

there’s something that your body is really trying to tell you. And I’m not trying to say that in a loose, like esoteric way or anything, but I think that’s really important because how I was running my, this didn’t come out of a vacuum. This was from, you know, years of kind of a mismanagement of my time, my days my,

 

you know, keep pushing it to the next level. And, and so it occurred from a snowballing of that. And so what it really took was that to actually, for me to listen. So I don’t know the plus side while I at the time didn’t want to go through it. It actually was a blessing. And so I hope that there can be that message and that there is,

 

there are so many success stories on the other side of people being able to shift this area. So one, I acknowledge you for the sharing and the, the vulnerability there, because it’s so important. And to, you know, so then the, how, so what you said about the circadian rhythm, why this is important in this conversation is one just to kind of bring it back to the basics.

 

So no matter where you’re at and where your sleep journey is that we can always start to come back to one that this is a skill that, okay, so this is learnable. So let’s just let’s learn. So from the strategic rhythm perspective, one that exists on a spectrum was something that I didn’t understand. So the circadian rhythm is this 24 hour rhythm as human beings that we function within.

 

But that rhythm, the queuing system for that rhythm can either be on the spectrum of, from a strong side or weak side. And you might be falling somewhere in between that spectrum. Then I would make the argument that many of us are on the weaker side of that just as a modern society, how we’re, how we’re functioning and as diurnal creatures.

 

Yeah. This is all kind of coming from this concept around chronobiology the science of really time and how that impacts our biology as diurnal creatures. We are meant to be active during the day and at rest at night. And of course, in my example, I was doing the opposite, like, you know, upside down living. So we’re looking to,

 

how can we bring things back and align with those cue givers that will help our rhythms be strong? So we, you know, those people, those friends of ours that might go out, everyone goes out and out super late, but they still wake up at the exact same time, you know, early morning. And you’re like, how are they doing that?

 

That’s crazy. That’s actually what we’re looking to train for is that kind of specificity around just the automaticity of waking up routinely going to sleep routinely around the same times, but there’s tons of things we can do to get to there. Okay. Fascinating. And I know those people I’m married to one of those people that it doesn’t matter what time he goes to sleep.

 

It is like, this is what time he gets up every single day. Yeah. Okay. So talk to us about, you know, really why is this important for fully understanding for those higher achievers busy entrepreneurs? How does this fit into our, you know, whole life business strategy? Because to me, as a business strategist, the way I need to form it within my own brain is say,

 

this is part of my strategic business in life design. This is just as important is marketing and selling and other things. So it’s a very holistic approach to business and life. And so how for entrepreneurs and small business owners are really just high achievers who are listening to this, why is this so important? How does this really affect their everyday? And honestly their profit and their performance.

 

I mean, that’s what we’re really getting down to get to if that’s the driver great, that’s the driver, are you not making as much money as you could be because frankly you aren’t sleeping. Right. I’m sure that there’s some data and some correlation there. Absolutely. Well, so there’s so many places we can go with that, but I can just even say anecdotally that my fiance owns companies that help train poker players at the table that are high stakes,

 

lots of stress, and how to make those decisions, that their decisions in their thinking from a cognitive athlete perspective will impact, you know, possibly thousands and millions of dollars as a result. Right? So one of the first places that they begin is the sleep optimization perspective. And I work with tons of poker players in the management of that. And so I share that just because that’s a very tangible experience of at the table,

 

you can either walk away with lots of money or not. And so it’s kind of entrepreneurial in nature, but you apply that in the high stakes of your days of your, you know, business interactions with people and just that cognitive ability to show up consistently and reliably, like, you know, so in the example of myself for years, I, there wouldn’t be accountable illness around how I would be when I’d wake up in the morning.

 

It wouldn’t be like, Oh, okay. So for that next, really important client call or what have you, I will be bringing my a game. It wasn’t like that. It was like, I hope I get a good night’s sleep and you know that I can have that functionality. Right. Like, That’s me, I’m raising my hand. If you guys are watching the video,

 

it’s like, this is me. Yeah, for sure. Yes, exactly. Cause that, you know, and there’s tons of studies that will point to this. So whether it just error rates, if you’re sleep deprived and the amount of errors that you might make, if you’re taking scent, you know, test, or this is important for pilots,

 

you know, these would become life or death elements, but certainly from a productivity perspective, like you’re gonna have all your faculties available to you in those really times. So just to scale it back, I think of it as a couple of things. One, I think of it as super, super important for that productivity perspective. And also because I had so much of that mental health component in there with anxiety and stress and moodiness and crankiness and freak out,

 

then, then with that just, it provides for me just a really important space to be at a equilibrium with how I’m approaching the world around me and stress levels and anxiety levels. And we can get into some of the wearable indicators for that. So it’s not so esoteric. It really has some kind of quantified data behind it. Right. Okay. So yeah,

 

let’s go ahead and do that actually. Can you, I definitely want to talk about the wearables at the time of this recording. Probably if you’re listening to this six months or eight months from now, the wearable part will probably not be accurate enough today because the technology is evolving. And that’s what we’re kind of talking about behind the scenes, but let’s go ahead.

 

Can you start just by sharing a couple of steps for those of our listeners who listened, they’re like, okay, this is, I am April right now. I mean, just tell me like, what should I be doing to get on top of this, the process of bringing this into order. Yes. Great. Okay. So step number one.

 

What I actually say is despite the fact that a lot of what I’ll be talking about from the circadian rhythm kind of lifestyle perspective is that a lot of it’s kind of how to harken back to almost Hunter gatherer days and like, you know, aligning with sunrise and sunset. I’m not saying everyone needs to rise with the sun. I’m not making that at all,

 

but I’m saying that there’s a lot of things we can do to bring about that workability with those rhythms of nature, because that’s going to really result in higher sleep efficiency and quality of our sleep. And at the very same time, despite the fact that I’m saying that I’m also gonna promote the marriage of technologies. And so much of this technology is at the source of our kind of being off-kilter with the,

 

that relationship, ironically, then bringing in tech, I’ve found to really make a difference to game-ify this. So again, you know, down the road, you’re listening. What I would say is the first place to begin is a logging system of where your sleep is at right now is really, really eyeopening to people because often people say, I know I’m not sleeping well,

 

but then we try to get up under will. How much, how many hours are we sleeping? What times are we sleeping? How many wake ups, what’s your sleep onset look like? All of these sorts of things. And a lot of it is like, well, I don’t know some gray areas, a lot of question marks because it is it’s,

 

it’s such a hard area to track. So getting a proper or getting a sleep tracker of whatever at the time of listening to this is known to be one of the most effective on the market at the moment. Right. And follow them On Instagram or club ads. Cause I’m sure she’ll be up to date with this. So yes it is. She will.

 

I’m sure be talking about what is the most up-to-date thing when you are listening to this episode? Yes. I’m often fondly known as gadget girl by the end of the clubhouse. So we were talking about that was my name and not from a perspective that these are infallible, there’s still things you don’t want to just blindly listen to whatever stats are coming back.

 

You want to be aware of what they’re good at, what they’re not so good at, but either way, what they tend to be pretty solid at is are you asleep or are you awake? What time does that look like? But then also some health metrics that indicate the, your recovery that you attained throughout the course of the night. So all of those things will give us,

 

you know, kind of a window or insight into your sleep. So I say, start with that first place because, and years back, what it was, one of the first recommendation was keep a sleep diary, you know, write it out manually. And now you could do that, but also, you know, to begin to start tracking, it will be automated for you and often provide a way more insight that you might be surprised by some blind spots.

 

And along those lines, I have a question for you about one of those metrics with one of my slit trackers that I, that I had used in the past. And you mentioned it when, before we started recording this, which was heart rate variability, can you explain? I mean, I saw it on my sleep tracker. I, when I’m like Googling it online,

 

it was actually really hard for me to understand why that was so important. Can yes, it was a one Oh one on that. I’m so glad you said that. So this metric, this one metric you could devote into multiple podcasts, there’s actually entire podcasts that just talk about how to kind of understand this one metric and influence it. You’re not alone in the confusion of it better.

 

I’m like, why don’t I get it? So it, but it’s the reason why it’s I foresee one, it’s already ballooned in popularity around understanding this. And I foresee it being even more and more influential in our health. So the one, what is it? It’s heart rate variability HRV is basically the time interval in between your heartbeat and indicator of your recovery.

 

So if you can think of heart rate as kind of your load, that’s put on to you, you know, moment to moment, then HRV is reflective of how quickly can you recover from moment to moment? So it’s recovery of both mental elements of recovery, but also physical elements of recovery. And that physical can be about like the foods you’re eating the workouts,

 

you’re doing the air quality in your space, preexisting conditions that you might have going on. But then the mental component is really eye-opening to just how you’re relating to the world around you as entrepreneurs to, Oh my goodness. Like that can be really eyeopening. You get a lot of stuff on your plate and suddenly that that number will show that impact. And that can be a really cool way for those of us that might want to do that.

 

Push through, push through mindset. And I’m so one of those to start to respect the importance for recovery time and almost relating to our body, like an athlete would to build in that really next level of recovery so that you can take on all the things you gotta take off. Okay. Yeah. And I can see that I do understand a certain aspect and the correlation of that because when I used to train for fitness competitions and we used to do the heart rate training,

 

and when you know, between the things I was doing, like how fast would my heart recover between sets? And so is that kind of the same thing that we’re talking about here that’s happening in sleep that we’re measuring? Yes, exactly. So that’s why a lot of people are excited about particularly longitudinal nocturnal HRV. So there’s, you can measure, of course your HRV 24 seven and the nighttime HRV can be really eye-opening because that’s giving us an indication while there’s not presumably as much noise that’s happening because there’s a lot of noise on your measurement of your HRV during the day.

 

Cause you’re, you’re eating, you’re, you’re talking, you’re working out all these things. Whereas when you’re sleeping, presumably that’s largely recovery time and that is what HRV is all about. But so if you wake up and traditionally, this is very simplified because there’s way more nuances to this metric, but often the higher it is from your baseline, the more recovered you are and the more you see it kind of dipped down,

 

then that can often indicate that you are being more taxed, you’re stressed or you’re getting sick. So it’s actually really popular right now. That’s why it’s trending to with COVID that a lot of people are looking to this as indicators and days in advance of when you might even feel that you’re getting rundown, that that number is shifting. Then that can be a signal to really prioritize that recovery.

 

So those are just some of the ways that you can relate to it. But in the practical application, what I see with my clients is so all the clients are wearing wearables. They’ll see, Oh my God, my HRV is really dipping like significantly. So then they’ll prioritize recovery from whatever that looks like. So if they’re big time athletes, then they will adjust their training to really lower that.

 

And to take that off time, if they’re just entrepreneurs and they might kind of scale back some of their calls or what have you to really make a difference with that number and then get recovered in a way that can make a difference. The following day, That’s amazing. This is so much great information. Okay. So number one, log, make sure that we’re paying attention to what we’re doing.

 

Get a wearable let’s, you know, we’re not going to do with the archaic way of tracking when we go to sleep. I mean, there is just absolutely so much data out there that I’m hearing you say that it’s important for us to track know and be able to understand so that we can adjust things. So what else would you recommend for those people who are listening after they go through these first steps?

 

Like what type of common adjustments are typically? I know every single person is different, but are typically beneficial that you have seen with high performers and entrepreneurs. Yeah. So one asterisk that I would put for the wearables is just ensuring that you’re, we’re not getting like a no CBO effect by saying, Oh my God, I have so many friends that literally would come because I’m only getting 20 minutes of deep sleep,

 

30 minutes of REM or whatever. And so one just know that as of, at least this time, the recording, most of the hand and wrist wearables, they are said so much great information. I love what is available there. And the sleep stage classification in particular. So knowing is this deep is this Ram is this light, it’s not the best.

 

So to not get yourself all riled up around that part, instead focus on those basics that we talked about, what time did you go to sleep? What time did you wake up? And then some of those recovery metrics, so to stay in that zone. So that’s just my aspect around that. But then what I would say for, for all humans and particularly entrepreneurs is this concept of circadian rhythm.

 

Entrainment is really, really valuable to have a framework by which you set up your days so that you can strengthen that circadian rhythm. So you can be like your husband, right. And just kind of the goal is to be like your husband and to basically wake up around the same time off to go to bed at the same time, all of that comes from that.

 

So this is actually a term you can find in any kind of chronobiology textbook of understanding that you are in training your circadian rhythm, but that is from a number of what they call time givers that are external to you, that you are playing a role in from a behavioral perspective of getting so a couple of those that’ll just rattle off real quick. The top down most important one is light,

 

particularly sunlight. And the timing of that. So if you get nothing out of what I’m saying, then I would definitely say that first thing in the morning, how to train yourself to get even just a few minutes. I mean, ideal would be more, but a few minutes of sunlight outside. And unfortunately behind a window, doesn’t really count. It counts,

 

but takes much, much longer estimates with Jamie’s ICER out of Stanford, puts it at anywhere from 50 to a hundred times a longer to reset your master clock each morning, if you’re getting sunlight behind a window versus outside. So you want to just get yourself outside, but also expose particularly your eyes to that morning, sunlight, you know, you want it to be wherever you might be on the globe.

 

We’re aiming for that to be in the morning hours usually before like 10:00 AM of getting that morning light. And the reason for that is that behind your eyes is the super charismatic nucleus, which is your master clock that influences all your peripheral clocks as to what time it is. And why that’s important is then a whole cascade of kind of hormones and functionality happened based on what time the body perceives it to be.

 

And so we want it to be as consistent, those triggering systems as possible. So that’s that light in the morning and then dosing it throughout the day. But then you want as bright days as possible and as dim nights as possible. And when I say dim, it’s like post sunset, you want to be getting, I mean, really the, the actual recommendation is like candles,

 

but I know that’s not always so practical. So even like, I got like red lights over here. So, you know, you can, that can be another thing that you can bring in if you’re not willing to do the candles. But so we’re looking for very, very dim lighting that allow us to have our cake and eat it too. So versus like how things used to be sun would set.

 

We kind of go to sleep not long after for thousands of years now, we want to be able to still like, you know, do things, but we don’t want to impact our melatonin production. So that kind of red light candles or worst case scenario, incandescent lights that have more red in them, those can make a difference. So that getting that light right,

 

and then the next step would be temperature. So being mindful of really having this arc of your body temperature throughout the course of the day. So high temperature throughout the day movement activity, eating, you know, having engaging in lots of dynamic, cognitively demanding tasks, all those things during the day. But then in the evening, shifting over to fasting,

 

you know, relaxation, resting, connecting kind of calming everything down. So for entrepreneurs, what we do is create really like say layout of your day, where you have a set wake up time, he was set bedtime. And then from that place that had a Creek kind of two parts of your day, like a day mode and a night mode.

 

And then even just these little things like understanding like, Oh my God, when I have my food will influence the timing of when I fall asleep. And when I wake up and, or the amounts of wake-ups that I have throughout the night, things of this nature can be super, super empowering for people I learned so much. I never knew that about the sun in the morning.

 

Thank you so much. I’m like, literally I’m here taking notes. It’s just incredibly fascinating. And so the sun and the light, obviously all makes sense now that you explained that, but that would never be anything that would be, you know, just obviously common knowledge to those of us who aren’t experts like you. And so thank you so much for sharing that.

 

Okay. You have given us a ton of information. I have one last question that I’m curious about how you’re going to answer. Obviously I don’t know it, and that’s why I’m asking it. Is there a minimum amounts of sleep that general and I’m sure everybody’s different, but generally speaking that you believe people need to function in a healthy capacity. Oh yeah.

 

That’s the million dollar question. Everyone wants to know that one for sure. And you know, so some of the, the known recommendations are having us as it, a healthy adult, as it changes throughout the years, basically what age you are. But as a healthy adult than getting anywhere from seven to nine is the recommended amount that we’ll have thrown out.

 

There are other people that will speak to that you can, for some people might make sense to be in the, you know, six is range and what have you, based on their, the quality of that sleep. So I will say that it’s kind of split on that, that topic, but certainly what you can do is through the tracking element of things,

 

start to get up under that. The more we have some of these kind of top down, most important things addressed, then what often begins to emerge because, you know, sometimes you got to get past all of this sleep deprivation and built up time of variability, of sleeping all kinds of hours, and then not enough and ups and downs. So once we start having those structures often,

 

what emerges is more of your kind of set point for your sleep at the age that you’re at and at the health level and energy expenditure that you’re at each day. So you can have a clear understanding of that once everything else just kind of falls into order as well, is what I’m hearing you say. Okay, I lied. I have one, one more question.

 

Can you catch up on sleep? Mm, yeah. Good question. I know. Cause then it’s like that sleep debt topic was very popular for a number of years. So that is another one that is a bit of a point of contention, but there’s different schools of thought so well, if we go back to the conversation around dementia that you mentioned,

 

that’s a really big topic that’s come out of. This looks like a really strong correlation between sleep deprivation and neurodegenerative disorders. So whether it’s Parkinson’s, Alzheimer’s dementia, different things of that nature really linked because of the lack of proper cleaning. So glymphatic drainage was the coin, the term that was coined around this. So glymphatic drainage meaning versus lymphatic it’s glymphatic and glymphatic is the cleansing process of the brain each night during sleep,

 

during deep sleep in particular. And what it’s doing is it’s basically rinsing out with a janitorial process of your brain, of the buildup of waste products in the brain each night. And that’s what amyloid beta plaques are. Basically what’s left over. It’s a kind of calcification in the brain if we’re not having that proper amount. So the concern, so the reason I mentioned that is that we don’t see a lot of great ways to counteract that.

 

So say if you’ve been doing that for years and years, and there’s this buildup of this kind of a dirty brain, if you will, that buildup, and it’s very similar to brains that we see for late stage Alzheimer’s dementia or what have you. It looks a hand in hand and we don’t have a really strong way to then reverse that. So what I would say,

 

even from that perspective alone, is that we don’t want to rely on this kind of messy relationship to sleep where I’ll make up for it on the weekends, or what have you, because also if we just get back to the basics of what we know for great sleep, that the more we have that variability and the up and downs, one of the term for it is actually social jet lag.

 

And so social jet lag being this concept that, you know, Oh, around five days of the week, I’m really great with my sleep. I do pretty consistent, but then on the weekends, you know, I want to let loose and then you stay up late and it’s like three hours difference and, or more or whatever. And so with that,

 

then it’s, you’re having the experience that’s similar to, from a biological perspective, similar to jet lag. When you try to get yourself back on your normal schedule on Sunday night or Monday or whatever, but you didn’t go anywhere, but you’re still having that negative impact on your body. So the long and the short of it is it doesn’t seem to be a reliable method to build that sleep debt and kind of knock it out by having these long stretches of sleep.

 

Because then that also impacts cause quality sleep is a measurement of how your sleep was the night before the night before that. And they, before that. So it kind of all plays a role in there. So if you didn’t sleep so well, one night, often people will benefit from what’s known as kind of rebound sleep because you now, the body is really craving to get itself back on track and it will,

 

you know, kind of greedily get the sleep staging that it needs, but you can’t rely on that as a sustainable element because then that throws off your circadian rhythm. And now you’re getting tired at the same time. And it’s so frustrating. Right? All of that makes sense. Oh, thank you so much. I learned so much today. Thank you so much for being a guest on the show and we’re going to make sure everybody knows how to find you in the show notes,

 

but can you tell everybody who’s listening to this? Like, Oh my gosh, I need more of Molly. I need her help. I need her in my life. You know, what does that look like? How can people work with you more? Yeah. Well, number one, just thank you so much for having me. Thank you so much for your also just transparency and vulnerability about how you’re relating to your sleep.

 

And, you know, just gives us all hope in these different periods when we are struggling to hear, okay, I’m not alone. Cause you know, that’s really what I was dealing with with my sleep. So, and it’s takes courage to share that cause you could be like, Oh yeah, I’ve got my whole life together. And dah, dah,

 

dah. So, you know, I really, really admire that. So great work with that. And then yes, if you are struggling with your sleep, this is a real mission-based thing for me. so1@sleepasaskill.com, there’s lots of things that are available for free. We have a weekly newsletter, so I call it Molly’s Monday obsessions, cause I’m pretty obsessive about this topic.

 

And so all of these, you know, things that I’m obsessing about in the world of sleep and also kind of asleep experiments, lots of graphs and fun charts and whatever. And so that’s every Monday when you sign up for that, you also get a free downloadable PDF. That’s optimized bedroom, how to optimize your sleep environment comes right along. And then we also have a sleep assessment that you can take.

 

So whatever you’re dealing with with your sleep, then that will get you some kind of tailored advice around those areas. We have weekly podcasts with different sleep experts and you know, sleep tech and what have you. So all of that is available for free. And we put out a lot on social media and we’re really amping that up as well. And then if you are really struggling,

 

you need more than that. Then we do have courses and one-on-ones and different ways of working together as well. Wow. All right. Thank you so much, Molly. I’m definitely going there and I appreciate your time and your expertise and pouring into me and our whole entrepreneur community. And I am sure that this is going to be an important topic. It has been,

 

but really, as you said, moving forward. So we just really appreciate your expertise and, and being here with us today and it was such a pleasure to get to meet you same here. Thank you so much. You are welcome. Thank you.<inaudible> What a great show. Thank you so much for learning alongside me and hanging out. Most likely you knew a lot about this information.

 

Probably a lot more than I did, but it’s just such a pleasure to, to learn. And I took a million notes if you’d like to join Molly and me in a clubhouse room where we are talking all about sleep, wearable technology and all these things so that you can function at your peak performance as an entrepreneur, whatever that looks like for you go to sweet life,

 

community dot and There you can join by link our clubhouse club. You still need to join separately on clubhouse if you’re not a member, but you’re going to get an email with reminders and, and an invitation to this room with a direct link to this room. So again, you can go to sweet life, community.com to join our Sweetlife entrepreneurs club on clubhouse to talk to Molly live about this.

 

And of course, all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com click on the podcast. And this is episode number 218. Have a great day. And I’ll talk to you guys soon.

Episode 211: How To Fill Your Programs Using Guest Speaking – with April Beach and Heather Sager

Heather Sager SweetLife Entpreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab Heather’s FREE training: How to Build Authority as a Speaker WITHOUT Second Guessing What You Say

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs looking to get in front of your ideal audience and establish yourself as an expert in your space but you’re not exactly sure how to go about it through the process of speaking. 

Summary:

If you’re an entrepreneur and you’re looking to get in front of your ideal audience, establish yourself as a trusted source and solution, and sell more of your signature programs, services or offers, speaking is a great way to do that. However there are strategic steps that should be followed in order to achieve your ideal outcome, and what we learn in speaking to this week’s guest is that you can actually send clients away by saying the wrong things.
 
And this week’s show, Heather Seger, strategic speaking advisor, guides you through her four-step Speak for Authority method to fill your programs using speaking. Heather also dives into statistics speakers need to know, how to tell the right story, and expert insights to make sure you are speaking up in the right way, to the right audience, about the right topics. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand the four steps to the “speak for authority method”
  2. Know how to nail your message
  3. And understand quick strategies to choose your signature talk topic

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 
 

You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Welcome back to the show. This is episode number 211, And then I’m April beach. Super great to be connected with you today. We are diving in and we’re talking about how to fill your programs using guest speaking.

 

And we have Heather Sager, the one and only in the house. So what you can expect from today’s show is if you are a coach or a consultant, and you’re really good at what you do, even the leading expert in your space, but you’re having trouble getting noticed will speaking could be a really powerful way to establish yourself as a leader and get in front of the perfect audience.

 

And so today we’re talking all about the steps to do that and giving you the methodology from the expert herself, Heather Sager, but real quick, before we jump into that, if you’re new to hearing the show welcome, this is the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast, and we give you step-by-step business trainings that are so good. There’s no way they should be free.

 

You can find all the resources we have by visiting sweet life co.com. And if you’re interested in scaling your business, developing your signature program, signature method, signature offers in truly scaling your business to live life on your terms for massive profit. Then we would love to help you get to that place. Visit Sweetlife co.com and that is our Ninja skill. And that’s what we do.

 

All right, diving into today’s episode. This is for entrepreneurs in all stages of my start to scale up system. So we like to tag these episodes in advance. So, you know, whether or not this is really a good, good opportunity for you to learn and grow based on the phase of business you’re in. So if you weren’t sure what phase of business you’re in and therefore what you should be focusing on right now,

 

you can go and take a very short quiz just by visiting sweet life co.com forward slash quiz. And we’ll give you a full download of exactly where you are in your business, growth and development in exactly what you should be focusing on right now, so that you can grow your company faster. So that’s one resource I wanted to share with you. And along those lines of this particular episode is for those of you who are in phases two,

 

three or four of that start to scale up system. So hopefully that will equip you to know whether or not you should hang out with us any longer. And I’ll tell you if you’re in this phase, you are not going to want to miss this episode. And one other quick housekeeping announcement. I know that we have probably been talking about clubhouse way too much,

 

but I wanted to let you know that you can connect with us and connect with our suite life podcast, guests experts. By following me on clubhouse, I am at April beach on clubhouse, and we now host a weekly room at 12 o’clock, every single Wednesday. And that is Eastern standard time. So if you want to be on the hot seat,

 

if you want my eyes and your business to help you strategize your next steps, find us on clubhouse and subscribe to our clubhouse updates. If you are not on clubhouse yet, or if you just want the updates you can visit Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse. And we’ll keep you in the loop of what’s happening on clubhouse while you might be waiting to get on the app and we will send you reminders and invitations to our upcoming rooms.

 

So I know that was a lot of information and you can find all the information I just shared with you and the resources for these show notes, which is going to be@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash two 11. Okay, let me introduce you to our fabulous guest on today’s show. You get to hear from Heather Sager. Heather helps entrepreneurs structure their ideas, clarify their message and hone their speaking skills so they can deliver a magnetic live presentations,

 

videos, and workshops to grow their authority, whether on a physical or a virtual stage, she’s spoken on stages around the world. Teaching six to seven figure business owners, how to grow their company using effective communication. She also works one-on-one with business owners to prep them for the stage and help you manage and prepare your message for the most impact. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode.

 

Again, all of those amazing resources that I shared and everything we’re talking about with Heather can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash two 11.<inaudible>. All right, you guys welcome back to another awesome episode here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur business podcast. And I am visited today by none other than Heather Sager in what we’re talking about is something that’s so important.

 

I know many of you guys have questions about, so we are immediately diving into how to fill your programs using guests speaking. So Heather, thank you so much for being on the show today. Give yourself an awesome intro, an intro that you deserve because you are a very powerful at getting people amazing results and tell everybody about what you do. Thank you so much.

 

I’m thrilled to be here. Thanks for the chance to serve your audience today and talk about pressure on an intro. I mean, I mean, honest, I will say behind the scenes, so I have followed Heather on Instagram and it’s one of those things where you’ve been connected and a little bit connected, but not completely connected. And I knew that you guys needed to hear from Heather.

 

So very excited to have you here. Thank you. Thank you for that. So, as April said, I’m Heather Sager. So I’m a coach for online Entrepreneurs and essentially what that means. I always joke that I teach people how to do the thing that most people fear more than death, which is public speaking and in the online space. It’s kind of funny because we think about public speaking back.

 

If y’all worked in corporate ever, how you think about getting up in front of a group and giving a presentation or teaching a workshop, or we think about speakers as the people who live their life on the road at conferences on big stages. And none of those things seem to really fit in the online space of coaches and course creators and online entrepreneurs. And what I like to remind people is the fact that as business owners,

 

we speak to people every single day. So we are already speakers. It’s not like a label that we just, all of a sudden adopt. We’re already speakers. And so I, what I do is I teach people how to do it with intention and purpose. So what they speak about actually connects back to not only what they’re passionate about, but also what they do in their business.

 

I think your voice has the potential to be a magnet for other people, for them to go, Ooh, I’m not only do I like her. I want to learn more from her. And the more that you get out and use your voice on different platforms, the more you pull people back with you that they’ll want to join your programs and hang out with you more and buy from you.

 

So that’s what I do. My background is my many entrepreneurs is incorporat where for years I spoke on stages around the world as a corporate trainer, where I taught actually entrepreneurs in the medical space. So doctors and their teams, I taught them customer service and sales to very taboo topics in the medical space tell you, as a 27 year old kid, it felt like teaching doctors how to sell,

 

how to talk about what they did, how to talk to their teams, how to talk to their patients. That was an intimidating task at hand. So I had to learn how to speak in a very different way. I had to learn how to be influential and persuasive with an audience who was highly skeptical of my experience, my age, everything about me.

 

And so that’s where I got my like big girl chops around speaking. That’s where I had to fight through all my own insecurities about being a, I was talking about being like a baby nugget on a stage being an unexperienced or inexperienced professional. Like I had to work through all of those mental issues. We go through. I had to do that in a very highly publicized,

 

highly criticized space, but I did damn good job. And I realized that while I love my job as a trainer, what I really loved was teaching people how to use their voice for good. And I got really good at storytelling. I got really good at the body language and the hand gestures and all those things that come with speaking that are more than just the message.

 

And I started getting people asking me, could you teach me how to do that on a stage? Or could you teach me how to lead a workshop? And I found all of my free time in corporate was teaching my peers and other businesses how to do what I was doing. And at some point I was like, I don’t want to do this for anybody else anymore.

 

Why don’t I just do this full time? So I made the leap like many do, which is, let me start my own business and help other people do the thing that I love. But here’s the kicker. It wasn’t just about speaking. It was about speaking with purpose because I think speaking is like gasoline on a fire. I think speaking is one of the best marketing strategies that we can use in our business.

 

And I think people treat it as a skill, but speaking, it’s actually a strategy. So many things that I want to say, right, right now about all those things. First of all, now you guys know I wanted Heather on the show buyer that was like, okay, we can just end it, just go work with other, and she’s going to help you be just this insane speaker,

 

but you don’t really, you said so many things though. So as business developers and obviously that’s what we do at the Sweetlife company, we help people develop their programs and we help them develop life-changing programs and offers and these amazing services. Right. And one of the things that they are always asking about is, but how do I separate myself from other businesses that are delivering the same type of results besides doing it within the framework of my program?

 

Like how do I stand out? And it always comes back to taking the authority on what, you know, in stepping out and speaking about it. So that’s the first thing. And I can’t wait to dive into the strategies we’re going to talk about here today on the show, but something else that you said that it’s so true is that you’re speaking to people all the time.

 

It doesn’t always have to be a webinar or an actual live event. But when, as an online entrepreneur, when you have the opportunity to actually speak to somebody and take them on a journey that you have pre crafted, it is a skill. And that’s how you get people to follow you that are the right people. And I, I want to just kind of pause for a second saying,

 

even if you’re listening to the show and you’re like, wow, I, you know, speaking doesn’t fit into my business model, listen to what Heather’s saying, because you’re already speaking. So let’s make it so you don’t suck at it, right? Let’s make every single moment that you are having the, honestly, the privilege, just like I just felt very blessed and privileged that people listened to the podcast.

 

Right? All of us, when somebody is listening to what we have to say, it is a very unique opportunity and a privilege to be able to speak to these people. So what we say and how we say it is incredibly, incredibly important. So just love everything that you said there. And I appreciate how direct you are about the importance of this.

 

So you help establish business owners really take the lead in doing so by speaking an increase. What I love of course is the sale of their programs. Talk about how you do that. You have a very special method and I’m going to tout Heather’s method here for a second. By way. If you all don’t have a method we need, we want you to have a method to make you known into gain the trust of the people.

 

You’re leading. Talk to us about your method in what is that called? And can you guide us through your method today? Yes. 100%. I love methods. We were sharing our love of frameworks and methods, and just easier ways to help people understand what it is you do, right? We all think things make sense in our own heads, but really our own heads are a very special place that only we understand.

 

So we have to be able to articulate them. So my signature method that I teach inside my program speak up to level up. It’s where I teach online course creators and coaches, how to leverage speaking in a way that’s going to grow their business. We walk through something. I call the speak for authority method. And the reason why we call it the speak for authority method is every business owner has different goals related to speaking.

 

Some people might be like, Hey, I want to get paid to speak $10,000 for a keynote or $40,000 for a keynote. That’s one strategy. But when it comes to speaking, there are several strategies that you can apply. One can be growing your revenue in your program. So selling from stages, another could be driving leads to your social media accounts or leads to your list or leads to your offers.

 

Another one could be just not peeing your pants. When you go live on a platform, it could just be growing your confidence. But I think throughout all of it, speaking is like a business card for your business and all of these, their authority boosting activities that when you grow your authority, you have the ability to charge more, get on better stages network with the people that you want to network with,

 

collaborate with the business partnerships you want to have when you have authority, which is clout, where people see you as the go-to in your field, it seems like doors open naturally. So if you aren’t known, if people don’t know who you are, you could be the best at what you do, but until other people point at you and say, she knows what she’s doing,

 

or he’s an expert in this, by the way you don’t say you’re an expert. You let other people do that for you until that moment comes. It doesn’t really matter how good your program is. You have to articulate it, make it sound like a big deal and get other people talking about it. And that’s where growing your authority becomes a really important thing.

 

Wow. Okay. Yeah. So talk to us about this, speak for authority method. And I love how you preface it by saying that the reason why it’s so important is because all these goals are absolutely important and they do apply probably to every single person listening to the show. So what is the first part of this method? Where does somebody start when they want to take action on that?

 

Yeah. You’re going to love this one because this goes right up your alley of what you teach, which is number one is nail your messaging. What I mean by that is you have to nail, who are you talking to? What do you have to offer? And how do you talk about those core offerings, your messaging? So, what’s interesting is the first time I taught my program,

 

when I started working with groups of entrepreneurs versus one-on-one, I started by going, let’s create your talk and I would start extracting ideas out of their head and formulating a signature talk with them. And what I realized pretty quickly was, Oh my gosh, this was the first time they were vocalizing their ideas. And some of them didn’t even have their programs fully formatted or organized in a way that really got people Results.

 

So I found out, you know what, when people start moving from just writing down their ideas or drawing out their ideas, when they start articulating their ideas, that’s when they realized, Oh, this either makes sense or it doesn’t. So step number one, nailing your messaging means that you are not just thinking off, like speaking off the cuff or winging it all the time.

 

Here’s this big myth that happens a lot of times when we see experts where we see influencers on a podcast or on a video or on clubhouse, we think, Oh, they’re just so naturally gifted. But here’s the thing. These people have been talking about these things over and over and over and over again, they know what they’re talking about. It’s not by chance.

 

It’s on purpose now, sometimes it’s by chance because they’ve just done it enough where they know no, but they have discovered what their core talking parts are. You have to understand what should you, and what should you not be talking about to lead people into your business, not lead them to other people’s businesses. Like there is a difference. You can talk about a lot of things,

 

but if you don’t have your messaging nailed, you could be providing a lot of education, but then serving them up open doors to have other people help them because they don’t realize how it connects back to you. Wow. Okay. And to totally put you on the spot here, at least as because everybody’s saying like, Oh my gosh, shoot, am I doing this?

 

Am I, cause everybody wants to be out there and sharing information, a great value. Can you give us an example of how sharing some information as in a particular way, may lead somebody to go work with somebody else? Yeah. I’ll give you me. It’s an example. Okay. I talk about speaking, right? And I want you to imagine speaking.

 

This is like this giant ocean of information. It’s in the, the marketing ocean. There’s so many different things we can speak about. And one or two times I did podcast episodes or interviews where people are like, Oh, speaking on camera, Heather, will you come talk about getting over your fear of the camera? And I’m like, sure, I love this.

 

This is within my wheelhouse. But what I realized is when I would start doing all these interviews that were specific to getting over your fear of the camera or going live on Facebook or all these things, which I, I do teach, what I realized was my messaging was really specific to social media speaking. And my offer is how do you speak on all kinds of stages?

 

Get your messaging down, use guest stages. Yes. Use your stages. But the speaking on lives and Instagram stories was such a minute point. I don’t want people to know me as the person to help you get over your fear of the camera. Like that’s not what my program is about. Even though I have episodes around it, like the messaging while it was a good,

 

relevant topic, it wasn’t core messaging. That’s going to drive back to my program, speak up to level up. I mean, it’s a lesson in my program, but it’s not the core concept. So I think a lot of times this thing that happens is we’re like, Oh, it’s within the wheelhouse. Well, you have to think about, is it like a neighbor down the block in your content?

 

Or is it like on the block, like on your street, in the house that you’re trying to attract people to. Wow. That’s so important. Okay. I’m just going to take a little, left-hand turn tangent here as we are all diving into, or as many people as we possibly can, we’re driving into clubhouse. For example, I just did the recording of this hosted a,

 

a welcome event room for a bunch of women entrepreneurs last night. And they were all asking, what should I be talking about in these rooms? And I felt grateful now. I didn’t totally lead them astray, but it was always coming back to cause I’m obviously not the speaking coach, but it was always like, what do you want to be known for?

 

And I think that this is so exactly important what you said, because there are so many things that we can talk about. I can, you know, talk about a million components of, of our program as well in, in the ways and other things that are like supporting evidence, supporting document, but not that may nugget. So what I’m hearing you say in what I want,

 

all of you guys to hear is what Heather saying is that go for go after what you want to be known for. This is also important why we have your signature program created so we know what we’re selling people into. So it aligns with your program so important. And I think that there are so many people that are just looking for any opportunity to get in front of an audience that they are willing to speak on.

 

Oh, I can speak on that. Oh sure. I can speak on that. And what you’re saying is that is not strategy. Let’s be very strategic and make sure that in the little amount of time that somebody is willing to give you attention, to hear what you have to say, that you are making a good use of that in establishing an understanding of who you are,

 

who your brand is and the, in the end Results you provide bingo so power. And let me give you a visual for that, because I want to make sure hearing me say, don’t ever talk about those things. Right? Okay. I want you to imagine, do you remember back in, I don’t know if some kind of math class, when we were in school,

 

that something called a scam. I think it’s called a scattergram. It’s like the graph that you would draw with the dots. And it’s like, when you would have a point, it’d be like all these dots that you’d look for the trends of the dots. Maybe this is a terrible example, but go with me here for a second. I’m sticking.

 

Yeah. You guys should see behind the scenes in the recording. I’m like, ah, So if you think about like the dots, like mapping different coordinates, but I want you thinking about is you want to map like the bulk of your coordinates. I E the bulk of your speaking to your signature offer. But if you have a little dab, like,

 

Ooh, I’m going to talk about this because it’s sexy or I’m going to talk like, I’ll do a room talking about how do you do your voice on clubhouse, not what I teach, but it’s a sexy topic that people want. Like if my little scattergram, gosh, I hope that’s what it’s called. If I have like a couple of beeps and boops of topics that are outside of my core,

 

that is not going to dilute. I’m known for, it’s just going to expand it. But if I spend too much time outside of my core topic, then I will be unforgettable because there’s no repetition on my core topic of people seeing over and over again. Oh, I want to speak on guest stages. Heather, Sagers a speaking coach for online entrepreneurs.

 

Oh, you want to know how you speak into this strategy? Heather, Sagers the coach to help you with that. Like you have to make sure your repetition in your wheelhouse is happening in order to earn the right to have those scattered topics. Absolutely. Awesome. Visual. Thank you so much. I have no idea what you’re talking about because frankly,

 

I think I was skipping school in stoned, every high school math class, but just keeping it real with that being said, I can totally get the visual and that completely makes sense. My teenage boys are going to listen to this podcast and yeah. It’s cool. Your mom’s super cool. Oh, they they’ve heard all the stories. Okay. I am redeemed.

 

Whew. Anyway. Yes. Totally makes sense. Okay. So you’re going to be unforgettable the closer you stay to what I’m hearing you say, the core, the center of that. Scattergram like the primary message. So powerful. Super awesome. All right. So step number one is like, we’re still at step. Number one, you guys, this is our goal.

 

The information that Heather has given you here. So nailing that message in deciding what we’re talking about. So the second step in that is obviously an extension of that. The second step you say is creating the actual signature talk itself. Sure. A little bit about how to go about doing that. Yeah. So for those of you who like cooking, I love cooking.

 

Imagine step one is like your amazing applause where you get all your ingredients out and you know what you’re going to make. Step two was actually following the recipe to build your delicious food, whatever you’re making your meal. So your signature talk, you’re not coming up with random things on the fly. It’s strategic because you’ve already done that homework. So your signature talk needs to guide your audience from where they are to where you want them to go,

 

which doesn’t have to be like a hub, but a tricky to buy my program. You need to guide them in their thinking and equip them with the tools to be successful on whatever the transformation they want. Your program just helps them do it faster. So your signature talk, it has to include stories. You have to be speaking to people’s beliefs. You have to be hitting that really good balance around insights and awareness and speaking to where they are.

 

But gone are the days where you can just talk about the why fluffy stuff for your whole talk. People hate that they know when they’re being sold or when somebody is bringing fluff. So people in today’s market, what tangible tips and strategies. So you have to balance your talk with both. How do you provide insights and teach people how to think differently about your topic?

 

You can’t skip over that because if you do, when they go back in their business and try to apply it and something’s off, you, haven’t equipped them with the right context for them to be successful, to be able to maneuver it in the context of their business, you have to teach them how to think. And then you have to give them some tips and strategies.

 

How I recommend people do that is you teach the why, and then you teach the what, and it’s gonna get a little technical, but I feel like your audience might love it. My format that I follow with people is you go, why, what, how easy model for a presentation? And you sandwich it with an opening story and a closing story.

 

Like not rocket science. It’s what I work with. Every client on opening story, closing story in the middle of the sandwich is the what, why and how, and if you’ve worked with April and you’ve been around her world, the what section is essentially your method. So you’re almost there. You just need to work on, okay, how do I get this messaging in?

 

And what’s the right place to talk about it in the how to make people hungry for more. But your signature talk should be like an accordion where you can deliver your signature talk in five minutes because you know your talking points, but you also can expand it and make it, I mean, a full day workshop, maybe even a full course, right?

 

So you should be able to know what your talking points are within your signature talk. And that becomes your business card on those guest stages. And it perfectly segues into purchasing your signature program. And I mean, this is just absolutely the journey that you take people on it and how you nail and get it and get people really understanding what you do and your zone of genius.

 

Couple of questions for you about the stories do you find? And maybe there isn’t a right or wrong answer, but I’m just asking the questions. I think that possibly your audience is hearing. We should totally do a clubhouse room on this, like in conjunction with the week we dropped this, we should, we should do a clubhouse room and take Q and a I’m here for it.

 

And that would be so much fun. So talking about really quickly about the stories, are they usually a story about another client, personal stories about how the expert themselves or the leader has overcome? Like what type of stories? I mean, are we making people cry? Does it depend on the context when we’re talking about stories in general, is there a quicker,

 

seriously? You guys follow us on clubhouse because Heather and I are going to do this. I’m just putting her on the spot right now. We’re going to house the clubhouse room on this. So just join our clubhouse room and you can ask your story. Questions, go to our Instagram. Bio is go to Heather’s Instagram bio. I’ll give you a little to give you a little teaser.

 

The secret to good storytelling is knowing what emotion you want people to feel. That’s the key thing. You have to be intentional with the emotions you want to evoke. So for example, when I was working with Tyler McCall last month, we wanted people to feel heart, but we also wanted to laugh. So we talked, we did a story about the time he went to forestry camp and was too embarrassed to tell his father that he had to take a dump.

 

So he had to go home. So like outside of the content, very weird left story about like 11 year old Tyler, that was one. But like, you have to catch people off guard, but you have to know what emotions are you going for? And obviously your stories have to have a point. There was a business lesson in that story.

 

I promise you. Yes. I’m sure there was, yes, we’re too. Like on the nose with our stories where like, I hate this people’s signature story where they’re like, let me tell you about my perfectly curated journey, which pumped me out of this perfect place to be your expert. No, I think it’s bullshit. Your audience is not in the exact same space that you were.

 

You can’t say I was in your shoes because I think it’s obnoxious and rude because you don’t know what their shoes are. I think we have to tell our journey stories differently in a more authentic way. If we want to attract the kind of clients we want. That’s if you want to have, I think, authentic, ethical, meaningful relationships that make impact,

 

you have to tell stories differently than what we’ve been told with the bro marketing online. Ah, here’s here’s my class name. There you go. Nice. Yes. Yes. Okay. Awesome. All right. Step. And we are going to do a clubhouse to room on this. So let me just say you go to sweet life podcast.com forward slash two 11,

 

which is this episode number. And we will make sure there is a link to how you can get into this club has room and has asked Heather your questions. Also follow us both on Instagram because we’ll post our events on our Instagram accounts to Heather. What’s your IgE handle at the Heather Sager at B Heather Sager. Awesome. Okay. So step number three,

 

we’ve nailed the signature talk. We are on a roll. What happens next? What’s the next most important thing? Okay. So I think as entrepreneurs, we get by a lot by writing things out and typing things in our Google docs to post on our blogs or whatever else. But if you want to speak, you actually have to speak. Which means the first time that you speak your signature talk out loud should not be on a stage.

 

It should be in the privacy of your home office, where you can sound like a blubbering idiot because you will. So, so step number three is becoming magnetic with our delivery skills. So you have to learn how to speak in a way that’s captivating and entertaining that serves your audience gone are the days where you can just show up and shoot a video on something good on a,

 

how to people’s attention spans are short. Even our live events are like on clubhouse. People can jump in and out of rooms quickly. So you have to understand that your delivery skills, it’s not just the words you say, how you say it matters more. So you have to think about, am I speaking in just audio right now? Or am I also,

 

do I have video when it comes to communication? There’s three parts. The words that you say, how you say those words and your non-verbals. And I think people put a disproportionate weight on those. What it works out to studies that came from Southern California universities in the seventies, show that in marketing, when we’re talking about things that have an emotional message,

 

which most of our marketing messaging does, 55% of what we communicate is our non-verbals. So our facial expressions, our gestures now posture over half of what we communicate, which is why video is so powerful in allowing us to see, Oh, she’s authentic. Or she’s not like video is powerful because you see those. But 38% of what we communicate is the,

 

how we say it. The, the pace, the volume, the emphasis, those kinds of things. It’s 38% leaving. Only 70% of our communication to our words. Now, as online entrepreneurs, we’re used to writing, we’re used to emails. We’re used to captions. We’re used to putting all the weight there. So it’s scary to think, Oh crap,

 

I have to focus on these others, but I see it as a gift. You don’t have to be so precious with your words when you’re speaking. In fact, I screw up all the time. If you rewind this back, I have misspoken. I have I’ve strung words together to didn’t actually make a sentence. I speak like war all the time,

 

wrong words, whatever. You just keep moving because your energy, how you deliver it in your body, language carries you and your message. So if you don’t get intentional with how do you want to be received? What kind of energy do you want to create for other people? What do you want them to feel when they hear you? See you listened to you.

 

If you don’t practice that, you’re leaving it to chance. And I don’t know about you, but I don’t, I don’t want to leave to chance what people say about me. Like, I want to be intentional and be like, damn, I want to work with Heather or, Oh, you can get speaking coach. That’s going to help you bring your energy up,

 

work with that. Like, I want to be more intentional. I don’t want to like be caught up and obsessed with what people say about me, but I know I can influence it. So I say, why not? Yeah. That’s amazing. Those stats are very interesting. I had not personally heard those before, so super, super surprising. And then step number four.

 

Okay. So how do we, how do we go about wrapping all this up together in this is your speak for authority method. This is your unique IP, your methodology. You have gotten people Results going through this process going through these steps time and time again. So wrapping this up, what’s that last really important thing that people need to do? Yeah.

 

So building your authority means you need to make sure that your speaking strategy fits your strategy. That you’ve outlined. So if you determined that speaking is going to grow your authority, you have to say, okay, what podcast stages do I need to be on? Which live events do I need to be on? Who would I need to partner? How do you identify the right player in your industry to help position you in that way?

 

If your strategy was to grow your leads, all right, in this stage, we’re going to make sure the freebie that you offer on stages correlates with your signature talk. So it’s not just a, one-off like, Oh, go take my random free training about something. That’s not what I’m talking about. You’re not going to drive that. So that’s what we’re going to talk about.

 

How do we get results from our speaking determined by the strategy that you identified as your number one, so making money, but that’s negotiating a higher fee. Great. If that’s selling your program, great. If that’s driving leads great, like it’s kind of a pick your own pathway there. You haven’t figured out what strategy you want for you. And then we have the template to say,

 

okay, how do I make that happen from a stage? Fantastic. How powerful is this? You guys? All right, let me make sure that I can summarize your four steps as clearly as possible, because there was so much gold throughout this process. So your speak for authority method that you just laid out like a red carpet here. I mean,

 

this is gold. You guys, you would have had to pay Heather a lot of money to get this information. And so make sure that connecting with her more, both on clubhouse, and we’re going to give you some ways to work with Heather after this. So the first part of your method is really nailing your message. The second part is really creating that signature talk.

 

The third is delivering it with confidence in the fourth. Part of your method is elevating your authority. Did I summarize that correctly? You did great. You did great high fives and applause for your articulation. Okay. Students, good students. You guys should see my, see my notes behind the scenes. I’ll just share personally, you know, public speaking has just always been something that I love to do.

 

And once I get up there and once I get on a roll, I’m great, but it is such a head trip for me to get up there in the beginning of it. And my biggest fear, I tried to figure out what I was afraid of. Cause clearly I talk all the time. I’m not afraid to speak, right? And I really don’t care what people think about what I look like.

 

I’m one of the few speakers that usually takes a stage in some sort of flip-flops. But what I realized I was afraid of is that people were going to leave that room. And this was when we were having, you know, regular events that people are going to leave that room unchanged. And I realized that, wow, what if somebody says that was a biggest waste of an hour?

 

I ever spent it scared the shit out of me seriously, forever, because I was like, gosh, I just want people to leave here and have some sort of a transformation. And I was taking that. I’m really an advocate for that. As you know, like that’s how we develop programs, your programs should deliver a transformational measurable result. And I wasn’t really sure that my signature talk was doing that.

 

And so if you guys are listening and you have whatever issues, like Heather said it at the beginning, people would rather wet, like die than speak on stage. What is that saying in the beginning? Yeah, it’s a good Jerry Seinfeld joke around more people would rather give eulogy or a B in the coffin than give their own eulogy. Right? That is awful.

 

We were all given a voice for a reason. We’re all called to do great things for a reason. And using what Heather told you guys today in this show and her method is going to help you get clarity on all of this. And I’m super excited and appreciate your expertise and your time here today on the Sweetlife podcast. So we’re going to do a couple things to wrap up this episode.

 

First of all, Heather has a way to get you started. Obviously we want to give you tools to take action right now. So Heather, where do people go to learn more about working with you directly? Yeah. So the speak for authority method we talked about today, I outlined this in a little bit more detail and at a little slower pace,

 

if you want to head over my free training is up right now. If you head over to Heather singer.com forward slash free, you can download that free training. You can watch it right away and go through it. And I teach you how to actually use this method to start driving leads into your program. So you can grab that. Now it’s really designed for coaches course creators and small business owners who do not have a large following,

 

but want to start establishing their self as authority. So that’s perfect for you, but also if today’s conversation was of interest and you’re trying to out what kind of stages would even work for me? Like how does this even play out? I think maybe we should go on a second date. So maybe let’s jump into a training. Let’s go on a second date.

 

So I have a podcast it’s also on that page. Heather sager.com post free. You’ll have two options. The podcast is the Heather Sager show and you get like a little Besta playlist that you can hear a little bit more around how I speak. You can get used to my style a bit, steal it, use it for your own and start getting more comfortable with this concept of what does it look like to speak on other people’s stages,

 

but also use daily opportunities to exercise your voice, build your confidence. And most importantly, be more intentional with your message that you want to share so you can make a bigger impact. I love it. Okay. So I’m looking at my phone here. If you guys are watching the video behind the scenes, looking at the schedule, this show is live on January 25th.

 

It is episode number 211. So that means sometime this week, you and I are going to host a clubhouse room and we are going to implement and talk to our audience and answer questions for people that are listening to this show. So I’m so excited to, we’ve been talking about like, you know, doing rooms together. So here is how you find out when this room is happening.

 

First of all, you can go to sweet life co.com forward slash clubhouse, and you’ll get a list of events and the direct link to the event so that you guys won’t miss it. Cause clubhouse is a lot of fun things happening. If you are not on clubhouse, then listen to my podcast that I recorded episode number 209, about how to get started on clubhouse.

 

And I just want you guys just to take a second here like me. I do have many notes. If you feel like you are struggling to be seen as a leader in your space, that you really want to connect with people on a more personal relational level relationships sell. That’s what sells and you want to get in front of your ideal audience and give them an experience,

 

transform them through your speaking so that they can work with you more. I highly recommend speaking in general, but specifically hitting up Heather to see how you can do that more confidently. So Heather, thank you so much for being on this show so much gold. Again, this is Sweetlife podcast.com/two one one. So episode number 211, we’ll have all the links that Heather mentioned cause we dropped a lot of gems in this.

 

So all the links, so you can find Heather and work with her more. And of course, a link to our clubhouse room when we get that scheduled<inaudible> Hey guys, thanks for tuning into the show to get updates and join Heather live in our clubhouse room, please visit Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse. And follow me on clubhouse at April beach. If you would like to have Heather’s buys on your business and ask Heather your questions and also to our weekly clubhouse rooms,

 

every single Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Thanks so much for tuning into us and I will talk to you next week.

Episode 210: How To Generate Leads With Pinterest Stories, Videos and Hashtags – with Laura Rike

Laura Rike SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab Laura’s Pinterest Toolkit

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz

Summary:

Pinterest could be the sleeper tool you’ve been looking for to generate leads and grow your business. Pinterest is not a social media platform but a powerful tool that can increase website visits and bring you great new clients. But, few companies know how to use Pinterest. This episode covers the 101 of how to use Pinterest stories, videos, hashtags and more.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand how to use Pinterest stories 
  2. Have a starting plan to use Pinterest
  3. Understand the 101 of how to get started

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey everybody. Welcome back to episode number 210 on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Thanks so much for tuning in today. Happy January, 2021. We obviously just finished commitment week 2021 for entrepreneurs and small business owners.

 

And we had our fourth podcast anniversary birthday last week. So first of all, great way to kick off 2021. Thank you so much for being a listener of this show for the last four years and keeping us a top of the charts for business development online for entrepreneurs. We love you guys. If you haven’t had a chance to yet, please cruise over and leave us a review on Apple podcasts,

 

or just simply share this podcast from your Spotify up to your Instagram stories, or share this on LinkedIn. We appreciate you spreading the word about this show and just honestly how awesome you guys are as listeners. I get direct messages from many of you on Instagram and on LinkedIn, and just appreciate them so much. So we’re kicking off our fourth year with more proven business trainings that you can take to the bank.

 

We are known for giving you business steps and strategies that coaches charge thousands of dollars for. And it’s all totally proven. I’ve been coaching entrepreneurs for 24 years and the guests that also come on the show are proven experts in their space. So I’m so glad to turn you over to another guest expert on today’s show. We’re talking about how to generate leads with Pinterest stories,

 

videos, and hashtags. And let me give you a quick little backstory. I don’t do Pinterest. I’m not the Pinterest kind of girl whatsoever from a business strategy standpoint though. I definitely want to be where our clients are in where it’s a great place for our company to be, which is called the sweet life company for people to access our resources in the content that we distribute here on the podcast.

 

And so last year we got on Pinterest. We recorded a show about Pinterest with a guest expert, and my team quickly got to work implementing all those steps in our Pinterest engagement grew by something crazy. It was like 813%, which could be two things. Number one, it could show you how terrible we were at Pinterest before. So, you know,

 

there’s only way only one way to go is up or the strategies once are implemented with Pinterest. You can see almost instant results when you’re using Pinterest correctly. But with that being said full transparency, I still am not great at Pinterest. I’m grateful to have a team that does Pinterest. I’m not really on Pinterest. And so as an entrepreneur, I had a lot of questions for our expert today on,

 

you know, really who should be on Pinterest? What can you do on there? And especially all the new Pinterest stories feature. So on today’s show, we are talking to you guys about the fact that Pinterest could be that sleeper tool that you’ve been looking for to generate leads and grow your business. It’s not a social media platform. We’ll talk about that in today’s show,

 

but it’s really a great way to get eyes on your business and have people land on your website and increase your website, traffic and therefore generating leads. But honestly not a lot of companies are still leveraging Pinterest really well. So inter today’s expert, Laura rag is in the house today and she’s at Pinterest powerhouse who helps high performing business owners, content, creators,

 

and influencers grow profitability the right way with sustainable systems using Pinterest. She’s helped clients and students bring in over $50,000 in monthly revenue with her strategies. I mean, she’s really rad. You guys are gonna love her. And she’s been featured as a guest on podcasts like tailwind, ultimate marketer, twin cities, collective, and small business revival. And Laura lives in Minnesota with her family.

 

And she can be found@laurareich.com and we’ll of course, make sure all the links and everything we’re talking about in today’s show are going to be available for you guys in the show notes. If you’re new here then just so you know, you can find all the show notes and all the bonuses that we deliver with this podcast, by going to Sweetlife co.com, simply click on podcast,

 

and then you can click on the podcast number, or you can just type in the number of the podcast in our search bar. This is episode number 210. So welcome here to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast. And just a little bit of housekeeping before we dive into today’s show, if you haven’t yet held your seat or joined the early registration waitlist for my,

 

your signature offer masterclass, that is coming in February. So now is the time to get on that wait list. It’s a two half day intensive, so not two and a half days, but it’s two half day intensive that I’m going to be teaching in the middle of February. And this is going to teach you how to extract your own intellectual property.

 

Take a look at all the assets and all the great things you’ve created, and we are going to together build your signature program. Course mastermind, membership, whatever the business model of that is, we’re going to help you extract it all and create it into a signature offer. That’s perfect. Should give you the results that you want. Make sure that you’re joining that early registration list by cruising over to signature offer.com.

 

Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast training.<inaudible> I’m super excited to be here with Laura Reich. And I will say that we did reschedule this episode because we’re both moms and that is what happens in our life. And Laura, you guys have to see this behind the scenes, this video, make sure you go to our YouTube channel and to our Pinterest,

 

there’ll be videos on there because she is glowing because she is beautifully eight months pregnant. And we had to make sure we recorded this show before baby, right. Number three, arrived. So we’re, we’re getting this out of here for you, Laura, welcome to the show. Thanks so much to everybody. A little bit about yourself. Yeah, for sure.

 

I thank you so much for having me. I am a mom of two boys with a girl on the way. So we are so super excited over here in this neck of the woods. And I am a VA gone rogue is what I call myself. So I used to try to do all the things and with a family that doesn’t work. So I picked one thing I love,

 

which happens to be Pinterest and design. And I have been going hard at that ever since and just love it. That’s awesome. Okay. And what is your URL? So people can find you, even though we’ll put all this in the show notes for you. Yeah, of course. It’s just Laura wrike.com. So it’s L a U R a R I K e.com.

 

Awesome. Okay. So today on the show I have a million Pinterest questions. So we had Melanie fountain on the show a while ago, almost a year ago, really diving into Pinterest Pinterest marketing. It was a great episode. I will say, as a case study, we took those like Pinterest one Oh one steps, and we tried them. And as a company,

 

we had crazy results. It was like we went from being nowhere on Pinterest, having random pins to, you know, having thousands and thousands of impressions. And it was like an 813% increase with applying some basic steps. And so I am a believer in Pinterest now, but I will also say I am completely still Pinterest illiterate because my, my team does it.

 

And I get questions all the time from business owners about, you know, still, should I be using this? What is this look like? What can Pinterest really do? And so today’s show is all about kind of dissecting some of those high-level business questions. So our listeners can, first of all, determine whether or not they should be in Pinterest.

 

So number one is this worth your time, number two, how to get started and you have a toolkit for people to get started, which I wish that we had had in the beginning, I will say for sure, you know, really what is this toolkit? How do we get started with this? But there’s so many things kind of spinning around with Pinterest.

 

So let’s kind of start, I would say, spinning around in my head with Pinterest. So let’s go ahead and just start with question number one. How does Pinterest rack up and compare to other social media outlets such as Instagram or LinkedIn? Yeah, for sure. Really the biggest difference is it’s not a social media platform like Instagram or LinkedIn. LinkedIn is been known for the more professional type connections and Instagram.

 

You have conversations and the comments and things like that. Pinterest really does not focus there. They really focus on you putting in the conversation into the copy and making sure that you have the keywords there so that people can find you when they find you. Then they read that conversation and they click through to the destination, which is where you can take it from there.

 

So it’s more search based and it’s more top of funnel based because you can utilize Pinterest to send it where those conversations are happening right now and bring in a wider audience over there. Okay, fascinating. So it’s SEO, it’s search engine. It’s a way to take a conversation and become the top of that question for you. Is Pinterest owned by Google or is it a Google product or something of that sort?

 

It is not, no, it’s separate. It actually plays off of Google’s domain authority and their own domain authority. So when you have your website and then you have a Pinterest profile or business account, right, you’re going to get more domain authority with your profile on Pinterest than you are your own website. Unless, I mean, you’re some super big wig,

 

but it has been around forever. Right? But like my website is not going to have as much domain authority as Pinterest. And so I really use that and play off of their authority to be able to bring people to my website. Very cool. Okay. So what businesses should be there. And so let me rephrase that question. You know, obviously who should be on Pinterest,

 

but as a business strategist, my brain works the other way, what buyers are on Pinterest, like who is actually looking for content to increase maybe their performance, their profit, their business ability or whatever it is. You know, we have a lot of marketing coaches, brand new coaches, video coaches, health coaches, a lot of physicians, a lot of attorneys and even a lot of CPAs that listened to our podcast are their buyers.

 

Absolutely. So there’s kind of two different ways that I tackle that for people. One, I am a Pinterest junkie, right. It’s my jam. So I’m always going to tell you, yes, there are buyers there to give you kind of an unbiased opinion. I tell everybody to go to the platform type in something that your buyers would be searching for,

 

right? Like what is the problem or the pain point that they are having and how would they find you? Other places on Google, on Facebook? Like what are they looking for? And if what pulls up underneath that search is offering or information or education that you can provide to them because you know how to do that as well. Then 1000000%, that’s where you should be listed because you’re missing that opportunity.

 

The other thing that I like to talk to people about is really when you’re thinking about buyers, like where are they? Right. Cause everybody has a different stage. And so we talked about this for a second too. Like, it might not be that they’re a startup or they’re established or whatever, but where do they aspire to be? So if they are someone who is earning three figures right now,

 

they’re not going to be looking for how to earn three figures on Pinterest. They’re going to be looking at things like how to grow your email list to earn five figure months. And that’s because they aspire to be in that position. So that’s also something that you need to kind of reverse engineer and think, okay, is my buyer talking to where they’re at right now?

 

Are they aspiring to be a five figure person? Are they aspiring to maybe lead a life where it’s freedom, right? And so they have more time in their day or their moms or whatever. And that’s really how you want to address it too, when you’re going about it that way too. So smart. Yes. And you know, there are always,

 

people want to hang out just you and I do too. We want to hang out with people that are just slightly ahead of where we are. Right? Those are, those are the best people that are going to hold our hand and grab us to the next level. And that totally makes sense that that’s the same thing people will be looking for on Pinterest as well.

 

How often should people post let’s actually talk about the content that should be posted on Pinterest? What is like the baseline, if you’re going to get started, this is how often you post. This is what it really looks like. Yeah. So it used to be an everything that I’m going to tell you guys here is how I handle it, right?

 

So I am not saying this is the end all be all. I’m not saying this is a hard and fast rule. You have to do it this way. This is what I’ve implemented for myself and my clients and my course members and things like that, where they see the results. So one of the things that I really tell people is it used to be pin 20 to 30 to 40 different times a day,

 

and you would pin your stuff and other people’s stuff. And really that’s not necessarily required anymore. What I teach is that you need to be consistent on the platform. So if you’re someone that’s just starting out and maybe you don’t have a ton of content out there, which I can try to prove you wrong, because there are multiple places that I can find content you have already posted online that can work for this.

 

But if you’re thinking content in terms of like landing page or sales page or blog posts, and you’re feeling like you don’t have a ton, then start at one or two pins a day, right? Even if it’s a time constraint, like how do I create all these pin designs? Start at one to two pins a day, then start to work your way up.

 

If you’re someone that’s been blogging or you have tons of an audience, and you’re looking to really expand on that and you know that you have tons of content, then start hire. We did a case study actually on my website. It showed, even though they had a smaller audience and the other account had a larger audience, one pinned, I think it was like seven times a day.

 

And the other one pin 21 times a day, they still saw the same incremental increases on their own accounts because they were being consistent. And it was the quality over how often they were posting that gave them that feedback to know that that was beneficial. Wow. That’s so awesome. That’s super encouraging. I know because our listeners are like thinking like, Oh shit,

 

20 times a day. Like, how am I going to ever do that? Like that is not ever going to happen. And so that that’s super cool to look at the case study and the stats and, and really just the incremental growth that’s happening with. What’s being posted now, little tangent, what software do you recommend that people use to manage their Pinterest?

 

So I go back and forth on this. I personally use tailwind. I love them dearly because they have tailwind tribes. And that’s really like a community-based where you’re sharing ideas together. And then, I mean, sharing other people’s ideas and really having that community type feel like you would on social media. The problem with me only telling you to pick one platform that I see though,

 

is it’s not a good fit for everybody all the time. So if you’re out there and you’re like, I’ve tried tailwind, it doesn’t work for me. I apologize that it didn’t work for you. I love them. They are amazing. But what I urge you to do is go to Pinterest and make sure that the scheduler you’re using, whether it’s ladder,

 

whether it’s meet Edgar or whatever is a Pinterest approved platform. Because if it’s not, you set yourself up for possibly getting marked as spam or even shut down because they might not be following Pinterest best practices. Wow. Okay. I know that is such a fear. I’m so glad you said that because people would never know, know to even look, they’ll just think,

 

Oh, well, because this platform offers it does works. Great. I’ll just take this one, but it is so important with not just Pinterest, all the different social media platforms that whatever schedule are you using does it does abide by their regulations. So thank you for that. And we’ll go ahead and make sure we leave some resources so that you guys can find Laura.

 

And then also to some of the software tools in the show notes of this show. So we’re not going to totally leave you all hanging out there with that. So this week I was on Pinterest and I have a confession to make. I am never on Pinterest. I’m not a Pinterest girl. I’m just not okay. And so this week I thought,

 

okay, I’m going to go ahead and post a video. I think I had posted something to a LinkedIn story downloaded, like the little five second video. And then I, you know, distributed it or long all of our, you know, Instagram and LinkedIn story channels. And then I’m like, well just sitting there on this little five second video,

 

why don’t I just try to put it on Pinterest? And so I went on there, not knowing even that Pinterest had stories, I was just going to post it like as a little video on there and, you know, boom, I’m sure everybody who’s listening to. This is like, yeah, duh, April Pinterest is had stories for a while.

 

You know, but to me that was, I was like, what, it’s another thing with this story. So what are Pinterest stories? What should be posted there? What is the purpose of a Pinterest story and how can they be leveraged in the business? Yeah, for sure. So it’s actually not something that’s entirely like completely past you, right?

 

So it is new. So don’t worry about that. Some people have had it around for a little while, but it has now opened up to more people. And so a lot of people are seeing the get early access symbol when they’re locking in, there are two sides of it, which is awesome. One side is the, I really feel like Pinterest is stepping up their game in terms of providing an opportunity for content creators,

 

to be able to tell a story better, to be able to educate more. Because when you think about it, you only have one graphic and you can only have so much on that one image to try to tell that story and capture their attention. So the purpose of stories right now is to be able to have multiple images so that they can kind of tap through.

 

And it’s kind of like a slideshow. I teach people to do more of like step-by-step, or this is what I’m working through or behind the scenes, or like more of that conversation visually in those stories. The only downfall to stories that I see currently, which I’m hoping they open up in the future is it’s not clickable to an actual landing page. So you wouldn’t use it like you do a static image because you can’t get them to use that referral traffic in our research that we’ve done in the past few months,

 

though, it really does help increase the brand awareness and authority on your account. So you will see that if you are using it, to teach people things and to educate them and to provide more information for them at the end, Pinterest puts on a follow button so they can start following you on Pinterest. And it’s really bringing in that authority from that platform.

 

And then we’ve also seen the link clicks and the traffic and the leads increase on the other things that we’ve been consistently putting out there because of the help with the stories. Okay. Totally makes sense. And leads me to, first of all, say, that means I really failed on my first story. Cause I just uploaded that one video and I was like,

 

wow, they want me to share more. I don’t have any more right now. All right. What the hell? I’m just going to upload this one video. So first of all, how people find your stories if they’re not already following you, does Pinterest use hashtags? Yeah. So Pinterest uses hashtags. This is one of those controversial type things though.

 

Pinterest, a while ago said no hashtags. Then they said, yes, hashtags. Now they’re saying don’t use them a ton. So my philosophy has always been when they’re, when they opened up hashtags, don’t use them to keyword stuff. Use them within a sentence that you have put into the description, like use up your entire 500 character limit. And then if you have room and you can’t put on a whole,

 

a full another sentence in there, but there’s a hashtag or a phrase that still is relevant to what you’re sharing, then use it as a hashtag. Right. And just kind of take it that way. I’ve never done more than like three on a pin at most. So I don’t really see it being a problem. As long as you use it,

 

that way, those that have gone gung ho or followed the ups and downs of the hashtag or no hashtag I think are starting to not see the best results. The hashtags are still searchable, so you can still find them in search. So it really just depends on, on what placement you have for them in the description. So if your pin is about how to create a content marketing strategy,

 

and it’s like a download of a calendar or graphic, you’re not going to use a hashtag girl boss. I hate that hashtag by the way, every girl listening to the show is going to hate me for saying that I can’t stand that term. Yeah, no, it’s too general. Yeah. Right, right. You know what I mean? You’re going to put like content marketing or content calendar or a social media calendar or something.

 

Yeah. So two that don’t do the girl boss. I’m not a huge fan of that either. I like the terms that actually are like leading me somewhere. Right. Like that seems anyway. So I would say if you’re talking about content marketing though, in the description, don’t waste your hashtag on hashtag content marketing, maybe do calendar download or calendar template or something like that.

 

So it’s still relevant, but it’s playing off of a different type of search that someone would do. Maybe they don’t know about the content marketing calendar, but they’re looking for calendar templates or some sort of business template or something like that. That way. Then you have the conversation, it still flows. You’ve got the keywords in the description. And then you just add in a couple of those hashtags that are still keywords,

 

people would search for, but you couldn’t put it into the sentence flow that you were creating. All right. I got you girl. That totally makes sense. So with our stories, can you add hashtags? I kind of went back to that question. How did, how do people find my stories if they aren’t following me? Stories are still there like a collaboration of pins.

 

So you get to put three or five or however many you want in there and you still get a description on each one. So it’s still going to be searchable. You still can put a couple of hashtags in there if they’re not already following you and they search for something, it’s going to show up in the feed, just like any of the other static pins or video pins.

 

So in terms of your video, you could have uploaded it just as a pin instead of a story. And it works the same way as a static pin. You do get a little bit more tagging capability in terms of topic, tagging for videos. Then you do a static pen. So you can also use the tags for keywords that you want to be found for.

 

And that increases the searchability as well. Okay. So let me make sure I understood this correctly. The stories are basically a collection of pins related to the same things, is that right? Yep. So if I have a static pain, can I like Instagram? When you have something in your feed, that’s a post, can I push that to story?

 

Like, can I push a static pin to story or is it a separate, complete way to post that It’s a separate, complete way to post that you can repost it? The only problem that I see by doing that though is Pinterest is very heavily encouraging people to do fresh content. So they will see that same static pin posted. And then again on your stories and they’ll consider that as like a spam duper kit.

 

Got it. Okay. I lied that. Wasn’t the last question before. Thank you listeners for bearing with me. I hope I’m not asking like questions that you all know the answers to. I really include this in this area. And so it was, I’m so glad to have you here, Laura. And so how long the stories stay in a story?

 

How long are they shown for So completely different than social media? They stay on there just like a Pinterest pin, unless you go and delete them, they will be on your profile. Awesome. Okay. That makes me really happy. Nothing bothers me more than posting a really great Instagram story that people only get to see for 24 hours. So that’s super awesome.

 

Thank you. I’m super excited about stories. Like I said, Kelly and JC on my team really create our Pinterest content and post that. So thank you. By the way, to those of you guys who have been following us on Pinterest it’s, it’s cool to see that and those interactions and things, but I’m totally personally Pinterest illiterate. So I’ve just have so many questions that I am not able to answer for our clients.

 

So I’m very excited about all this. Okay. So let’s chat a little bit about video pins. Now, what is the parameter around video pins? Are they all vertical? How long can they be? And are they clickable? Yeah, so they Do not all have to be vertical. I still suggest it because then you’re taking up more real estate on the feed.

 

I personally don’t want to go more than a minute to a minute and a half. I believe you can go longer. I think it’s like two or three minutes that you can go up to. I’m not a hundred percent positive because I stick on the lower end. And then what was your other question? That was my other question. Oh, it’s are they clickable?

 

Oh yeah. So they are not clickable unless they’re used for ads. They have been clickable in the past. Again, I’m not sure if that’s something that’s changing or updating because there have been a lot of changes in the past, like four to six months on the platform, but they really do help with that growth of the account as well. When we’ve seen a lot of people come to us and say,

 

you know, I had a huge spike in October and now it’s December and everything’s dropping and I don’t know what to do. They post a couple video pins, they do a story pin and they’re back up again. Right. And they’re doing that consistently. I’m not going out there and telling everybody to post one and you’re going to be like woo through the roof and like,

 

awesome. But like, if you keep doing that, you’re going to keep seeing the results go up and back in the direction that you want them to go. Love that. Love that. Thank you so much. I have my million of Pinterest notes here and, and Laura, the couple of things. So for our listeners who want to get started with Pinterest,

 

I will say in full transparency, even though I’m not the one that does it, I’m really grateful for an amazing team that manages our Pinterest there. We really have seen amazing results and growth from using Pinterest as a platform with our audience. So I will say that from what I I’ll just say, if you guys are considering using Pinterest, definitely have a strategy behind it.

 

And really what I would like is to direct people towards some steps to get started. Nobody wants to recreate the wheel and you have a Pinterest like toolbox a toolkit it’s really cheap. It’s like 37 bucks or something that people can get started with what is inside that toolkit and what can people expect with that? Yeah, for sure. So the toolkit is really put together for anybody that needs that simple strategy,

 

right? That’s actually gonna help them convert on the platform. And so it’s easy. We provide different templates for them, whether they’re static, pen templates, video template, story templates. I have an awesome keyword swipe file in there too. So I’ve gone through over 700 different type of niche, specific keywords and hashtags in this swipe file. And the cool thing is,

 

is we constantly update that. So the swipe file for fun stats has actually brought in over $33,000 for clients and toolkit. So That’s been super fun. Yeah, That’d be good work. That’s so good. Talk about an ROI. Yeah. Tons of other stuff too. Like we have a call to action, swipe file a branding blueprint to help them really understand how to brand their pin images.

 

And then there’s some bonuses of course, like a custom dashboard for Google analytics and how to track and make sure you’re getting the ROI and stuff like that too. So Yeah, I mean, when we, when we got started and we started implementing what I was saying is so true, like if we had had a toolkit like this, we would have grabbed it in the second.

 

And so based on our listeners in our show, if you guys are thinking you want to get started with Pinterest, we’ll go ahead and make sure we leave a link to grab this toolkit in the show notes for this episode. So make sure you guys go over and grab this. I would recommend those of you guys that are listening to get started here.

 

It’s a low investment and it saves probably months and months of time and years of learning because you’re getting Laura’s wisdom for only $37. That’s crazy for those of you guys that are scaling your business. So for those of our listeners, you’re scaling your business. You have a team like me that you really just, you want to delegate this, you know,

 

you, you probably want to be on the platform. Maybe your team doesn’t know Pinterest. They aren’t experts. Then I am going to point them towards you, Laura, we’ll go ahead and make sure that we put these show notes and I would really consider like hiring Laura’s team out to manage your Pinterest for you or something like that. At least chatting with Laura on the phone.

 

I know she has a bunch of other stuff for you guys. So based on our listeners, I always try to give recommendations. So if you guys have ever gone through and taken our quiz to figure out what phase of business you’re in, I’m going to tell you exactly who needs to buy kind of what here, if you want to do this, if you’re in phase one or two,

 

then I would go with the toolkit. If you’re in phase three, four or five, then I would go with one of Laura’s other done for you services. If you don’t know what phase of business you’re in, go to sweet life code.com forward slash quiz. And you’re going to get a whole rundown based on where you are of your phase of business development,

 

and then we’ll direct you there. But for those of our listeners, most of our faithful listeners already know what phase of, of our start to scale up system they’re in. And so they know, so phase one or two, you guys are the toolkit people three, four or five, then really done for you services near you’re ready to scale. Thank you so much.

 

Yay. Love everything that you shared. My, my Pinterest entrepreneur IQ, just like totally leveled up three levels. I feel like awesome. And I can’t wait to, you know, for our team to like start implementing some of the stuff that we talked about on the show as well. So super appreciate your time. Congratulations on your new baby. When this airs he’ll be here and I’m so excited for you and we’ll make sure we leave all the show notes for everybody to get their hands on these things.

 

I will say you guys, honestly, Pinterest has been a real nice pleasant surprise. We’re not on Tech-Talk or anything. We’re not on Twitter. And Pinterest has been really awesome and powerful for us to grow our audience. So thanks for being on this show. Yeah. I love hearing that. And I mean, honestly, it is such a great platform.

 

I’m so glad that your team can help you with that. That’s absolutely amazing. And thank you so much for having me. Of course. Yes, of course. Thanks for being here. I’ll talk to you soon. Thanks. Awesome. Some show. Thank you so much for tuning in and sticking with me here with Laura at the time that we recorded this,

 

Laura was expecting, and now she is probably listening to this episode, holding her beautiful baby girl in her arms. And so we just really appreciate Laura’s time and making sure we were able to record this episode for you guys before she gave birth and went on her maternity leave in such great information, follow us. If you aren’t yet on Pinterest, you can find us at Sweetlife podcast and you can see some of the things that our team has been doing over the last year.

 

You can even see how our, even our branding and our usage of Pinterest tablets has evolved how we’re using Pinterest stories and how we’re using video. We’d love to connect with you there and follow you back. All right, you guys have an awesome day. Again, all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. This is episode number two.

Episode 209: How To Get Started On Clubhouse: For Entrepreneurs – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Get Clubhouse room notes, highlights and tips for entrepreneurs. Even if you’re not on the app yet! Follow me on Clubhouse @aprilbeach
By Text: Text the word “clubhouse” to 805-254-0880 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs looking to create deeper relationships with clients, peers and mentors.

Summary:

Clubhouse is a new social media networking opportunity for entrepreneurs. It truly takes the box it’s placed around you from other platforms and allows you to create deep relationships, establish yourself as an expert, learn, gift, and grow. But you may just be hearing about Clubhouse or be on the app and not exactly sure how to use it. Though we are not clubhouse experts This short episode gives you the 101 on how to get started on clubhouse what to expect and great opportunities for entrepreneurs using this app. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know the first three things to do when you get on Clubhouse
  2. Understand why Clubhouse is so special
  3. Start to strategize your clubhouse funnel and company growth

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
Get Clubhouse room notes, highlights and tips for entrepreneurs. Even if you’re not on the app yet!
  • By Email: www.sweetlifeco.com/clubhouse 
  • By Text: Text the word “clubhouse” to 805-254-0880
Direct Links to Join My Upcoming Clubhouse Rooms 
 
Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. You guys Welcome to the Sweetlife life entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach, and I am super excited about this episode for a couple of different reasons. First and foremost, it is our fourth podcast birthday.

 

So thank you so much. You’ve been tuning in for the last four years. We have dropped an episode faithfully every week. And those of you guys who’ve been longtime listeners. I mean, those are you guys around the podcast launch team. I appreciate you so much for being part of this show, making this show what it is today and sharing it with your friends.

 

Thank you. Thank you. Thank you. If you’re new to listening, it’s so great to meet you. This is a show where we are known for dropping some serious gems. Sometimes those that other companies and coaches charge thousands for a lot of our episodes come with bonuses that are so good. Like you can’t even believe they’re free. So cruise over to Sweetlife co.com,

 

click on the podcast to get all the goods. If you have never ever been there before today is a special episode. Not only because it’s our birthday. As a matter of fact, a little behind the scenes, I was going to do a real special birthday episode and you know, we’re going to do this whole shindig and it was going to be great,

 

but there’s something way more exciting than our fourth podcast birthday that I absolutely had to scrap the schedule. And that’s what we’re talking about today. Today, we are diving into all things, clubhouse the new clubhouse app, especially for entrepreneurs. And I’m going to share seven steps to get started on clubhouse. Before I do this, I need to have a little disclaimer here.

 

I am not a clubhouse expert. As a matter of fact, there’s probably somebody, many people who can speak to this way better than I’m going to do. But I have taken the time to lay out seven steps based on my experience or the last couple of weeks inside the clubhouse app, things that I have learned by following other people and just really things that I’ve gathered about being on this app.

 

So I’m sharing with you my experience and what I’ve learned, and guess what you know, what’s so cool about the new clubhouse app. Honestly, there aren’t any experts yet everybody is new, and that’s why I’m so excited to share today’s Sweetlife entrepreneurial podcast episode so that you can get on clubhouse. You can be a drop of a big bucket that this app I believe is going to make.

 

So let’s go ahead and start with the fundamentals here. So, you know, whether or not you’re in the right place and you should continue hanging out and listening to this episode with me, number one, who is, is episode four, this is for, and all phases of my start to scale up system. So if you don’t know what business phase you’re in,

 

you can very quickly go to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz. And you’re going to receive a segmentation based on your business phase and very specific, customized recommendations to grow and scale your business to the next level. This particular episode is for entrepreneurs in all phases of my system. Just if you’re a new listener, the reason why I did note that is because some of our episodes are just based on a specific phase in business.

 

And I note that phase in the beginning of every single podcast episode. So frankly, you don’t waste your time. If you’re hanging out here with me, I want to make sure that this is a valuable use of your time. And so I tag every episode based on the phase of business that that episode applies to this one, however, is for all phases.

 

So let’s go ahead and move to the next thing, who is this episode? Great for this episode is great for entrepreneurs looking to create deeper relationships with clients, peers, and mentors. If that is you keep listening. Now let’s go ahead and dive in a little bit here. Clubhouse is a new social media networking app and opportunity for entrepreneurs. It really truly takes the box out from around you that other social media platforms have created the limitations.

 

The restrictions in clubhouse enables you to create deep relationships, establish yourself as an expert. It also allows you to learn, gift other people with your knowledge and grow, but you may just be hearing about clubhouse and you’re not really sure if it’s exactly, you know, what you should be on or how to use it. And so in this short episode,

 

I’m going to give you the one-on-one on clubhouse, based on my experience, those experience of my colleagues and the people that I am following. So my mentors, so that you can get started on clubhouse fast and in the right way. And we’re going to also talk about actually how to get into the app as well. At the end of this episode,

 

you’ll know the first three things to do when you get on the app, but I’m actually giving you seven steps to actually onboard yourself onto the app. You’ll understand why clubhouse is so, so special. And you’re going to be able to start strategizing your clubhouse processes, what you’re doing on clubhouse personally. And of course professionally, because I’m a business coach and that’s what I talk about.

 

All right. So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive into the seven steps to get started on clubhouse for entrepreneurs.<inaudible> Okay. So welcome to call the house. We help. That basically means that I know that not everybody’s on there yet. You may be listening to this show being like, what the heck, April? This is so not fair.

 

I am not on this app. So here are a couple, just one. Oh, about getting on the app. First of all, currently at the recording of this, something can change literally the next hour with this app. You guys, but at the recording of this, which is only a week before the show drops, I did, this is close to the time of the show dropping as I could.

 

It’s only available to iOS users. Those you guys that are on Android, you’re going to have to wait a little bit longer. I have zero details on that, but I just wanted to let you know that it’s only available to iOS users. If you are an iOS user, you can go and we have it in the show notes here, you can go download the clubhouse app and let’s go ahead and dive into step number one.

 

The very first thing that you do even before you’re on the app is you should create and save your username. Now, here are some tips that I have seen. And from what I’m learning about your clubhouse username, unlike on some other platforms where you would take it, the name of your brand or your business clubhouse is like a real deal, real relationship app.

 

So it’s best to make your username, your real name, or as close as you can get to it. So that’s step number one. When you reserve your username, you’re going to be put on a waiting list to get in the app. Some people are waiting weeks, maybe even months to get into this app. And I understand that it’s frustrate.

 

Keep listening, hang in there with me, listen to the rest of the show. Cause I’m going to tell you exactly what, what to do. Once you get on the app, you can cut to the front of the line and we do this by getting a sponsor. That is also, what’s so cool about the clubhouse app, but you kind of have to know somebody that knows somebody to get in there.

 

They have to have your phone number literally saved in their phone. So you don’t just kind of know them. You actually have to really know him. So I was waived to the front of the line. My experience was I went downloaded the clubhouse app, reserved my name. I am at April beach on clubhouse. They Kevin’s my name. I was really excited about that.

 

And I was immediately waved in by my sponsor. Brian Fanzo you guys might know him as I social fans on Instagram brands also been a guest here on the podcast and he’s one of my mentors that helps me to increase my speaking career. And so Brian immediately got an alert that I was trying to get in the app and he waved me to the front of the line.

 

He endorsed me in. So what happens now on my profile, his endorsement of me is always on the bottom of my profile in my bio, which is really, really cool. And that can lead to a whole nother conversation about who you should endorse, maybe who you should not endorse on clubhouse, but that’s just my story of how I got it.

 

Otherwise you can be invited in and skip the wait list. When somebody, you know, on the app is a member of a group, which we’ll talk about groups and clubs are clubs on the app and they can nominate you. So those are a couple of ways that you can actually cut to the front of the line and get on the app. Otherwise just keep waiting.

 

You’ll get on there soon enough and believe me, it is worth the wait. So step number one is creating your username. Make it your real name. Again. This is like a real deal app. Step number two is creating your bio. There are clubhouse rooms on how to create great clubhouse bios. You are welcome. If you’re already on clubhouse,

 

cruise over, check out my bio at April beach, say it’s perfect. I’m not a clubhouse bio expert, but it’s been working for me to connect with the people that I really want to connect with. So you’re welcome to steal what I’ve done there. Now, overall in your bio. I want you to know that clubhouse is very, very generous.

 

It gives you a great deal of space in writing room to really bullet point, what you do and be very intentional about who you can help and who you want to connect with. So in your bio, you should make it really clear what you do to the problem you solve in really your intent tensions. Why are you on clubhouse? What’s your intention for being there?

 

You might also want to share something unique and funny, maybe a little something like behind the scenes. Like you love to ride horses or like Brian Fanzo my sponsor has that. He’s like a pager wearing millennial. I mean, that’s funny like who even wears a Pedro at all anymore. Right? And so you might want to include some of those things.

 

It’s in the bio. One of the things that I understand is that your bio is also searchable. And so within the app, the first few lines in your bio carry a lot of weight. So currently if you search online business strategist, I will come up as the top of that search in clubhouse. That’s because in my bio, the very first three words,

 

bio our online business strategist. So that’s step number two, creating your bio step. Number three of getting started on clubhouse is connecting really, really. So the first version you should connect with is your sponsor. You should follow your sponsor back, okay. This is really keeping it raw. I cut somebody right to the front of the line, who I’ve known in business for a really long time.

 

And this person is not following me back. It’s just a courtesy, right? So follow your sponsor back now, with that being said, you can learn a lot from your sponsor. So follow your sponsor. And there’s a little bell next year sponsors name you’re going to want to turn on. That means you get a notification whenever your sponsor is talking,

 

go in and listen to those rooms that your sponsor is in. Go and listen and learn and be a sponge. The first part of connecting on club house is just sitting back kind of watching the flow of how it goes. It’s a really amazing way too. Honestly, you’re dive in head first into this. It’s not even like a Cannonball. If there was like an upside down Cannonball and that’s what happens.

 

You just are in here. And all of a sudden you’re in these places and people are talking, it’s like a whirlwind. So just chill, just sit there and just absorb and take as long as you need to, to do that. Bet, we’re going to talk about not taking too long and jumping in right away. The next thing you want to do is when you’re listening to somebody speak,

 

and I’m going to share with you exactly the breakdown of how you find those places, where people are speaking here in a sec. But when you’re listening to somebody who, somebody who is speaking, when you’re in a room is what it’s called. Look to the people, to your right, and look to the people to your left. What you going to see is people literally hanging out,

 

standing next to you in a room, listening to somebody, speak on stage. Now this is all on an app. It’s all on a screen. So the speakers are going to be at the top of your screen. The people that the speakers follow are going to be the next section down, and then the rest of the audience is going to be underneath that clubhouse.

 

We’ll probably change that up in some capacity in some way, I’ve heard some thoughts of other people on that, but currently the recording of this that’s the way it is. So look at the people standing next to you on your right and your left tap on their bio. Maybe give them a follow. If it’s something that really aligns with, you know,

 

what you want to connect with. And then the next step is connecting off the app. Clubhouse does not have any hyperlinks, your bio, your neighbor’s bio, nobody gets hyperlinks except for there’s two places that clubhouse currently links to you. And that is Twitter and Instagram. And this is a really powerful thing I will say in my 10 days, maybe 14 days now being on clubhouse,

 

my Instagram following has tripled because my clubhouse account is connected to my Instagram account. And so how people connect with you is through DMS is through relationships on Twitter and Instagram, because there really isn’t a way to connect except for within talking within the rooms in the clubhouse app itself. So just so you know, that’s how you connect with people off the app.

 

There’s a lot of strategy behind that. As far as building funnels, can’t get into in this episode, this is just your seven steps to get started, but I’m sure your wheels are spinning. Okay. So that’s step number three. Step number four is search and find. So in clubhouse just a few days ago, they just released the ability to search by topic.

 

They’ve done a really good job with this. And so you can actually search and get notifications on rooms. So discussion rooms that fall under those topics here is the only downfall that I see of that. So far, the only rooms or discussions that you’ll get notified of are currently those that are hosted by clubs. We’re going to talk about clubs here in a minute.

 

So if you search entrepreneurship where you search parenting or you search gardening or whatever, you’re only going to get notification of the discussions under those topics that are hosted by a club, not all the rooms. So if I were to launch a room on gardening, because I don’t yet have a clubhouse club, you would never get notification of that. So just part of being part of an app,

 

that’s in the beta process, but you can still search by topics that you want to learn from. Also, I would recommend that you search by topics that you want to lend to. So this is getting into a little bit of business strategy. If you are an expert, if you are an expert funnel builder, or you’re a Facebook ad strategist, or you’re a graphic designer search for the rooms,

 

obviously in your area of expertise, so that you may be able to lend some information to the host of that room, the moderators of that room and the listeners of that room, or frankly, just so you can up your skills and be even better at what you do. And then the next tip I have for you under search and find is search for totally random rooms too.

 

One of the cool things about clubhouse is there are starting to be rooms on everything. I came across an amazing room. It was an 80 HD room and it’s just for people like me that have trouble focusing. And the room is hosted where they work in sprints and everybody’s sitting there in the room together and the host puts on music and then everybody goes to work for a period of time.

 

And then everybody together like takes a break and has their distraction moment. It’s a great way to increase productivity. So those are some cool rooms happening inside clubhouse that are totally not business-related at all. In addition to that, I will tell you if you are a faith person, if you’re a believer, there are some amazing rooms. This morning, I was in a room hosted by Myron golden business building like kingdom business building.

 

There’s amazing prayer rooms, Bible study rooms, really for all religions. Those are just the ones that I’m in. And so very cool things that you can search that are totally not business-related at all. Like if you need prayer and you don’t want to go to your neighbor or your sister, you can go on clubhouse and you can raise your hand and say,

 

will you please pray for me? I mean, how amazing, Oh my gosh. Like the power of this is just so unbelievable. Okay. Sorry. I’ll get back on track. Step number five, navigating. This is kind of just a one about how to navigate the app. The very first resource I have for you, that is a place that you should be tapping into is clubhouse guide.com.

 

We have put a resource to that in the link of the show notes here, please make sure you go to clubhouse guide. It’s how to get started on clubhouse clubhouse. One Oh one clubhouse best practices, a lot of the black and white and the meat and potatoes of what I’m explaining here on the show. Although I’m just sharing it with you from my personal experience so far,

 

that’s where I want to direct you to. That’s always going to be updated on, you know, the really the one-on-one and navigating the platform. It’s clubhouse guide.com. So let’s talk about nag navigating the platform and some of the terminology. The first thing you need to know is that there is what’s called a hallway. You have your own unique curated hallway and the hallway is showing you rooms,

 

discussion rooms based on the topics of interest that the app determines you may want. Now, again, what determines what you want are the topics that you follow, but also the people that you follow. So when you get on the app, you’re going to see a hallway. It’s like a list of conversations happening right now. All you have to do is tap on any of those rooms.

 

You’re immediately put into the audience and you can listen and see if you want to stay. When you enter a room, you’re put on mute. So you don’t have to worry about it. You can just tap on there, do the dishes, you know, drive your kids in the car or be at the gym, whatever. So the first thing you need to know is a hallway.

 

The second navigation point is the events tab. The events tab is in the top of the app. It looks like a little calendar, and you’re going to see a couple of different options for you. First of all, they’re suggested events for you, all events. And then the third tab is your events. And we’re going to talk about those in a minute.

 

So clubhouse will suggest events and scheduled rooms. Events are rooms that are, prescheduled both rooms that are prescheduled by clubs and individuals that you may want to attend. You’re also going to receive notification. So anybody you follow when they start a room, or when they’re speaking on stage in a room, if you have notifications turned on for that person, clubhouse will notify you.

 

And they’ll say like, Hey, so if I’m speaking in a room and you follow me, clubhouse would be like, Hey, April’s talking over here on this room on blah, blah, blah. And you can immediately tap that notification and enter the room and start chatting with me. How cool is that? Step number three is following clubs. So clubhouse enables people to create clubs.

 

Now we’re going to be doing many podcasts on this. I’m sure this is a very, very new app. Again, it’s in beta testing. I am not a club owner, so I can’t speak to that yet. But what I can share with you is that you can apply to have your own club. It’s going to be like the new Facebook group.

 

Many of you listened to this podcast, you know, how much I load Facebook groups. So I’m really looking forward to an opportunity to create community on a different platform. So just clubhouse, you can apply to start your own club. The application process currently is very backed up, but when you get approval for your club, then you can invite club members.

 

And when you have club members, they’re going to get notified every time your club hosts a room or an event. And so many other things, they can nominate other members to your club. I mean, it’s really an amazing way to grow your community. So one of the tips for you is if you want to start a club from what it is right now,

 

the way I understand is you need to host and schedule some individual rooms so that the app sees it. You’re not just like a flash in the pan that you’re really here. You’re really committed to build a longterm club with this app. You need to prove it to them. And how cool is that? It’s not like anybody can just start a group,

 

right? You have to be in it to give and to serve and to win it. And so you have to apply for a club and you have to prove to the app that you are worthy of being there and hosting that club on their app. Now you can follow clubs as well at the bottom of each person’s bio. If you go to the bottom of my bio,

 

I follow a ton of clubs. And I’m, I’m a member of really a great deal of clubs, maybe too many. Cause I got club happy and in applied, cause I was so excited just to talk to all these people. But if you go to the bottom of my app, you can see the clubs that I am a member of or that I follow.

 

Honestly, I’m not really sure that delineation between that. I think they’re the ones, I’m the member of in the bottom again, see, I’m learning here and you can click on that club and you can follow the club. Once you followed the club, the club hosts can have an opportunity to invite you to join the club. So you can follow a club and you can join a club.

 

So two different ways to connect with clubs. And then again, we talked about creating your own club, go to clubhouse guide.com for more information on creating your own club, but you’ve got to prove it, that you’re worthy of that. And you’re, you’re ready to be a leader on this app in order to get approved. For that, I promise this is going to be a quick episode and dang,

 

I have more to say than I thought I’m just clearly. So like a kid in a candy store, excited about this app. Number six be you. Okay. So when you join a room, if you have a question, raise your hand and ask the question, the host or the moderator will bring you to the stage. When you get on the stage currently in the app,

 

you are un-muted. So please, please mute yourself because you’re basically going to be disrupting the whole conversation when you get on stage and maybe they’re not ready to have you speak just yet. So be patient when you get on stage, mute yourself, listen, wait for the moderator to say, Hey so-and-so did you have a question or something that you’d like to say?

 

And here is a second thing. It’s okay to be nervous. It is crazy. Some of the really big influencers and leaders that I’ve seen get onto the stage for the first time and their voice is a little shaky or frankly, they’re just like, I’m nervous. And why somebody said it really well. I forget who said this, otherwise I would so credit them.

 

Literally. It’s very true. Somebody said, it’s not that you’re nervous to speak, but I think that we all understand the gravity of what this app could do for our relationships and our business. I think that’s where the nerves come from. It’s having an opportunity to speak to people that you would probably otherwise not have a chance to connect with. As an example,

 

I have been honored to be on the stage and to invite influencers to my stage, such as Myron golden and so many others. And I would never be able to connect with these leaders. Otherwise I send them an email. Obviously I can’t get a cell phone number, you know, and these are people that I highly value and I want to learn from in clubhouse.

 

It’s okay to be nervous when you go on the stage, just ask your question. And one of the other tips I want to leave with you is don’t ask to speak unless you have something really valuable to say, you know, those people who like raise their hand because they just want to speak because they like to hear themselves talk. Don’t be that person on clubhouse.

 

Seriously. If you want, if you have something genuine that you want to contribute, if the host says, Hey, does anybody want to contribute or ask a question, do it, don’t hesitate, jump up there and do it, but definitely make sure that you’re being respectful of both the hosts and the moderators and everybody in the audience time based on what you’re going to say and just don’t be that weird fan person just be respectful.

 

So if you are invited on a stage or if you’re in a room, you’re going to look around, you’re going to see some really big name people in this space. They’re just people too. They’re just, they’re listening and talking and sharing in the conversation. And it is absolutely a beautiful place just to be authentic, build relationships, learn, give,

 

grow, and create amazing networking with other companies. And then the last tip I’ll leave you with step number seven is starting your own room. Dive in, create a room. I have literally been buried in Instagram DMS about people asking me questions about clubhouse or companies who want to work with me based on the rooms that I’ve hosted. And now what they know my area of specialty is from clubhouse.

 

Literally my calendar is totally full. Okay. That is because I dove in and I started a room. I didn’t know what I was doing. And I was like, Hey, you know what? This is my first room I started. It was about the podcast episode of the week. I was like, okay, Hey, cool. I already know that I’m talking about this on the podcast this week.

 

How cool would it be to start a room? That’s a conversation about the podcast. And so I started a room and it was just talking about five areas of focus for the upcoming year in your business. And that room grew and grew and grew and grew. And I invited people to the stage and I made people moderators with me. And there’s other strategies behind that and why I did that.

 

We can talk about it another episode. But the reality is, is that just start a room. You know, I was speaking to somebody of course, again and Instagram DMS, and she is starting a business in an area where, you know, she just needs to do a lot more market research. And so I suggested to her, start a room,

 

asking a question, asking, are there any XYZ experts out there or are there any people with this experience out there, come join my room and let’s talk about it. So she didn’t even have to be the expert of that room just because you hosted doesn’t mean you’re the expert, a great colleague of mine, Heather and Haven would we host a lot of rooms together.

 

Now started a room a week ago, week and a half ago on how to monetize virtual events. Very simply because she wanted to know how and that room grew to the largest room. We have coasted on clubhouse so far with amazing virtual event and speaking influencers coming to our stage. The whole experience frankly, is blowing my mind. As you can probably hear in my recording of this show.

 

So you don’t even have to be an expert. Just ask a question. You might say, Hey, does somebody want to co-work with me right now? Hey, is anybody else having trouble potty training their kid? I mean, it can be about anything. Dive in, start a room, get started on this app, building authentic relationships. Okay.

 

So I don’t think I was succinct as I wanted to be. I apologize for that. Let me recap. The seven steps to get started on clubhouse for entrepreneurs. Number one, go get your username. Hopefully you won’t have to wait too long to get in. Number two, create your bio number three. Connect that’s following your sponsors and intentionally connecting with people and making other networking connections on the app.

 

Number four, search and find the right topics, the right rooms, and totally random rooms. Just to see how they’re doing things. Number five, navigate the hallway. So make sure that you know how to tap into rooms, how to leave rooms quietly in how to follow clubs, be part of clubs and get more of the topics that you’re interested in listening to in your hallway.

 

Number six, be you. It’s cool. Just be you. You can show up in your pajamas. Nobody cares be you and number seven, dive on in. Okay. So in the show notes of this episode, which you can find by visiting sweet life podcast.com forward slash two zero nine, I have a ton of links for you. You are going to find obviously the link to download the clubhouse app.

 

You’re going to find the link to clubhouse guide.com and you are also going to get an opportunity to get notifications from me. Now, clubhouse gives a lot of notifications, so we kind of to create a work around for this. So if you want to know, when I’m chatting in a room, join me in a room to chat. And then all of the other amazing entrepreneurs that I moderate and cohost rooms with,

 

you can very simply go to sweet life co.com forward slash flub house. Let me say that again. Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse. If you are not on clubhouse, go there. And I send a periodic notes about the rooms that we are in highlights from rooms, in other things that we have seen and experienced just being in this app in the early phases.

 

So if you want updates, room notes, highlights, amazing quotes. I have about 20 pages of just blow your mind quotes. And then you can get those things by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse, or you can text them word clubhouse to the number (805) 254-0880. All of those things are in the show notes. Also in the show notes, I have provided direct links to join my upcoming rooms.

 

So if you’re already on clubhouse, you can go to the show notes for this episode and you can click on the direct link to join my show. I hosted a show, not a show room. And so used to saying show with podcasts. I host weekly room every single Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And they are business strategy sessions for entrepreneurs.

 

Very similar to the things we talk about here on the podcast, but you and I get to talk about about it and I get to help you and help you strategize and answer your immediate questions about the topics January 13th. If you’re listening to this show live, I am. Co-hosting a room on license in your content. So how to scale your business by licensing your content.

 

I’m co-hosting that room with a few different, amazing attorneys that are copyright attorneys, IP attorneys definitely join that room. If you’re thinking about scaling your business by licensing your content courses and other strategies, or frankly, you’re just wondering about it, January 20th, I’m hosting how to grow your six figure coaching business with podcast and PR and January 27th. I am hosting a room on how to create your methodology,

 

your process, and turn it into your signature offer. Those are all on Wednesdays at 12 o’clock Eastern time. I would love to chat with you in any of my rooms and literally there’s so many other awesome rooms. I can’t wait for you to jump in and join this app when you do make sure you follow me at April beach. And if you aren’t yet,

 

you can DM me on Instagram. I am at April beach life on Instagram, and I will send you a link, a direct link from IgG on how to get all hard clubhouse, insider notes, and links to join me in all these rooms. Ooh, as longer than I thought it was going to be so much for hanging out with me guys,

 

I got to get back to clubhouse. Yep. That’s pretty much what it’s like. I’m hosting a room tonight, a female entrepreneurs round table, and so excited to jump in and learn from some of these amazing men and women leaders. And I can’t wait to talk to you in there too. Again, the direct show notes for this episode can be found@sweetlife.com

 

Forward slash two zero nine. All right. Talk to you guys soon.

Episode 208: How Be A Peak Performer In Health, Wealth, and Relationships in 2021 – with Eric Partaker

208 Eric Partaker SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

The 3 Alarms, Free Digital Book and Training

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs and leaders in all phases of business who feel like you just can’t catch up, and you know there’s a better way to live. Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz

Summary:

To kick off the new year, I’ve brought Peak Performance Coach, Eric Partaker, on the show to help you get started on the right foot and make 2021 the year you become the most productive version of yourself in multiple areas of your life and business. Eric has worked with and led high-performing teams at McKinsey & Company, Skype, and Chilango. He is one of 300 people worldwide certified as a High Performance Coach, by the High Performance Institute. Over the last 20 years he has studied and modeled the traits and habits of the world’s most successful people, in order to help his teams and clients break through their barriers and reach their highest potential, in both their work and life.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. No longer waste time
  2. Have a strategy to root your identity in who you want to be (even before you get there)
  3. Stop being an amateur and become a pro

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
Email Eric Partaker | eric@ericpartaker.com
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to 2021. The first show, and we are starting out with a major bang that is going to be a game-changer for you. I’m so excited to dive in and help you understand how to be a peak performer in your health,

 

wealth, and relationships this year and beyond with our guest expert, Eric partaker. So let’s chat about what we’re doing here and why this show is so special. You know, as entrepreneurs, as leaders, as human beings, we all want to operate at our highest level. We all want to be that person that we envisioned we would be right. But what happens is we get burned out.

 

We get stretched thin, and there are some things that just don’t balance out to equal the vision that you might’ve had for what you wanted your life and your company to look like. And so we’re going to dive into that and we’re going to start out with a powerful plan and strategies to really be a peak performer in your health, your wealth and your relationships in 2021.

 

And let me just tell you, this is not another piece of content or some other podcasts on how to become productive or how to set goals. No, no, no. Our guests today shared strategies that I have never ever heard before. These aren’t the same old, same old things. These things are game changers. You guys, if you watch our video episode of this,

 

it is totally me behind the scenes taking massive notes. The things that he was saying was just gold. And so this is an episode that is definitely not to miss for those of you that really want to operate at your highest level in 2021. And, and frankly take back control of your health, wealth, and relationships, which are all things that we have left behind struggling with this last year.

 

We all hope and pray. So let’s talk about, you know, really what you can expect out of this episode. In this episode, we’re talking with Eric and I’m going to give you a bio on him. This guy is super duper awesome. So we’re talking with Eric, who’s a peak performance coach and author of the bestselling book, the three alarms,

 

a simple system to transform your health, wealth, and relationships forever. And the information on this show, like I said, it’s not going to be the same old, same old. You’re going to discover powerful new ways to increase your productivity, deep root your identity in who you’re supposed to be. And you’re also going to understand how to become even stronger with each challenge that comes your way.

 

It’s really, really good stuff. You guys. So at the end of this episode, if you apply the strategies in here and the bonus, that’s going to be given to you here with this show, you’ll no longer waste time. You’ll have a, to root your identity and who you want to be, even if you’re not that person yet. And you’ll stop being an amateur and become a pro.

 

Now let’s introduce you to Eric partaker. Eric’s a CEO coach and mentor, author, and peak performance expert. He was named the CEO of the year in 2019 business excellence awards. One of the top 30 entrepreneurs in UK 35 and under by startups magazine and among Britain’s most disruptive entrepreneurs by the Telegraph, he’s advised fortune 50 CEOs while at McKinsey helped build Skype’s multi-billion dollar success story and has founded several businesses of his own.

 

He’s a certified peak performance coach and has also completed a coaching certification and apprenticeship with professor BJ Fogg who leads Stanford university’s behavior design lab told you this guys it’s just super rockstar. He continues research evidence-based studies in psychology, neuroscience, habit, change leadership and peak performance. And he is giving you a totally free digital copy of his book. You can cruise over to Sweetlife co.com.

 

This is episode number 208, and a link to download his book will be found in the show notes. So if you are really ready to make a change that is going to stick and your business and your work and your relationships so good. You guys let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> Alrighty. You guys, I’m so happy to be joined by Eric partaker here today,

 

and we’re talking to all about peak performance, peak performance, usually in the past, have you been listening to the show for a long time? We talk about peak performance with extreme and adventure sports. And as that relates to the company you’re building basically. So you can have more time to take off and play with your extreme inexpensive venture sports. But today we’re really talking about peak performance that comes before that something that is not discussed often enough in the entrepreneur space.

 

And that’s about really performing at your highest level all the way across the board, so that you have an opportunity to reap all those benefits and rewards. And Eric is in the house today, talking all about his new book and how you guys can get to this state of becoming a peak performer and doing this in your business. You can do it in your life.

 

Eric. Welcome. Thank you so much for taking the time to join us here on the Sweetlife podcast. Super glad to have you tell everybody a little bit about yourself. Yeah, thanks April. And thanks everyone for taking the time to listen. Yeah, I’ve, I’ve been obsessed with peak performance for over two decades, but well, first, definitely in the wrong way.

 

And then in a, in a much better way. So about 10 years ago, it was all, you know, work. It was hustle mentality, and that’s how I was for the whole first half of my career. You know, so a hundred plus hour work weeks at McKinsey and company and helping build up Skype before we sold it to eBay,

 

few of my own businesses. And you know, I’m on a plane. Start to feel unwell, Dr. On-board rushes over, takes my vital signs and says, we need to land the plane immediately. I think he’s having a heart attack 10 years ago, playing emergency lens, where to a small town in France, the runway shut down. They take me off into a waiting ambulance where they administer nitrates to open up the arteries and increase the blood flow to the heart.

 

And as the ambulance sped off to the local hospital, I looked up to the eyes of the French paramedic looking down at me and I said, please don’t let me die. I have a five-year-old son. I didn’t say, please don’t let me die. I need to clear my inbox. And you know, my point there is that as entrepreneurs we’re so into the hustle,

 

we’re so into, you know, what, what do we got to do next? And, and it can all go at any moment at any time. And what I said in that moment, it really truly changed my life because the next morning I woke up and I thought, you know, all of my success to date at that point had come at the price of my health and relationships.

 

I almost lost my life. And then the very first words out of my mouth had nothing to do even with my own life. But, you know, with my boy at the time, right, my two boys now, but at the time, my, my only son and then that just struck me as, okay, that’s the three legged stool.

 

That’s what peak performance means. You know, we need to perform at a peak level across our health, our wealth, our work as a wealth driver and our relationships. And when I say peak performance, I’m not meaning turning. Yeah, I don’t, I don’t mean like in a turn a person into a Ferrari, you know, I mean, close the gap between your current and best self across all the areas of life that matter most,

 

you know, on the health, you know, work and home front. That’s the mission that I’m on now that I’ve been on for the last 10 years. And my book, the three alarms is, is about that mission. And it’s about how I’ve, codafide it as if you want to reach your best on the health, wealth and relationship fronts,

 

you need to do it through IPA, like the beer, but better for you and the IPA standing for identity productivity and antifragility. Yeah. And thank you so much for sharing your story. You guys watch the videos of these, you know, any sort of story like that. I’m here, like tearing up behind the scenes, but I understand that there are so many people that are on their way to hit that point without what you’re talking about in this book and,

 

you know, praise God, you were able to come back and figure it out and, you know, share it with the rest of us and really be able to leverage this to the next level and come in here and step in and help entrepreneurs. And so this is a perfect episode before we were recording. I was thinking, I wonder, are we going to air this?

 

And this is a perfect one to kick off 2021, because some of the things that you’re talking about, you know, we all want 20, 21 to be different than 2020. And it wouldn’t be nice if we just woke up and the whole entire world that was glittering on January 1st and everything was perfect again. And, and, and it’s okay to want those things.

 

But what we know is that we need to have a plan regardless of what comes about. And that’s what you talk about here in your book. And I love that now you have worked with really high level executives and entrepreneurs and your work in the past and getting people results in this. And it has really been extraordinary. And so I’m super excited to dig into what we’re talking about on today’s show.

 

So you say how to become a peak performer with IPA identity productivity, and antifragility, let’s go ahead. Can you dive in a little bit, and let’s kind of dissect each one of these things. So our listeners have an idea of some immediate actions and some areas in their life that they can, you know, rebalance or correct, or take a look at and,

 

and make some adjustments. Can we dive into IPA and the identity first? Yeah, let’s do it all. Talk about each and a practical tool. And the book of, I give loads of practical tools, but we just give like one quick win takeaway for each, each section. And let’s go ahead and say this too. If I can just interrupt.

 

You also said, all of our listeners are going to get a free digital copy of your book and we will make sure that is a huge gift you guys, and we’ll make sure that the link to that is in the show notes for this show@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash two zero eight. So yeah. So let’s go ahead and dive in. Yeah. Cool. And,

 

and I just want to step back just super quickly once again, and say, you know, 20, 20, it was a challenging year. And part of what I’m trying to do with getting the message out around this book is to have it perfectly timed with making 20, 21, a rebound year making 20, 21 the year where you stepped back up to the plate,

 

right? Where you take things back up a level and you kind of dust things off and you say, all right, let’s go again. And IPA is the path forward. And, and one other thing to remember, my definition of peak performance is not turning you into a Ferrari. None of this is about achieving perfection. This is just about you showing up as your best self in the areas of life that matter most.

 

This is about you kind of gaining entry to what Abraham Maslow estimated was the 2% of people in the world who realize their full potential. So IPA for me is about gaining entry to that 2% club. So identity, identity, why don’t we start with identity? So the why here is because we cannot become a better version of ourselves now and going forward,

 

if we continue to be the person that we’ve always been, that doesn’t line up. So what got you here? Won’t get you there. You need to make a change. And entrepreneurs leaders, CEOs are very intentional when it comes to work, they get it. They know that I need to have envisioned. I need to model myself after that vision,

 

but they don’t bring that same intentionality often to their health and home, or you know, their, their health and relationships. So what I talk about in the book, the three alarms is how I decided, okay, what is the best version of me look like on each of those fronts? And that’s what I’d like everyone listening to do right now.

 

Just ha have a thing. If you were to give the best version of you, you at your best, a name on the health front, what would it be if you were to give the best version of you, a name or a phrase or a persona on the work front, what would it be? And if you were to do the same on the relationship or the home front,

 

what would it be? So I gave an example of what I’ve done with myself. So on the health front, it’s not me who goes to the gym in the morning, I’m a world fitness champion. That’s who goes to the gym in the morning. That’s the person who walks through the door. And when I’m in on, in a particular exercise and I get to the eighth rep,

 

and I’m not sure if I’m going to get to the 10th, a little voice goes off in my head and says, of course you will, because you’re a world fitness champion. And that’s all being driven by identity because behavior follows identity. When I take a Spider-Man costume and I put it on my seven-year-old Leo, I do not need to teach Leo what to do next.

 

He doesn’t need to go through Spider-Man training camp. I put the Spider-Man costume on and he starts shooting webs from his wrist, jumping around, making funny noises. Right? So what it really, all I’m trying to do here is to get everyone listening to, you know, remember that you’ve already done this. You did it as a kid. You picked an identity,

 

maybe when you were playing, you changed into that and it changed your behavior. Same concept. You’re just remembering back to something you used to do. Every time I go to the gym now I’m wonder woman, perfect world fitness champion. Now I have that on my phone as an alarm at 6:30 AM, I’ve changed the name of the alarm. And it says world fitness champion to prompt that intentionality.

 

Okay, because I’ve segmented my day into three parts and I’ve chosen basically a best self identity that will power each of the segments. And so 6:30 AM world fitness champion goes off. The next alarm on my phone goes off at 9:00 AM and it says, world’s best coach, am I the world’s best at all of these things? Of course not. But that’s the version of me.

 

That’s going to start the Workday. How does that version of me show up and behave in the world? You know, how decisive inspiring and reliable will I be for my clients? If I’m coming from the vantage point of the world’s best coach versus just Eric and at 6:30 PM, the game-changing alarm for me, we’re all different for me. This is a game changer.

 

It goes off and it says world’s best husband and father to prompt the, how would the world’s best husband and father walked through that door right now? That’s the power of intentionality, right? So I’ve chosen, what does best look like on the three areas of life that matter? Most, I queue it at a particular time of day, that would most benefit from being powered by that best self identity.

 

And I get three massive benefits. It brings intentionality into the day. It brings wise counsel, you know, into a moment, you know, okay, what should I say in response to this person? What should I do next? Well, what would the world’s best husband and father do? And number three, it prompts, reflection, because if I do lose my cool with my seven year old,

 

for example, I’m not perfect then because I had something so high to measure against, I feel like a real jerk afterwards. Right. And that’s good because that’s making the gap painfully obvious and it means that I get better and better at closing it. So that’s the identity piece I’m taking course millions of notes here. I’ve already named all of my different sections of my day and who I am.

 

So I just I’m appreciating this and eating it up. I’m a sponge here, loving this information. I love that identity too. And it’s so true. Like when along the lines did we forget who we believe that we are rather than, you know, what the world tells us. And so, and I, and I love that. And you’re so right about the fact that as entrepreneurs,

 

we are so apt to believe that before in our business, but maybe not so much in our health and our personal lives, those things for sure are not the same. Maybe it’s because money doesn’t drive it. And it’s not because they aren’t as important to us. Well, maybe the health at first, you know, so I think this is super awesome.

 

Loving this so far. So let’s talk about productivity, the identities, EEI, and in IPA, what do you do and what do you recommend as far as productivity and how does that, why did you choose productivity as part of your methodology for obtaining people? Yeah. Great question. So, okay. So context then, you know, setting. So first we start with,

 

well, who is it that we want to be? That’s the identity piece. So now we’re operating from the vantage point of our best self and the three areas of life that matter most. So what do we do now to make progress? Because we’re just awesome, but we’re standing still, right? And we need to progress. We need to climb the mountain now.

 

Right? And so we do that through action. So that’s why we talk about productivity because knowledge isn’t power anymore. These days I can Google anything and be knowledgeable about it. Within seconds. Knowledge is not where the game is played. It’s about taking consistent persistent deliberate action. That’s where the game is played. And that’s why we need to optimize ourselves for productivity,

 

because we don’t want to just be taking any action. We want to take the right action and most efficiently, so smart. So there’s loads I go into in the book and productivity. I actually, it’s a big thing that, although the IPA acronym is it’s only three letters I had to do productivity planning and productivity execution, because it’s about, you know,

 

plan, execute, plan execute. Right. Right. And I think before you go into it, you’re an expert in this. Did you realize that I know a lot of entrepreneurs that have the best laid plans, but then zero ability to execute. Is that why in your experience of dealing this, you know, entrepreneurs, we can think of these,

 

Oh, this is going to be the plan. We can even set the plan, lay the plan out the steps of the plan, reverse engineer, the plan, Gantt chart, the plan, whatever it is, but then actually doing it tends to be a lot harder. So is that because we all struggle in this? Yeah. Yeah. Well,

 

I was a chronic over planner. I would just plan, plan, plan, plan, plan. The other thing though, too, that I noticed with myself was that I was also a world-class procrastinator and may have something to do with the entrepreneurial mindset because of our tendency to dream and to, you know, think about, you know, big opportunities and the next big thing,

 

it’s almost like this, you know, proneness for distraction, right. Or at least it was for me. And so I had to transform myself from a chronic procrastinator to a super producer. And, you know, we won’t have time to go into all the productivity tools, but I want to drive home. One in particular that I think is mind blowing.

 

So the average person loses and this, this data, I first picked up, by the way from the book, the one thing, the average person under observation loses 28% of their Workday to multitasking and effectiveness. So the person thinks that they’re multitasking in an efficient way, but what they’re really doing is they’re doing what’s called task switching, going from one thing to the next,

 

very, very rapidly. And that leads to a 28% loss in the day, because rather than sticking with one thing, they’re jumping around. So when they get back to the thing that they originally intended to work on, they’ve lost their place. They have to retrace their steps at the regain, their momentum, all of this leads to lost time, 28% loss of a day.

 

Now the book just leaves the stat right there. And I thought, hang on a second. This is like not doing that stat justice. So I took that number and I said, well, let’s generously take off six weeks for vacation in a year. So let’s do 28% loss against 46 work weeks. That means that the average person is losing 13 weeks a year,

 

which is an entire calendar quarter. So of course you don’t feel productive. Of course you don’t feel like there’s not enough time for everything you’ve lost a whole quarter every year Because you aren’t productive. And because you would have lost all that time. I mean, you’re playing a game of basketball and you’re going against the competition. You get to the end of the third quarter and then news to you.

 

Somebody says, Oh, by the way, we’ve got to tell you, but you and the rest of your team had to sit out the fourth quarter. You’re like, huh. And you’re like, well, how do we even have a chance of winning then? And they’re like, Oh we don’t. Yeah. It’s. So if we extrapolate that across a 40 year career,

 

that means that the average person loses an entire decade. What could you do with an extra decade? That’s like two more careers potentially. Wow. So what’s the problem here? The problem is people just jumping around too much throughout the day that in their phone disturbed their, their focus and the concentration, having too many browser tabs, open notifications coming in left,

 

right and center all of these lures to kind of guide us off our path for peak performance, our path for realizing our full potential that’s the issue. And so what we have to combat all of that with is developing the power of single tasking, which is a bit of a lost art, especially nowadays with smartphones angle tasking is nothing more than making sure you stick with what you’re working on for a good chunk of time.

 

At least 30 minutes provided there’s 30 minutes of work to do. I like to shoot for, you know, 30 minute chunks throughout my day. And then I take a break after 30 minutes. And the way you can develop the habit of single tasking is by becoming a lawyer for a few weeks. And what I mean, what I read is that lawyers timesheet their days because otherwise they don’t know where to assign the client time.

 

And when I thought about that, I thought, well, if a lawyer can do this every single day as part of their career, then I could certainly should be able to manage it for like, you know, few weeks. So all I did was I had four columns activity start time, end time, total minutes. And I literally recorded every single task I did from the time I woke up to the time I went to bed kind of before and after work,

 

I was more like grouping stuff together. You know, it’s like getting ready for example. But once I started the Workday, it was everything. So working on presentation nine to nine, 13, nine, 13 to nine 17, LinkedIn nine and 17 to nine 20, you know, Google search nine 20 to nine 23, reheated coffee and check Twitter.

 

And the alarming thing that it revealed was just how much task switching was going on. On the first day that I did this, I had 77 entries in my Workday. Wow. As I was bouncing around unknowingly from one thing to the next. So when you do this, it does two things. One, it raises an unprecedented level of awareness in you in terms of where is my time actually going and how often,

 

you know, am I switching and bouncing around? And then two, it starts to become kind of painful when you have two for the third time, for example, on a day, right. Facebook 20. Right, Right, right. It’s really eye-opening. And I could see how that would be incredibly. Eye-opening really, really fast. And gosh,

 

I mean, I just think that there is so much last time, by the way, the one thing is one of my favorite books of all time. And we’ll make sure that the notes to that book as well are in the show notes for this show. And I think that one of the things that you’re saying here was really, really interesting, the art of single tasking.

 

So when we single task and chunk our time and block calendar, a block and tackle and do those things, how fast and how much more of an increased you see in productivity in your clients that you have do that. I mean, is that like instant results that they’re seeing when they actually change these are, what are your case studies working with clients who have,

 

who’ve really tried to apply this. Yeah, that’s a great question. So we’re not machines, we’re not robots. And so what that means is that we can’t actually reclaim the entire 28% and then that may lead you to believe that, okay. So then I can’t actually get the full quarter back. That’s actually not true because when you start to develop your ability to focus,

 

it also speeds up your output for the 72%. That wasn’t an issue anyway. Right. So what I see is, well, beyond then the 28% capture, it’s almost like people are becoming twice as productive as they previously were and that’s life changing, right? Because you’re producing more with the time you have. And that suddenly gives you the time that you are yearning for when it comes to your health and your relationships.

 

And yeah, it’s been life-changing for me to personally, because I just work, you know, with an extreme sense of focus I’m intensely on and then intensely off. And there’s no real anxiety during my Workday. There’s so much to be said to this. Like you were saying, I mean, it’s, you guys are just going to be super excited when you get a chance to experience Eric’s book with that being said again,

 

there’s so many things we could talk about, but moving on to the anti-fragility, let’s talk about that and why that is so important. We were talking about it a little bit behind the scenes before we started recording. What exactly is that to our listeners who are just wondering, I don’t even know how to define that necessarily in my life. Yeah. Okay.

 

So let’s play a game. Let’s say that you are a shipping container, you know, and my question would be, well, what does the container or the crate, you know, say on the side, if you’re that crate, what’s your label, is it fragile? And then that means you get hit a couple of times you break. And then my question to you would be,

 

well, what’s the opposite of being fragile. And then you’ll say probably something like robust, you know, or strong, robust, and strong synonyms, you know? So that just means that, okay, I can kick you a few more times and eventually you break and then you might say, no, no, no, no, no, no,

 

no, no, no. I’m resilient. Okay. Well, by definition, that means that we can keep hitting you and you’ll absorb the shock and you’ll stay the same. It’s like, Oh, okay, well that’s pretty good. Enter antifragile. The more we kick you, the stronger the crate becomes, wow. That’s where we want to be.

 

Now people, when they first hear this say, okay, wishful thinking, that’s like, you know something in a Marvel movie, that’s, that’s not reality, but then you’re dead wrong because every single person, your body is a perfect temple for anti-fragility. You stress a muscle and it causes it to grow. You expose the body to germs and bacteria.

 

It builds the immune system. You expose tissues to, you know, small doses of, you know, ultra by light. And it actually generates vitamin D you’re already, anti-fragile physiologically your body’s already doing it without you even realizing it. So it’s hard coded in your DNA. You just need to get what’s happening in your body, up into your head.

 

And so anti-fragility is about realizing that the gym, where you go and you train doesn’t need to just be there in the gym. You can turn life into one massive training camp. So every moment of adversity, challenge, frustration, disappointment thing, that doesn’t go your way. It’s nothing more than a personal trainer in the gym of life, walking up to you and saying,

 

Hey, here’s a Dumbo. Do you want to curl it? And you can either grab the dumbbell, curl it, complete the repetition and grow stronger as a result. Or you can wimp out and walk out of the gym. So it’s up to you. And the antifragile mentality says, yeah, I’ll take that dumbbell. Yeah. And if you’re in an argument with somebody,

 

for example, and now they escalate the argument, all that’s happening there is that they’re saying here here’s a heavier Dumbo and you could walk away or you could stay there and you can curl it with your best self. So loads of different ways of building this mentally, you know, anti-fragility, you know, that I cover in the book, but probably the most powerful,

 

I mean, there’s so I have so many favorites, so hard to choose. Okay, I’ll go with this one. If you can embrace this, just this, if you forget everything else I’ve just said, and if you just embrace this one thing, even if you forget to pick up the free digital copy of the book, that’s fine, but just don’t miss this point.

 

And that’s in 2021. Do you want to remain amateur in life or do you want to turn pro let’s start with an amateur. So the first half of my career, I let an amateur existence by that I made feeling for me, preceded action. I needed feel like doing things in order to do them. So feeling generated action. That’s how an amateur lives their life.

 

And the amateur will get amateur. Results a pro knows that it’s action that generates feeling the equation is literally flipped, which means they don’t need to feel like doing something in order to take action. They take action, whether they feel like it or not. And in fact, when you really upgrade this kind of way of being or mentality, the less you feel like doing something,

 

the more discomfort it presents you, the more you step into it, the more you say it’s there for in that direction. I must step, you know, it’s sorta like elite warriors are trained to run towards the sound of gunfire, not a way. Right? And so turning pro versus remaining an amateur, what do you want 20, 21 to be?

 

And where have you been an amateur in life? And where can you develop a professional mentality and know that action generates feelings, not the other way around. Wow. Eric, I’ve never heard it explained as well as you just explained that there, thank you so much. I mean, that was just, I mean, the anti-fragility part in one of the things you said,

 

let me look back at my notes here. So I have it, is that the resilience you bounce off and stay the same. And so many you hear that talked about so often like, Oh my gosh, well, you need to be resilient and just bounce around and just pop off this. But what we’re talking about is, yeah, resilience keeps you exactly where you were before you don’t go forward.

 

You don’t go backwards. You just bounce off and you remain the same in the way that you’ve just explained that with actually changing with actually becoming stronger from each one of the blows, the pushes, the drops, whatever it is super amazing. And I love everything that you said, and I know our listeners are just really going to get a ton out of this.

 

Not only that that’s so generous of you to give away a digital copy of your book and for your time here on the show, this is the perfect show. So Jeff Goins introduced us. Thank you, Jeff, for bringing Eric here on the show. Jeff was a guest on the show. Oh my gosh. Like almost four years ago now in the very beginning,

 

when we first launched and he was right on about you being perfect for our audience and your message that you wanted to share. And I’m so glad that you’re here and this is exactly what we were looking for for honestly, for me personally, to kick off 2021, you know, we have guests on the show. I learned so much from you and really wanting to find somebody that was saying exactly what I selfishly personally needed to hear right now is an entrepreneur and a mother and a leader.

 

And what I would consider was a peak performer up until 2020. And now I just feel like I have been resilient and I have not necessarily gotten stronger through this. And so I will look at myself very, very closely after today’s episode. And I’m super excited to dive in more to the work that you’re doing and really appreciate your time on this show.

 

And so tell everybody how they find you. I’m really into reading print copies. I love holding a book in my hands, how they can experience your work, where you hang out when you are being incredibly focused and hanging out online, not all the time and how they can work with you when they’re ready to really take their business and their life to the next level.

 

Yeah. I just have to say April that, you know, when you say, wow, I really needed this personally. Hey, me too. You know, the reason that I’ve done all of this is not because I wasn’t born thinking this way. I had to become an expert about all this stuff because I really needed it. I needed to become anti-fragile.

 

I needed to become more productive. I needed to start living more intentionally. So we’re all on the same boat on that. So I just wanted to say that. So, okay. The book, if you like print copies of the book, please head over to Amazon, amazon.com, amazon.co.uk. I’m based here in the, in London, in the United Kingdom,

 

but either Amazon will have the book. If you head over to my website at Erik, Erik with a C Eric partaker, just like it sounds partaker.com got a free digital copy of the book waiting for you there. And I have some free three-part video training with worksheets as well, waiting for you there that will help you further embed some of the concepts in the book I’m coming out with an entire video course that I’m filming actually this week,

 

like over 40 different modules, all about IPA, which will be available on the website by the time this airs. And then if you’re listening and you’re like, look, I think I benefit from even just a chat, a single kind of peak performance insight session, which, which I run, you know, on a free basis with people, or if you’re like,

 

I need a coach or any of that, then just get in touch via the website. And, you know, we can have a chat, basically. I’m looking after, at the moment, 24 CEOs, entrepreneurs, other coaches, and they’re running everything from billion dollar businesses down to pre-revenue, you know, they’re just getting their funds raised to start their business,

 

but they all share the same quest. They want to close the gap between their current and best self. They want to reach their full potential and they want to do it. Multidimensionally and then, you know, my email, Eric, Eric partaker.com. So there you go, Thank you so much and we’ll make sure all those links are in the show notes.

 

And thank you so much for your time. I am super stoked to kick off 2021 with you, Eric and great to be connected with you. Thank you.<inaudible> Right. And that is a wrap for episode number 208 here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. You can find all of the show notes and the digital copy of the book that Eric’s promised you here on today’s show by visiting Sweetlife co.com

 

simply click on podcast. And this is episode number 208. And for those of you guys that are really ready to kick off this year with a bang, make sure to join us for commitment week 2021. It is coming up on January the 11th, totally free to join, and we are going to be covering five different aspects to reset and refocus your business for 2021.

 

It’ll take less than seven minutes a day. You guys it’s insane. We’ll go ahead and leave the link to join commitment week 2021, as well as the link to download Eric’s book in the show notes, or you can also just simply join commitment week by visiting Sweetlife coat.com forward slash commitment dash week dash 2021. Right? You guys be awesome. Can’t wait to talk to you next week.

 

Bye bye. For now

Episode 206: 3 Tips To Put Family First As An Entrepreneur & Create More Time Freedom – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Download: The Ultimate Guide to Choosing the Online Business Model That’s Right for You

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz
 
Small business owners who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. 

Summary:

Growing a company while raising a family is a lot of work. Oftentimes entrepreneurs feel maxed out, and “Cat’s in the Cradle” by Harry Chapin breaks your heart. You started your company for freedom, and you know you can obtain it, but you don’t want to wait to sell or years more of hard work before reaping family life’s rewards. 
 
In this episode we break down 3 practical systems you can implement this week, that require minimal work and will gain you maximum time freedom.

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. See how you can tweak your business model right now to create more time
  2. Know the power of messy days, how to schedule them and why you’ll love them
  3. Know more creative ways you can connect with your #1 team (family)

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. And welcome to episode number 206 of the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, and Merry Christmas to those of you who are listening to this live and happy holidays to everybody, regardless of what you celebrate here,

 

we are celebrating family, and I just hope that this show reaches you and that you’re blessed by what we talk about today. Thank you so much for tuning in with us over the holidays. We’ve never missed an episode so far. And this year with all that’s happened in 2020 is no exception. And so today we are talking about three simple ways to put family first as an entrepreneur and create more time.

 

So whether you’re listening to this live and it is Christmas week here in 2020, or you’re listening to this down the road, everything we’re talking about is a proven business strategy that you’re going to be able to take to the bank and create more time in your life, whatever you want your life to look like. I know that many of you who’ve listened to this show for years.

 

You know, that half of the time my teenage boys are walking in and out of the door. On the other side of, of my office recording here, you know, with their friends or to the skate park, you know, wherever it is that you are doing life, we need to create a business model, a lifestyle around enabling that. And so this show fits really well into what we’re talking about right now with the holidays,

 

with, you know, really cherishing life. I think the one thing that for us, it was just such a hidden blessing that came out of 2020 is just really loving being together at home and cherishing time. The one thing that money can’t buy is a second of time. And so a lot of things we’re talking about here on the show we’ve been talking about for years,

 

but in this episode is all strategies to control time into a create as much time so that you are enabling family first in your business. This episode is for those of you guys who are in any phase of my start to scale up system. And so that’s phase one through five, whether you’re just thinking about starting a business, or you are a seasoned entrepreneur,

 

that’s making a huge impact this show. And what we’re talking about here applies to all of you guys who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. Because the reality is, is a growing a company and raising a family is a lot of work. And oftentimes we as entrepreneurs feel super maxed out right in that song, cats in the cradle,

 

I’d sing it to you, but I’ve a really terrible voice that song comes on and it’s like heartbreaking. And, and I was actually just listening to it last week with my boys. And one of my kids asked guys, you know, I love song, but what does it actually mean? And I was like, ah, you know, it’s about this dad that worked so hard that he never had time for his kid and he regretted it.

 

And it was like, Oh, that through the gut, I know we feel that as entrepreneurs. So that’s how we were talking about some strategies here on the show. At the end of this episode, this is what you’re going to know. So you are going to see how you can tweak your current business model right now to create more time like instantly right now,

 

as you’re listening to the show, we are going to talk about the power of messy days, how you can schedule them and why you will love messy days. And I’m going to share with you some behind the scenes about how I schedule these types of things. And you are going to know more creative ways that you can connect with your number one team,

 

which is your family. And if you don’t have kids in your listening to this show, this family, your family is your support system, your network, whatever that looks like to you, all of our lives are beautifully different. And so whatever that looks like to you, you’re going to be able to take the strategies that we talk about here on this episode and apply them right away to your business and for all the show notes and the resources we mentioned here in the show,

 

cruise over to Sweetlife co.com. Again, that Sweetlife co.com click on podcast. And this is episode number two, zero six. Okay. Let’s dive into today’s strategies. It’s going to be a real quick show cause it’s a holiday week, but really powerful. So stick with me.<inaudible> Step number one, in order to create more time in your business for family and lifestyle freedom,

 

we need to look at your business model. So your business model can either bury you or save you. So the first thing I want you to look at is really how you’re serving clients. How much of that time does that of your time, does that take within a week and understand the demands of delivering certain projects or services places on your time, energy and your ability to focus.

 

First of all, what do you do? Take a look at what you do. Just kind of picture your, your week and how you’re working with clients. Do you work with people? One-on-one do you work with people, one on group? How does that really look in your life? And right now I want you to assess that. And I want you to understand the time that’s required,

 

that you are spending currently working with your clients and take a look at this current business model that you have. What does that look like? How do you work with people? Is it one-on-one? Is it one on group? How frequently in the first thing you want to do is you want to ask yourself, you know, Hey, is this working for me or is the actual amount of time that I’m spending with my clients taking away time from family?

 

Now one might say, well, wow, isn’t that great? You know, you’re, you’re so busy. Your business is so busy. You have so many clients. Yes, that is true, but busy doesn’t equal. Good. So we’re going to give you some tips here to take a look at turning busy-ness into profit and time. And so the first thing I want you to do is I want you to ask yourself,

 

what can I change right now? So that would be, are you seeing clients five days a week? You and these are just some suggestions for you. Can you block and tackle your client days as an example, I only work with clients privately on Thursdays and Fridays. And I’ve shared this with you guys on the show before, and I’ll share with you again,

 

because I just get great feedback from this time. Number one, I think, I think best when I consolidate my work. So if I know that Thursdays and Fridays are, or my business coaching days, when I work with entrepreneurs and small businesses, then I get in that mindset and I know what I’m doing. I also then can look at my business model and I can say,

 

okay, all of these businesses are in this same type of need, this same type of area. And so now I’m going to create groups and I actually scale my business model and I always do this again, reassess it. So I have, if I have five clients that are in the same place and need the same things, I actually will offer a group strategy call for those clients.

 

It’s great for me, it’s great for them to network with other people and everybody gets the same results. So I want you to look at your business right now and ask yourself, can I number one block and tackle my days. And then within those days, what sort of smart scaling can I do for my business model? So can you create group offers?

 

Can you create some on-demand content that your clients or your customers might want to absorb, instead of saying the same thing to different people? One-on-one can you create maybe an online resource center for your clients to tap into some of your more, more frequently asked questions to help save some of that time or even create a course or an actual program for them to go through online.

 

Other strategies for you are creating maybe a membership committee, unity, or an online forum this year can be done with Slack or something easily with boxer, where you create a group of people that you want to connect with and you want to help them Connect with each other, but you don’t want to launch a full-blown membership site because that might not really work with your actual business model.

 

So those are some suggestions of things that you can look at right now in your business, so that you can say, Hey, listen, what can I actually change immediately? What can I actually group together to save my time? And what are the dates phase where I would like to serve my clients? Another reason I haven’t mentioned it here, but why I serve clients on Thursdays and Fridays is because of the entire beginning of my week is on business building content creation and actual strategy.

 

And so I take care of the business building inside in the beginning of my week, when my mind is fresh. For example, I’m recording this podcast episode on a Monday, usually record on Mondays or Tuesdays. When I know that I can put really powerful, highly impacting content. And then I take care of serving my clients because once I go in and I start immersing myself in my client’s businesses,

 

it fully takes over all my thought processes. So that’s one of the reasons why I serve clients towards the end of the week. And then I have that weekend break in between. So action item. Number one is take a look at your current business model. Can you group together the days that you serve your customers, serve your clients, and can you make some changes to how you’re serving your clients?

 

Creating group offers a membership community, or even just an online forum and really take a look at controlling instead of spreading yourself out throughout the week, consolidating your work into different types of work that you were doing at a time. That’s really strategy. Number one, within that same strategy. We talked about this a few episodes ago on the show within that same strategy,

 

you should be planning your year in advance. So planning what you’re selling when you’re selling it. So, you know, we have a big macro plan and then we have a micro plan week by week. So you really should be taking a look at what’s happening for the year to come. Regardless of when you’re listening to this episode, you can do this at any point in time and really know what you’re selling when you’re selling it and what demands that’s going to put on your life and your family,

 

okay. Strategy, or I should say, tip number two is my favorite. And I call it for the love of messy days. This is what a messy day is. A messy day is a day that I have scheduled in the middle of my week. My messy day is always Wednesday. And that day is a break between my strategy and my content creation at the beginning of the week.

 

And my client service at the end of the week, messy days are totally to be spontaneous. And this is an amazing thing. It’s especially amazing if you have teenagers like I do. So on my messy days, I really don’t schedule any client meetings, but this is the day I schedule like the kids’ teeth cleaning, or if I need to stop by the grocery store or any appointments like I would have for myself,

 

like going to get my eyelashes glued on or a haircut, all of those things are always scheduled on a Wednesday. This is also the day where I am completely able to be spontaneous with my kids. Do I have to get work done? Yes. I still work on messy days. So Wednesday is my favorite day to be this day. But it’s also the day that,

 

you know, if my kids just want to sit down and, and have a cup of coffee and hang out where I always don’t have somewhere to be, I always can make sure that that is in that day. And they literally throw the plan out the window again. Do you have a list of things you have to get done on messages? Yes.

 

Are they so regimented and scheduled? Not at all is one of the things I love doing with my kids on messy days is we have this taco wagon down the street and it’s just this amazing Mexican food that’s here in Lafayette, Colorado love taco wagon, and the kids will just be hungry. I’ll say, Hey, let’s, let’s go to taco wagon and grab some tacos and it’s super spontaneous and they love it.

 

We listen to music. We play music messy days are the days where I can just stop and walk out of my office and share songs with the kids and listening to what they’re listening to, or watch YouTube videos or sit down and play call of duty, which by the way I suck at on Xbox. But I try, you know, those are the things we do on messy days.

 

And so messy days are a day sometime in your week, if you can’t fit it in every single week, maybe plan and schedule a messy day every two weeks. And again, this is the time for you to know this is when you can fit in your haircuts teeth, cleaning, having to run an errand, maybe go to the post office. But it’s also the day where you can totally stop and have a cup of coffee with a friend who just might really need you call your aunt on the phone,

 

who you haven’t talked to in forever. And all those things that get scheduled out because the schedule is too regimented. Messy days is totally to not be regimented, but you will love it because you’ll actually get more work done in the other days. When you know, you have your messy day, wherever that may land in your week. And then the third tip I have for you is to really over communicate with your family over communicate with your team.

 

Again, whoever that is, it can be, you know, young, old, it can be your dog. You know, I used to communicate with my toddlers, my boys, when I was working from home and say, okay, you know, mommy really has a lot of work to do for the next two hours. But after that, we’ll sit down and we’ll watch Mickey mouse together or whatever.

 

And so as long as you’re over communicating, what’s about to happen with your team. Then everybody is going into that with open eyes and they understand how they can support you in that process. Again, it doesn’t matter if they’re three or if they’re 35, they all understand that. So some suggestions on how to over communicate with everybody, but in a way,

 

that’s not going to take you too much time because that’s would be against the point of this whole entire episode is number one. Every single Sunday night, just have a quick weekly powwow. We do this all the time. We go through the week, we look at our calendars, see what’s coming up and everybody’s just on the same page. It literally takes five minutes and that’s for a family of five to do,

 

but it helps to just communicate and what’s to come. It also helps us all mentally prepare for the week ahead and how we want to show up in that week. We also have a nightly pregame. And so a nightly pregame again, literally takes like one minute saying, okay, this is what the morning is going to look like. This is what I have today.

 

This is what you know, you have going on this next day. This is what this looks like for our family. Let’s again, have everybody be on the same page. It’s also the place where I can take a minute. If my kids need to talk about school or things they’re struggling with and help them strategize a plan to, you know, maybe make up some schoolwork,

 

which frankly has been a lot since everybody’s doing online school and it’s a freaking mess. I won’t go down that rabbit hole, but it’s a time for me to really connect with my boys and hear like, yeah, I just have this, I have this math test tomorrow. I have no clue what I’m doing and really be able to focus in on them.

 

And I know that they really appreciate this nightly pre-game as well. Couple of things we also do and we’ve done for years and years and years is we calendar share. We’ve also taught our boys how to add things to our family calendar. So we have one Gmail address where we manage all of our kid and family things. And so anytime one of our kids has something they want to do.

 

They want to ride to the skate park or they want to go sleep over with a friend or whatever it may be. My boys can add that event and share it to our family calendar. So without even talking, we all know what everybody wants and needs over a period of time. And so everybody’s on the same page without taking any time whatsoever. And you might be asking like,

 

okay, how do I do this? My kids are five. Well, of course this is age appropriate, but I will say that we started teaching our boys to add things to our family, shared Gmail calendar when they were as young as nine years old. So these kids can do anything with tech, right? So you would be very surprised at the wishes we receive on our family calendar.

 

And it’s really cool. That’s how our kids get to do things because it’s planned in a way that works for everybody. And then the last suggestion that I would have for you is a family chat or a family WhatsApp channel or family Voxer. If you’ve never tried any of that, those are all awesome places to create a group chat where everybody’s on the same page.

 

And you as the business owner can even just shoot, instead of calling this person and telling this person to pick up that person, you can just get on your boxer and just say, okay, you know, I’m running 10 minutes late from this meeting. We’re having chicken for dinner. I’ll see you soon, whatever it is that you need to say,

 

you can, you can put in a box or chat to your family. And it’s a really efficient way to actually create more time. Again, if your family is, is a roommate, if your family is, you know, your other business team, or if it’s friends, whoever your people are, these are three simple ways to put those people,

 

to put your family first as an entrepreneur and create more time in your business. And so here’s what we talked about today. We talked about how does your current business model and know how to group your days together and what you can tweak and scale and your business model right now, in order to create more time each week, we also talked about messy days,

 

why you need messy days, why you’ll love them, why your family will love your messy days and really why it just frankly, it’s going to make you think, wow, I’m so glad I’m an entrepreneur instead of wow, crap. This is way harder than I thought it would be. Is there ever going to be a light at the end of this,

 

you know, constant tunnel of demands, messy days, fix that, like in an instant. So if any of these things I can say, I love my messy days the most. And then the third thing is think of more creative ways to connect with your family, whether it’s calendar share or Voxer and different ways to communicate, whether it’s a weekly powwow or a nightly powwow.

 

We talked about that as well. I hope you found some of these suggestions helpful to you and your team, your people, all the people that love you. And you know what it’s really special to have people in your life that love you so much. They just want more of you and they need more of you. That’s a gift. And you know,

 

I know we’re also grateful for that. So it’s really important as small business owners that we take strategies like this business model, calendar share and more practical lifestyle strategies in order to create this time and in life freedom, I’m here to help. I’m here to support you. It’s what I do here on the show. I’m a business strategist, but I’ve built multiple companies with kids.

 

I think I launched my first business when my youngest was six weeks old. So I totally get it. Whatever phase you’re in of parenting. Thank you so much for listening to this show. Again, happy holidays. Happy new year, let’s kick 2020, like to the curb behind us. And I’m so excited to start 2021 with you. We have a lot of amazing things coming up on the show,

 

including commitment week 20, 21, five days. I’m only 10 minutes a day to completely lay out your entire 20, 21 business plan coming up here next week. And so I dive into commitment week 2021 with us next week’s episode number 207. All right, you guys, I will talk to you soon. Have an awesome day.

Episode 205: How To Scale With Systems and Grow Your Team – with Ravi Abuvala

Ruvi Abuvala SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Access Ravi Abuvala’s Free Course: The Exact Steps We Took To Scale 2 Companies To 7-Figures In 18 Months!

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs and small businesses who want to scale by hiring Virtual Assistants but you don’t have the time to look for staff, the expertise to find the best help internationally or the systems in place to onboard your team to scale faster. 
 
This show is ideal for entrepreneurs in Phases 2-4 of my “Start To Scale Up System” – Take the quiz to learn your current business status

Summary:

It’s time to grow your business and you need help. But how do you find the right team members when you don’t have time (or knowledge) to onboard them? In this show, we’ve covering how to hire international help, how to onboard them correctly, and how to do this by using an outside agency. Ruvi Abuvala, founder of scalingwithsystem.com is on the show dishing the powerful secrets his company uses to help other businesses grow and scale with team, systems and “The Ramping Bible”, and how to leverage these in your business right away. 
 
We’re answering these questions about Hiring/Working With Virtual Assistants
  • When is the right time to hire your first virtual assistant?
  • Should everyone hire one? When would you not want to?
  • Where do you hire your virtual assistants from? What are the pros and cons of those areas?
  • How do you know what to take off your plate (delegate) first?
  • How do you make sure there is strong communication and reliability?
  • Should you hire one virtual assistant for everything or multiple virtual assistants for each task?

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. Understand the exponential scaleability of teams
  2. Be aware of the need for (or update of) onboarding systems 
  3. Know which onboarding systems to create first
  4. Have all the answers to the questions posed above

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
For help building offers, courses or programs that Scale visit www.signatureoffer.com
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach, your host, and I’m super glad That you’re here today is a heavy heading show. And you’re going to get a lot of powerful,

 

valuable information. I can’t wait to introduce you to our guest, but if you’re a new listener here to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, I just wanted to say, hello. I’m April beach, the host of this show and founder of the Sweetlife company. And we help experts, entrepreneurs and small businesses scale online, develop your signature offers and become the undisputed leader in your space by providing business consulting and services to service-based entrepreneurs and companies looking to grow and scale with online services,

 

programs, and digital products in everything that we do here on the show. This is our outreach. This is where we deliver proven business trainings from decades of business coaching that you would pay thousands of dollars to get this business strategy. We deliver to you here on the show, totally free. So thank you so much for tuning in, and I can’t wait to dive into today’s show today.

 

We’re talking about how to scale with systems and grow your team. This is episode number 205, which means all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweet life co.com click on podcast and episode two Oh five on today’s show. We’re specifically talking to those of you guys who want to scale your business by hiring virtual assistants, but you don’t have the time to look for the staff yourself.

 

You might not have the expertise in the areas you’re looking to hire. And so it’s hard for you to sort actually who’s the right candidate because you yourself may not know or be a master in a certain area, and you need systems in place to scale your business faster. This show is ideal for those of you guys who are in phases, two, three or four of my start to scale up system.

 

If you aren’t sure your current business status, cruise over to sweet life code.com forward slash quiz, you can just pause this episode for a second and you can just answer six questions. You’ll get your exact business status and a checklist of things you should be focusing on to grow and scale your company faster. So it’s time to grow your business and you need help,

 

but you need to find the right team members. Today’s cast is absolutely insane. You’re going to love this guy in the very best way. He is the founder of scaling with systems. And on this show, we are dishing out powerful secrets that he uses in his company to scale his business faster. And these are the questions that you are going to know the answers to at the end of this episode,

 

when is the right time to hire your first virtual assistant? Should everybody hire a VA when you not want to hire a VA, where do you hire your virtual assistants from what are the pros and cons of those areas? So US-based versus internationally. How do you know what to take off your plate and delegate first? So at the end of this show,

 

you are going to have a list of the most common roles first fulfilled by virtual assistants, by companies looking to scale, how do you make sure there is a strong communication and reliability when you hire out internationally and should you hire one virtual assistant for everything or multiple virtual assistants for each task? Today’s guest expert is rubby of Evolla. And he’s the founder of scale with systems and business accelerator that works to bootstrap and scale their client’s businesses leveraging paid advertising sales funnels,

 

and fully trained overseas VAs, which is the area we’re focusing on today. And the past 14 months, not 14 years in the past 14 months, he has scaled to seven figure businesses with less than a thousand dollars of his own capital in four commission-based employees. Today, he’s worked with over 500 firms around the world and place 300, excuse me, 630 virtual assistants.

 

And he’s spoken on some of the largest stages into the industry, including being featured by Fox news, Forbes and entrepreneur. So without further ado, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast episode. Again, all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number two, zero five<inaudible> Are you guys well, I am joined by Ravi ABA Vala here on the show because it’s time for us to talk about how to scale your business with teams.

 

And this is not something that comes naturally to most entrepreneurial leaders. You know, we’re really good at our area of genius. You know, our zone of genius, what we do the ways in which we give people Results, but when it comes to scaling, there’s a couple of bottlenecks. One is usually business model and the second one is growing teams.

 

And this is something that I have really struggled with as a leader of both of my own companies as well. And it’s not something that comes naturally to me. And so I was super stoked that Ravi wanted to be on this show. And today we’re diving into really how to scale your business, not only by initially growing teams, but growing teams and then sub teams,

 

and really how to scale the actual teams themselves. Some things that I don’t think we talk about enough as entrepreneurs and experts as leaders. So Robbie, thank you so much and welcome to the show April. Thanks so much for having me here. I am super excited, listen to the podcast for a little bit as well. And I know that majority of it is just pure value.

 

So that is exactly what I aim to give everybody that’s listening to this today. So thank you guys for your time and you as well, April. So thanks for having me here. Yeah, I’m super stoked. Okay. So today we’re Going to dive into a couple of different areas. First of all, remote teams, internationally based remote teams. We’re going to talk about,

 

we’re also going to talk about your expert process of growing remote teams, how you onboard people, and then we’re going to dive into how to scale your teams within your teams. So I think one of the first questions that we need to tackle for our listeners here is just breezing by this, because they’ll have all your resources and where to find this more,

 

but just as a foundation, you know, how do people really find expert remote, highly qualified individuals, really outside of the U S to work for them? Yeah, that’s an awesome question. And it’s one that we obviously hear all the time, and I think with anything in life, you have two kind of ways of doing it. It’s like,

 

you’re going to roll up your sleeves. You’re going to figure it out. You’re going to do it yourself, which is awesome. Especially if you’re just starting and you have like the training and everything to go along with it. And you want to take them from just like an anybody to the expert of their fields. That’s one way to do it. And the other way to do it as essentially,

 

you know, working with some kind of third-party company or working with a recruiter, to finding somebody who already has a lot of the skills and qualifications of the tasks that you’re looking to get completed, and then pretty much transplanting them into your team at that point. And then you’re pretty much only selling them on your culture and your vision. So you have two different avenues.

 

You can kind of go down. I see people going through both. We do both, depending on what we’re going, if it’s like a hyper specialized expert in a certain field that like, I don’t even know how to deliver that result. Like, as you grow in scale, if you’re listening to this, everyone’s like go only delegate to people. What,

 

you know how to do it. Well, then you’re locked in this like sphere of like knowledge. And instead you’re gonna get to the point where it’s like, I don’t know how to do this, but I want to do this. And so, you know, I need to hire someone that already knows it. So there’s that aspect of him, which is a little scary,

 

but it was almost like, we’ll talk about later, you communicate KPIs. I think it’s okay. And then like on the other side is like, Hey, I already know how to do this. So maybe I don’t have to go find somebody else that knows how to do this. I can just teach this person to myself, but then you kind of create those systems and that ramping Bible that I’m sure we’ll talk about here in a little bit,

 

that helps them kind of grow along that process. Okay. So this is a really good opportunity. I want people to know, how did you get into this? Like you didn’t, you didn’t start this, did you say I’m going to be a scale expert and help people build teams? So share a little bit of your background in, in why this is now your Ninja skill.

 

Yeah, so I keep it really short because I want to stay on the value. But very long story short was going to go to law school, graduated college. My dad was diagnosed with stage four lung cancer. I had to go take care of him. Instead of law school, I finally got into law school, decided it wasn’t for me. I dropped out sort of my first company prospect social was an advertising agency and knew nothing about systems.

 

You don’t think about process. Like I was just like, I’m going to come at this just with pure hard work, like pure grinding hustle mode. And for the first eight months I gained about 50 pounds. I was like losing hair. I was getting gray hairs and I made $3,000. The first six, eight months of business, $3,000 as a screenshot on my website.

 

You can see it. And I almost thought that I made the wrong decision. Then I hired my first coach or consultants. I went to a mastermind. I hired my first coaching consultant. He showed me really the powers of virtual assistants, the powers of systems, the power of sales funnels. I know a lot of the stuff that you guys cover as well.

 

I implemented that stuff. Next month, we did $30,000. Within six months, we had done a hundred thousand dollars in one month and now that’s a multi seven figure business. And just from that moment that I hit the map by having that first month to a, you know, a few months later when people started seeing me living abroad and traveling the world,

 

I just had a bunch of people reaching out to me. How did you do this? You know, we were in the same Facebook group and at the same level and all of a sudden you’re shot up here. And so I just pretty much was like, yeah, that’s pretty much just like the sales funnels and these virtual assistants. And here’s how you do it.

 

And long story short, you know, I think a lot of great businesses if you know, like Slack or a few others, like it’s never really, the intention for that main business was ever to start it, but you just have people like banging on your door. Like, you know, you’re trying to sell one thing and they’re like, I want this other thing.

 

And so that was kind of the Genesis of scaling with systems. Yeah. I love it. I love it. And we’ll make sure there’s a link to your company and how to work with you as well to do this. So we have these first hires and it is, it’s such a big problem for business owners. You know, we have these first hires,

 

but they’re on board, but let’s talk about actually how to interview them. You have a really special onboarding process this too. I know from talking to so many companies and I personally know within my own business that developing the onboarding process is a ton of work to do it right in. Sometimes, you know, you really fail in a way that you’re not going to get the end result for that new person.

 

So talk to us about your it’s. You call it the ramping Bible and really how to do this, how to bring people, team members on board. Yeah. It’s super interesting. It’s like, you know, anytime you just sit down and I know you work with a lot of like people that are creating their intellectual property on coursework or whatever it is.

 

And so, you know, I don’t know about anybody else, but when I’m doing it, it’s like, I’m not getting paid for that necessarily yet. And so it’s really hard to like, take that time, carve it out and do it. It’s it’s just like, there’s like leverage data and you’re like, I’m going to get paid later for this.

 

But right now this is really difficult. And the onboarding process is something super similar. And so a lot of people, they don’t have any kind of onboarding process. They don’t have any kind of training. And so instead what they’ll do is just hire someone and they’re like, okay, go do this thing. Or then they’re trying to spend all this time training them and that’ll work with their first hire and maybe for the hire after that.

 

But if you’re smart enough, you know how to, which I wasn’t smart enough with just so everyone here knows I had to learn the hard way, but now we help our clients avoid it. You can create this kind of onboarding training process. We call the ramping Bible inside of scaling, which systems is 35 pages long. It’s a Google document. And it literally starts out like we have one for our commission-based sales position literally starts out with just like,

 

Hey, this is why we’re hiring you. And this is the importance of this position. These are the KPIs. And then these are also the<inaudible>. These are the goals. If you do this, you’re going to make this money. If you do this, you’re going to make this. So there’s no like end of the year bonus, there’s no like,

 

you know, you’re going to get promoted at Rockefeller. And it’s just like, here’s how you will make more money and graduate in our company. And we lay it out from everything into Z. And then after that, I’m telling them because a lot of people mistake this and they don’t even have this systemized, but why should you work for scaling systems?

 

Why should you work for this company? Like, what’s the vision here? What’s the dream here? What are our past clients? Like you have to sell your employees on working with you. And if you don’t and they’re going to leave the first opportunity that they get. And so then we have a few pages on like who we are, what my bad,

 

that story. I just told you a second ago, like about my dad, the lung cancer, the drop out of school. And then we get into kind of the hard skill stuff, which is like, Hey, here’s how you send cold emails. Usually you scrape leads. Here’s how you send LinkedIn messages. Here’s how you do demo calls. There’s do qualifying calls.

 

I mean, it took me probably two months to get the whole thing together. But now, you know, between the 1800 virtual assistants that we’ve hired in the past two years, and then, you know, I personally have onboarded 35 different team members inside of our company. All I literally do is, and I’ll tell you guys a little hack, which we don’t have to get into,

 

but our salespeople pay us $1,500 to come work for our company and make us money because we give them a pretty much a done for you course almost. That’s like, here’s how you make money online. These are you doing. And we just have our service as a thing that they deliver for. And so we’re teaching them to be like top 1% salespeople,

 

you know, top 1% lead generators. And so some of my sales guys, I have a guy in Canada he’s 17 years old and making like close to $10,000 a month at 17 years old selling our stuff. And so if you can have something that comprehensive from a to Z, then you can get a 17 year old in Canada to sell for you.

 

You can get someone in the Philippines to do ads for you or client fulfillment or whatever, the backend stuff for us, but it kind of all lays on and falls on that foundational ramping Bible or whatever you want to call it. That someone gets whenever they join your company. Okay, that’s genius. I’m sold. I want your ramping Bible. And I want my own ramping Bible for the Sweetlife company.

 

Absolutely. You know, I thought our brand introduction onboarding process was cool. Well, definitely no where doesn’t even hold a candle to this. So if you guys are listening, clearly this is the gold standard. This is what needs to be done that alone. We could end this podcast episode on, well, you could just do that. You’re going to scale exponentially just by doing that,

 

this ramping Bible, you have it for your own company and your own systems, but then do you also help other companies develop their own ramping Bible based on what you have established there? Let’s talk about that a little bit. Yeah. A hundred percent. So like if I was to just get people, the Randy Bible straight as we haven’t and probably overwhelmed a lot of people,

 

right? Unless they like have multiple team members already and they have people to work on and consume the content. It’s like people would lose their minds. So instead we’re kind of build pieces of the ramping Bible together. So they get to see ours, they get understand what is involved in ours. We help them build it. But instead of being like,

 

Hey, do this for every position in your company, usually cause we place these virtual assistants for our, we start there and we’re like, okay, this is what they need to be trained on. And we actually train them for our clients. So we do, they do a 60 day bootcamp and we do all the work for them. So they’re kind of getting the done for you,

 

virtual assistant, but then it’s like, Hey, you know, what do you need to, we teach them how to great, obviously SOP standard operating procedures. So, you know, what do you need to reference back to what happens if you make another hire, right? What happens this virtual assistant leaves, whatever it is. And so we help them build this ramping Bible with them.

 

And we usually start in the lead generation side because that is an, our experience where a lot of people are lacking in their business is just like, you don’t have enough appointments or people in their calendar. And then once we get past that, then we can start talking about ramping Bibles for sales or ramping Bibles for our account management or ramping Bibles for chief operating officers or any one of those other positions.

 

Yeah. So we kind of help our clients create that after they joined scaling with systems and then we’ll give them the virtual assistant, who’s going to go through it already, fully trained. Right. Oh my gosh. What an amazing outline, what amazing program you guys have. Okay. So this brings us to the next area that I really want to talk about.

 

So the majority of the listeners to this show are established small businesses, but if you really, they call us micro businesses. You know, if you look at a small business, it’s still, you know, a hundred people. So we’re talking, you know, businesses that have anywhere from eight to 20 team members or businesses that are listening to this show that might only have three team members right now,

 

but they need to get to 12 in order to fulfill all the roles within their company. This brings in so many other growing pains as far as from a management and scaling standpoint. So talk to us about your expertise, what you can pour into our listeners when it’s time to actually scale the team itself. What are the primary roles? We talked about a little bit behind the scenes before recording,

 

but what are the primary jobs that most companies seem to fill first when they’re starting to delegate and grow their team? And how do you recommend companies go about managing that scaling process within the team itself? Yeah. So there’s a great concept called a scorecard. I didn’t create it myself. It was from the gentleman who created HubSpot. They wrote a great book called inbound marketing,

 

and they’re talking about the scorecard inside of there. And the idea of it is like, you know, every day as a CEO, other team members should be reporting on their scorecard to you the 10, 12, 15 most important statistics in that company. So, you know, number of leads generated number of appointments, you know, number of cash collected yesterday.

 

You compare that to last week, whatever it is. So the first thing you have to do before you even talked about scaling a team and making the hires is like, are you systemized? And then once, you know, you’re systemized, if someone was going to take this role, what is the expected KPIs? Where’s this expected goals I would want them to do.

 

And a lot of people’s like, I don’t know, but let’s just say, have you focused solely on email? And you knew that you could send out 300 emails a day and you could probably get five people. That’d be interested in what you’re doing. Then, you know, that’s while you’re still trying to juggle 15 other things at the same time.

 

So if you hire one person to do this, full-time they could probably get eight to 10 leads day. That’s a, probably an average or a conservative number to use. And so then you hire the person who said, Hey, I’m expecting eight to 10 positive responses, leads, booked appointments in my calendar. If you do this every single day, they say,

 

yes, you go great. Then what you’ll do is you’ll try a bunch of things out, LinkedIn, email, Facebook, Instagram, or whatever kind of department that you’re in. Obviously whatever’s relevant to that. And then you’ll see what’s working and you’ll see what’s not working. And a lot of times it’s like one thing is blaring obvious that it’s working.

 

And a lot of other things aren’t. And the biggest mistake, I see people doing whatever their scaling teams is. They keep everyone focused on this like kind of general level where like, everyone’s just doing everything instead of being like, okay, majority of our booked appointments are coming from email, but I keep on trying to do Facebook messages or LinkedIn messages or whatever it is instead of okay,

 

email works. I’m gonna put you full time on email and they’re going to hire another person to do full-time on email as well, but that’s doubling our efforts. So the first thing that I’ll usually say is like, you figure out what’s working through your KPIs and your scorecard. And then you can double down on that as long as it’s something that you want to double down on such as sales or lead generation,

 

right? The typical flow that I see people doing in a business, especially higher ticket service based businesses, which is kind of what our wheelhouse is, is virtual assistants for lead generation is mostly the number one thing that you do then what’ll happen is pretty soon you’ll get so many leads that you literally can’t do. The sales calls. You’re like, you know,

 

dizzy from doing eight to 10 sales calls every single day. So the second hire that we used see is sales. And at this point you have kind of the front end of your business taken care of. You’re waking up, you’re out, you’re having the BA generate leads, a sales person closed deals. And now you have the back end you’ve got to work on.

 

And I know you work with a lot of hyper scalable or you help people become hyper scalable through like courses or kind of intellectual property. Exactly. So then we start working on that. How do we kind of make your offer a little more hyper scalable? So before we even hire somebody, you know, you don’t want to hire someone in to do something that’s inefficient because then you’re just spending money to do something that’s inefficient.

 

So how can we streamline your backend process a little bit more, your offering your coursework, whatever it is, working with one niche. And then you’ll usually hire a virtual assistant of a bill for you or some other specialized person. Then it’s an account manager to handle everything that’s going on. And at this point you’re pretty much just operations, right? You got someone generating leads,

 

you’ve got someone closing leads, you’ve got someone onboarding clients, you got someone delivering for you. And that’s honestly all really low cost because you’re using virtual assistants and commission only salespeople. And then you kind of have room to do the next hire, which is a little more higher level, but just like chief operating officer, essentially, this is the person that is now managing all these people.

 

And they’re the ones that look at the KPIs and everything else. And now you’re pretty much free to do what, like I’m doing. A lot of my other clients are doing which like podcasts and play with ads and do content and grow a YouTube channel and work on your products onto the backend stuff, which is a dream state for me personally, I had to make sure that the whole company is growing and scaling month over month.

 

Right. And, and you’re the only one that can do those things. Nobody else can do those, but you, you know, it’s your genius. And I, and I absolutely love that. And so what we’ve done is a company is, you know, we grow really, we have grown from the top down and I say this the time on this podcast.

 

So my listeners know that I really suck at management. I don’t mean to be, I’m really nice, but I’m just not a great person to work for because I’m super entrepreneur creator, not, you know, not a great systems person, but then Kevin’s, I have those systems people to do that. But you know, we’ve really grown it from that CEO position that,

 

you know, CMO position and then down. But I love this idea. Granted, we started growing 16 years ago, but I love this idea about really filling this in. So are companies that come to us and the people that listen to the show, I mean, everybody knows the power of scaling. They just don’t know how to go about it.

 

And there’s budget different ways. We’ve talked about scaling, you know, scaling your offers, you know, to figuring out your systems, how your, your business model, which is all the stuff that I geek out on this scaling through teams is absolutely seems the first foremost, everything you should be thinking about those you guys who are listening, whether you’re just getting started or you’re just at that tipping point where it’s time to scale.

 

For sure. I want you to process what re what Ravi is saying here, because it’s incredibly important and I totally see this. Okay. So let me ask you some questions here. As I’m getting through to kind of thinking about some questions that our listeners would be asking. So we talked about finding the right people and whether you outsource or, you know,

 

you’re, you’re kind of going through the process of finding them on your own finding the right people is, is a big, heavy lifting job. And so that is something that your company takes care of. And we’ll make sure that our listeners know how to find you this ramping Bible, again, huge project, huge project. And so based on where our listeners are in this love the value of taking your expertise in your template and creating their own from that.

 

And one of the things you said that was really important that I just want to hit on is having our team members find themselves in our mission is a big thing. I know for me personally, we just got back from our 20, 21 planning retreat in Florida. We were in Florida last week. And one of the biggest things for each one of my team members has been like,

 

okay, what is your vision? And how can you find your vision within my company? You know, how is this great for you in addition to being really awesome for me too. And so I love it. That’s something that you guys hit on and there, do you feel like we can do that as well with international teams as we can growing US-based teams?

 

And how do you create that culture within your team? I did not tee you up for this. You did not know I was going to ask this, but how do we create that sort of team culture when your team is spread out all over? So I’m super happy you asked it. And, and it’s funny, cause like culture is kind of like one of those little buzz words that people just say,

 

you know, on an Instagram video or whatever it is. But if you have a team, you understand that like culture is the difference. If like when COVID happens and you’re a business campaign payroll that they’re still working, right? Like that’s a difference in culture. And obviously, luckily we didn’t have that problem because we’re online. But like my brother had that issue cause he had restaurants.

 

And so culture is a difference in like, you know, you not being able to make salary next month, culture difference. And like you having to ask someone to work later when it’s, you know, it’s supposed to be their night out with their girlfriend, whatever it is. And they are like, no problem, I totally get it. And like finding those people,

 

it’s a great book, good to great. By Jim Collins, he talks about, you know, getting them on the bus and it’s like finding those people is super, super important. And to do that, you have to develop the right culture and that really starts with, and I’ll be really honest. I will listen. I was really great at this in the beginning.

 

Then we went from six employees to 36 in a matter of three months. And like, I really lost myself and I lost that kind of culture. Like the address was delegating. Like you didn’t do the culture, you do the culture, whatever it is. And what I’ll tell everyone here is why I brought it back from me and what it was in the beginning was like every 90 days we have performance reviews with our employees and I delegated those out for a little bit time.

 

Cause I was just so busy, but we care about personal financial and professional goals. So we would say, Hey, you know, what’s been going great the past 90 days, what do we need to work on? You know, this is both of us, everyone get the feedback. They can knock the CEO. They want to, I think it says,

 

awesome. Let’s talk about goals here. So in the next 90 days, and then even further and beyond what are your professional personal and financial goals. And so some of our team members it’s, I want to lose weight. So when I go back home from Thanksgiving or I go home for Christmas, you know, I look better or maybe it’s like,

 

I want to be able to buy a house, but my credit is for whatever it is and what you’ll realize. A lot of times it doesn’t have to do with money. Like these are not money goals here just like access to certain things or knowledge or information. And so what you can do as a company is help them reach those goals. If they help you reach your goals.

 

So Hey, if you hit these numbers that we send this many outbound messages. If we get this many books appointments, then I will pay for a credit repair service. So you can start getting your application for your home, whatever it is. And I was doing that really well in the beginning. But then, like I said, I lost touch.

 

And recently, literally about a week ago, right in the middle of the move from California to Florida, I’m doing 36 performance reviews in three days. And I’m just like 12 a day, pretty much. I’m like, Oh my God, I’m going crazy. But in that timeframe, I actually was able to like finally go back down and touch every single person and just like hear how much our company has impacted them.

 

And then like what their future goals are and what, and at the end of every single call, they’re like Ravi, I can’t believe you took the time out of your day to do this call with. And I’m thinking in my head, like, I’m grateful for you. Like, please don’t leave me. Like you’re in the big part of this.

 

I’m not, this is nothing like you’ve done everything up to this point. And so I guess that’s the point of building that culture has to really do with like asking your employees what they want, including overseas virtual assistants. The ones that were the most honest with me were the ones in the Philippines. And they were telling me like, they want to have kids,

 

but it’s a little difficult for them to have kids because of like biological reasons. And so we’re talking about adoption and like all these other things that like the other people, you never would hear anybody in the us or someone else talk about what their employer for multiple reasons. But yeah, it sounds cheesy, but figuring it out, writing down what they want,

 

holding them accountable, I’ve been helping them reach it. If they help you reach your goals on your business, I think is a great way to keep a high performance culture inside of a company, but also have that kind of caring. Like I’ll take care of you. Don’t worry about it. Kind of thing. I love that. Oh my gosh,

 

love that. Appreciate all of that. And all of you sharing and the transparency and just really all about that. And I think that’s as important as everything else we talked about today. All right. So businesses are ready to scale and they need help. How can they find you? Yeah, of course, the easiest way. And then I had told you the beginning of this and I’m sure you can confirm it.

 

I talk very fast and I like breeze over topics that people are like, Ravi. I want to learn more about that. And so what I did is I put together a free course. It’s about five and a half hours of totally free content and overs, like where to find the virtual assistants, what kind of lead generation scripts you should be using,

 

you know, how to kind of build that ramping Bible yourself. And if you want to get access to it, you just go to scaling which isn’t dot com slash sweet dash life. And I know April set, you’ll link it down below, but she actually attaches to the podcast. So that way you guys can make it easier for you to remember,

 

but yeah, scaling with systems.com/sweet-life. And you guys get instant free access to that course. Yeah. Highly, highly recommend in your company, scaling with systems. We’ll make sure that we have links to where people can find you in addition to not only the course, but across social media as well. You thank you so much for your time. Thanks for talking fast.

 

Totally love it. We covered so much information and I know that our listeners got a ton of value out of this, especially those that are really at that place where it’s time to scale. They’re serious about it and they want to do it right. So really appreciate your time on this. Yeah, of course. April was an absolute pleasure. Thanks so much for having me on here.

 

Keep up the great work with all the incredible content and for everyone that’s at home or driving, whatever you’re doing, working out and listening, I do appreciate your guys’ time and I hope you got some value out of it, For sure they did. For sure. All right. Thanks Robbie.<inaudible> What a great show. I appreciate rubby so much for being on here.

 

And I like you when we have these guests in here, I’m taking notes like a crazy woman. If you’ve seen us behind the scenes or if you haven’t yet checked out our YouTube channel and you can actually see the full interview on video with me and Ruby and see me taking notes here through this process. Again, you can find the course, which is an amazing bonus.

 

We have, you know, no, no profit stake in this whatsoever. And Ravi doesn’t either. This is a completely free training that he’s given you simply by visiting scale with systems.com forward slash sweet dash life. And you can get access to this complete training that he has for you learn more about that onboarding Bible, the ramping up Bible, and how to create your own.

 

We are here to make sure you have systems in place to grow and scale your business online faster. And we appreciate you listening to the show. If you haven’t yet, please take a second and leave us a review on Apple or you listen to podcasts and connect with us and follow us at Sweetlife company on LinkedIn. Thanks so much. You guys I’ll talk to you next week.

Episode 204: How To Hire The Perfect Business Coach – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

26 Business Coach Interview Questions – free download

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for entrepreneurs who are considering hiring a private business consultant and need to be sure their investment is well spent. This is best for businesses in Phases 2-4 of my Start to Scale Up System™. Visit www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz to learn where your company stands. 

Summary:

You know what got you here is not going to get you to the next level. But, hiring a business coach may feel risky. How do you know if you’ll get the results you need? How do you know if you can trust this person? Will their style meet your needs? Are they legit? In this episode you’ll get massive clarity on how how to hire the right business coach for you, what questions to ask a potential coach and how to weed out the rookies coaches for the best.

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. Know if you’re ready to hire a business coach 
  2. Be equipped to ask the right questions when interviewing business coaches
  3. Have a ton of clarity on how to find your perfect fit coach

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi there. And welcome back to the show. I’m April beach, your host and founder of the sweet life company. And we are here to help all of you experts, entrepreneurs, and small business owners scale online,

develop your signature offer and become the undisputed leader. How we do this here on the show and in the suite life company is by providing an experienced, proven business consulting firm over a decade of working with entrepreneurs, just like you and helping you grow and scale your business with online services, programs, digital products and programs on today’s show. We’re talking about how to hire the perfect business coach.

This is episode number 204, and this is what you can expect. First of all, should you tune in, should it hang out here for me, with me for another 20 minutes? So this show is for those of you guys that are considering hiring a private business consultants, but you need to make sure your money is well spent and you want to make sure that you’re going to the next level.

Here’s the deal. You know, that what got you here to this point is not going to be the same strategy, or maybe even the same self-teaching that can get you to the next level in your business. But hiring a business coach can feel really risky, especially now that everybody under the sun is calling themselves a business coach. Most of them who haven’t even built and scaled their own companies.

And so there are some things that you really need to be careful for. You know, if you’re thinking, how am I going to get results? How do I know if I can trust this person? How’s this person’s style going to meet my needs? Is this person really legit in this episode, we’re diving in to give you massive clarity on how you can hire the right person for you and you know,

the right questions to ask, to make sure that potential coach is going to be the one that delivers you, the results that you’re looking for at the end of the show, you’re going to know, first of all, whether or not you actually need or are ready for a private business coach. And you’re going to be equipped with the right questions to ask when interviewing a business coach.

And of course give you a ton of clarity to find that perfect fit coach for you. Along with this show, we have a download for you. They are 26 business coach interview questions, and you can go grab that, download it totally free. Just visit the show notes@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash two zero four. And you can totally grab that it’s a free download and really important questions.

I want to make sure we’re not only giving you the strategies and talking about the important things here on the show, but I’m actually giving you two pages of questions. You can sit down during your interview with the coach and just ask them in, go ahead and make sure that you are getting the results that you’re looking for even in the pre-interview time. So if you’re ready for that,

let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show<inaudible>. So we’re going to break this show up into two parts, cause I want to make sure I’m giving you exactly what you’re looking for in the answers you need. First of all, again, we’re talking about how to hire the perfect business coach for you and the perfect coach for you is different than the perfect coach for me,

everybody is different. And so it’s really important that you have your own strategies to figure out who that perfect fit is going to be for you. The first one we need to do is talk about whether or not you actually need to be investing in a private business coach. And if your company is actually ready for that. And then in the second half of the show,

I’m going to help, you know, the questions to ask, to find the perfect fit coach for you. So let’s go ahead and dive in again. You can grab the download for the 26 interview questions to ask a business coach by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash two, a four, or you can download it instantly with no opt-in when you join our free community,

you can join our community over@sweetlifecommunity.com and all of our podcasts downloads have no opt in there to really give you speed and efficiency. Okay? So here we go. First of all, are you ready for a private business coach? Just because we all want to individual attention doesn’t necessarily mean that your business is at the point where you’re really ready for that level of coaching.

So let’s go ahead and talk about that together and make sure it’s a good investment for you. First things. First, number one, if you feel like you’ve been trying everything on your own, trying a bunch of different things and failing that them, or if you’ve been self-taught with little games, it may be time for a business coach for you. Although here’s the deal.

I am a huge advocate for failing. Failing is part of what makes you smarter and increases your entrepreneur IQ and helps you find confidence in yourself as a business leader. So when it comes to business growth, failing is part of the process, but we also need to help you make money faster and smarter. We don’t want you to failing forever all the way through.

If you’ve tried something on your own, you can’t get through, you can’t push past a barrier or you don’t understand something, or you like me value not recreating the wheel from scratch. Then private business coach is probably what you’re ready for. Number two, instead of being confident and proactive in your business, you’re starting to follow and copy other people’s success.

So maybe you’re confident in the beginning, but now you’re, you’re starting to kind of copy cat what other people are doing. And that’s never a good thing because even though it might look good on the outside for you, somebody else’s business model might seem like it’s perfect, but it doesn’t necessarily mean it’s the right pathway. And it’s going to get you the same results.

So if you find yourself starting to copycat what other people are doing and you’re lost, then certainly a private business strategist is something that’s going to be wise for you to get wisdom. So if you’ve been trying to do this on your own for a long time, you see other influencers and you see other businesses, and you’re trying to duplicate what they’re doing without any strategic wisdom of your own.

And that’s not working. Then it’s time for a private business coach. So really consider hiring a consultant and somebody who will roll up their sleeves with you, dive into your business with you and really hear what your struggles are. Your areas of expertise, how much money you bring to the table. What you’ve already tried. It’s really important that you don’t hire somebody.

That’s just going to teach you things you’ve already done. And this person should help you come up with a customized plan. That’s going to work for you. And here’s some things that I want you to consider. If you’re building a six to seven figure business and it’s not a side hobby, then it’s probably time. If you’ve met the previous criteria, we’ve just talked about to invest in a business coach,

business coaches are worth their weight in gold. They can absolutely change and transform your business. Literally, almost overnight. Now, no, there are no overnight fixes, but your understanding of your plan and your strategy can go from completely murky to very, very clear, almost instantly with the right coach. There’s nothing that feels better than that. Now you still have to go and implement it,

but that Mindshift alone can truly lift a million pounds off your shoulders and give you the clarity and focus you need. Now let’s talk about what you should invest or expect to invest with a business coach. And the first question starts with you. What can you afford? There are a lot of business coaches out there. I’m a said there are a lot of bitches out there.

There are a lot of bitches out there too, but there’s business coaches out there. I’m laughing. Cause I know my producer is going to leave this in here and you can have an hourly rate with a consultant anywhere from $50 an hour, $500 an hour, up to $5,000 an hour and really beyond. I don’t even know who those coaches are, but I know that they exist.

And I’m hoping this podcast episode can help you sort, the great coaches from those that are truly a sham. This is also why I’ve included the 26 questions to ask a business coach, download with this podcast to help you guide your conversations in interviewing a new coach to help make sure you aren’t getting taken to the cleaners. Okay? And so the deal is,

make sure your investment aligns with the money you have projected to make in your business and make sure it aligns with the value of your offers, your courses, your services, your programs, and what you can expect to recuperate what your ROI is. So the reality is is if you’re selling something for $200, it’s hard to recuperate an ROI. If you invest in a business consultant,

that’s going to cost you 30,000. How long is that going to take you? The amount of investment in my opinion should be relative to your ability to recuperate with an ROI. And that really starts with your offer. How valuable is your offer? You might be hiring a business coach to help you develop your offer, but you generally know the value of what you’re going for the target audience that you want to reach.

And so make sure that the value of what you’re selling is going to help you recuperate in a reasonable amount of time, your investment with a business coach. Now, just aside plug, if you need help developing your signature offer or program, or course consider joining my next upcoming masterclass called your signature offer, and you can add your name to the interest list for that by visiting signature offer.com

will really help you build something that’s highly valuable. And I say this because honestly I’ve heard a lot of people who have invested a lot of money to work with coaches and they put everything on the line and they lose their ass. Some of them have quit their jobs. They can’t pay their mortgage. I don’t want to see that anymore. I don’t want to see that heartbreak.

I don’t want to have any more phone calls with entrepreneurs saying I have nothing left. I spent $20,000 on this coach on this mastermind and I have nothing to show for it. I don’t want that to be you. And so be smart about what you’re investing and make sure that you’re working with the coach. That’s going to deliver the results that you’re looking for.

So if you have money to invest in mentorship, I highly recommend that you do it. The ROI is there. As long as you find the right coach, that can get you the results. And so one of the things to look at is how many trainings are you currently sitting on? If you’ve collected a ton of business courses, if you’re sitting on business downloads and listening to tons of podcasts,

you’ve been in a bunch of different masterminds, but you still don’t have any Results then certainly it’s probably time for a private business mentor for you. Although, as I’m saying this out loud and I’m as I’m recording this, I do know that very few coaches offer private one-on-one. So I would start there if you’re feeling already like, gosh, I really want to work with somebody and I want to get close to them.

Definitely start looking for coaches that even have that as an option. Everybody’s so into scale, scale scale, there are very few coaches that will give you their one-on-one time anymore. And frankly, that’s just a shame. And in that process, you want to ask yourself, how close do I want to be to this coach? If it’s important to you to have a personal relationship with the professional relationship,

with a business coach that knows your story, they know your profit plan. You know, you want them to know what’s on the line for you. You want them to know then, you know, you have the names of your kids and where your dream house is going to be located your vision and the purpose for what you’re doing. Then the best place you are going to find that is in a perfect private relationship.

Okay. So here’s your breaking point if you’ve listened to this so far and you’re like, yeah, no, I’m not ready for a private business consultant. I, I still want to DIY that’s great. You can go ahead and stop listening to this podcast now and tune into maybe another sweet life entrepreneurial podcasts that you’ve missed. If you’ve determined that yes,

it’s time for me to invest in a business coach to grow my company more strategically and faster. Now let’s talk more about how to find the right coach for you. So Denise Duffield-Thomas was on the show a few years ago, actually she’s a money mindset, coach and author of the book, chill preneur. She was a guest here back in 2018 and she wrote a great article a few years back.

And I just want to reference this article because I think it’s really important as we dive into this. I also want to make sure I’m operating and recording this podcast with integrity and ethics because I am a business coach. So I want to make sure I’m bringing you outside expertise and resources. In addition to what I’m delivering you here on the show to help you find a business coach.

And that it’s just not all coming from me. So it’s not me saying, Hey, you know, here’s the questions you should ask a business coach, but there are so many different, great coaches out there and that’s really the truth. And so I want to make sure that I’m giving you enough resources. You can ask wise questions during your interview process.

So I’m referencing Denise’s article here and I’m going to talk about some of the things that she brought up in this article, as well as the strategies that I’m giving you here on this show. So a few points that she brought up and they are very, very valid. The first question to ask yourself is where are you at right now in your business?

Take a really good look at the current plain field. What does it look like right now in your marketplace? What does money look like for you? What is your money look like right now? How clear are you and what you want to build? How clear are you and where you want to go? What do your services look like? Or what do you want them to look like in what’s happening right now and have just a real serious come to Jesus with yourself and just say,

this is where I am right now in my business. I’m not clear on this, or I’m not sure about this, right? I don’t know what decision I want to make about something. Just get really clear and understand where you are right now. This is before you ever get on the phone with a potential coach, this is what you should be doing throughout the process as you’re looking for a coach.

So the first question is really to take a personal inventory after you’ve identified where you are and say, okay, where do I want to go next? What does that look like to me financially? What does it look like? As far as what impact I want to have on a market or on a niche? What does it look like in my business model?

Generally? What type of business model am I looking to build and what sort of marketing and PR do I want to bring in and tap into my business first, take that personal inventory of figuring out where you are and then get really specific on the results that you’re looking for from a business coach, the results you’re looking to achieve in your business and hiring a coach to help you do that.

And then the third part of that is to ask yourself questions like what skills do I need to get from where I am now to where I want to go? So identify the skills you’re missing, or you need to do better at no more. What resources do you need? What systems do you need and where actually am I going? And do I even have a roadmap to get there?

This is pretty standard goal setting strategy, identifying where you are identifying, where you want to go and understanding what’s missing to get you there. But this is absolutely imperative for you to go through this process first to the best of your ability. I understand if you’re hiring a coach, you need a coach to help you figure a lot of this out, but you need to have an understanding of your own individual desires and your current place.

Where are you anchored right now? And where are you going to set sail to? And then you want to go look for a coach that you’re considering hiring. And so here are some questions. Here are some really important things that you should look at in addition to the black and white. Okay. Number one, what sort of life does that business coach have?

Because a lot of coaches have a business model that doesn’t necessarily align with the business model that you want to have for your life. So if you’re looking for somebody to teach you what they know, the tricks of the trade, their area of expertise and their strategies and the plan in which they use to get there, if you don’t want what they have,

they are not the right business coach for you. And I’ve seen that again. And again, I’ve seen midlife women hire younger business coaches, which there’s nothing wrong with that, but totally wanting a different outcome, totally wanting and currently having a different life and wondering why they didn’t get the results that they were looking for. And I just think it’s incredibly important because just seeing somebody there and they might have millions of Instagram followers or a group with thousands of followers and a membership community,

it doesn’t mean that they’re the right business coach for you, just because of a lot of other people follow them. Or a lot of other people work with them. Doesn’t mean they’re the right fit for you. So really take a look and ask that business coach, number one, you should ask them, what is their business model? If you can’t identify this through your own research research.

So what is their business model? How many hours a week do they work? And really what was the process? It took them to get there and do they have kids? That is an important question. You guys, I, this isn’t a mom prenuer podcast or a dad preneur podcast. But if you have kids, you guys that are listening, I’ve said this a trillion times here on the podcast of building a business with kids is totally different than building a business without kids,

your business systems, your model, your scale plan, your launches, your marketing are all driven by business and life strategies. When you have a family, it matter if they’re one or if they’re 18 years old, it’s still, there are different strategies you implement in different things that you put value on when you are building a business for lifestyle Results around family.

So if you’re spending thousands of dollars investing in a coach, who’s unaware of how to build a business in a true travel lifestyle family. It’s probably going to backfire on you. Don’t be surprised if that happens. So that’s just a little side note there. So another great question to ask is what is their coaching style teach versus tell? So this was a question that was going on in a group that I was involved in.

And the question posed was how much do you teach your clients versus how much do you tell them what to do? And I’m reading the comments in this group. And half of the coaches were saying this, no, no, no. You never tell your clients what to do. You only teach them how to find the answer for themselves. And the others were saying,

Nope, I totally tell them what to do. I totally give them the direction that they’re looking for. And here’s what I say. I absolutely tell my clients my expert opinion on what I believe they should do. It’s my personal coaching style to actually do both. Sometimes people hire me and they just want to know the dang answer. They have been searching for years and they just want somebody to tell them the answer.

I’m not going to sit them down. Like my mother did when I asked her how to spell a word and she wouldn’t give me the answer. She’d say, now, honey, now spell it out. I don’t want to spell out the damn word. Right? I literally paid you to give me the answer. And sometimes that’s just what people need and that might be what you need.

But then sometimes my clients need these strategic answers and it’s really, really important. And I’m a firm advocate, making sure my job is to teach my clients every single thing I know as it pertains to their business. So they don’t need me anymore. So basically my job is teaching my way out of a job. And I want my clients to fully say,

you know, Hey April. Yeah, I worked with her. She taught me everything I needed to know, and I don’t need to work with her anymore. And so that’s really the goal. And I share that with you. Obviously it’s a little bit of my own coaching style, but I share that with you because the reality is, as some business,

coaches are not going to give you quick answers. Some business coaches want you to go through the discovery process. Some are almost giving you so much information. It’s like an MBA and funnel building. When you, you know, when you might be a nutritionist, it’s totally irrelevant to the end result that you’re looking for. And I know many of you that listen to this podcast are really strapped for time and you want results.

So do yourself a favor, decide, do I want a business coach that’s going to teach me and tell me when I need an answer or do I just want somebody to teach me how to do things in the style is going to vary across the board. We could get into a whole different conversation between a coach versus a versus mentor. I’m not going there.

The reality is it’s just no, the best way that you learn and know the results that you’re really looking for. And really the happy medium is being able to have the wisdom to make your own decisions based on the coach, guiding you to the response that’s best for you. So just kind of think about that a little bit. And now here are a couple of other tips.

I highly recommend that you’re able to speak personally, one-on-one with the person who’s going to be coaching you before you hire them. You have this opportunity, whether it’s for five minutes or 50 minutes to sit down on the phone or do a video call and make sure that the energy is right to make sure that the relationship giants and it’s really somebody that you can believe that you can learn from you can lean on and you can trust.

And I think that that is super, super important. Particularly with business coaches that require a higher investment to work with them sometimes are these funnels that are built, where you pay a lot of money to hire a coach without ever really having an opportunity to speak to them upfront. And I would personally say that you have a right to speak with anybody who you’re about to invest in to guide your business relative to the amount of investment they’re asking.

If you are joining. For example, one of my business mentorship programs is $10,000. I won’t even take you on as a client until I make sure it’s a good fit for both of us as well. And you would have that same opportunity to interview me back. And I think that that’s very, very important for any business coaching program that requires a higher investment.

So just to share that now, let’s go ahead and dive a little bit in, I gave you the download four 26 interview questions to ask a business coach. I’m going to share a couple of them here as we wrap up this podcast episode, but I really want to make sure you get all of them. They’re asked in a strategic way so that as you go through the interview,

you really get the answers you’re looking for. And so here we go. Question number one is how long have you been coaching number two? How many clients have you coached? Number three, what transformation can I expect after working with you really important one right there. If they cannot explain the end results, you should stop the conversation right there. Number four,

how long will it take to see these results? Number five, how many hours outside of your coaching time do you recommend? I work on the action items that you give me six. Can I speak with others? Who’ve worked with you seven. Do you provide a guarantee of any kind eight? What are your areas of expertise? And this is you asking the coach nine,

how will I contact you 10? How often will we meet 11? This one’s really important. What if I have an emergency question, make sure that you know, their availability to you during emergencies, especially if you’re hiring a coach with a particular launch or a strategy that you really, really need an immediate answer for that might come up. Are you available in person?

And the 13th question is what is your business model? And there are 13 more important questions, maybe not more important, but there are 13 additionally important questions that I recommend that you go through and a business coach interview. And I want to make sure that you have those resources so you can download all 26 business coach interview questions by visiting and sweet life podcast.com

episode two Oh four. So that’s Ford slash two Oh four. And of course you can get all of our downloads with no opt-in by joining our community@sweetlifecommunity.com. And of course, if you’d like to know about working with me privately, I would love to interview with you. You can cruise over to Sweetlife co.com and schedule with me anytime let’s have a chat.

Thanks so much for tuning into this show. I really appreciate your listenership. I know as we wrap up 2020, all of us are eager to get this year over, but I also know that there are a lot of investments that you’re currently making in your business. As you look into 2021. And my job is to make sure that they’re wise investments and I’m equipping you with the tools you need to make wise decisions for yourself and your business and your future.

All right, thanks so much for tuning in here. I’ll talk to you guys next week.

Episode 203: How To Create Your 2021 Online Business and Lifestyle Plan – April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the live workshop for detailed steps on planning 2021, Dec. 10, 2020 – join our Premier Online Community for only $7/ month

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for entrepreneurs in all stages of my Start To Scale Up System™ – take the quiz here to find out and receive a personalized business growth plan.

Summary:

Whether you’re heading to a family reunion are planning to hike the John Muir Trail, Lifestyle freedom is the reason why you became an entrepreneur. Let’s make sure you’re planning your year in advance to actually make it happen. For the past three years I’ve recorded an episode every December to teach how I lay out my year for family and travel first, while assuring I’ve reached the profit benchmarks I need to to make it all happen. In this episode I lay out those steps to make sure my year it’s exactly the way I want it to be. (Regardless of what craziness comes in the year to come, creating a plan is essential to ever getting what you want.)

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. Know how to layout the whole year for lifestyle freedom
  2. Be able to assess what changes may need to happen in your offers and services to reach your lifestyle goals
  3. Have the most important math equation that business coaches don’t tell you – and if you don’t know these numbers – you’re sunk

Resources Mentioned:

 
Join the live workshop for detailed steps on planning 2021, Dec. 10, 2020 – join our Premier Online Community for only $7/ month


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. You guys. It’s so great to talk to you again. This is Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. So number 203, and I’m April beach, your host here at the show and at the recording of this,

 

we are turning over into the month of December. I’m so excited. I know you’re with me. Let’s have jazz hands here. We’re ready to put this year behind us. And in the process of doing that, it’s time to plan for 2021. So this episode is a really cool episode. It’s actually a great show. I have recorded this show and released it in December for the last three years in a row.

 

And today we’re talking all about the steps to plan this next upcoming year for profit and lifestyle freedom. And so this is a great show for those of you guys that are wondering how to plan out your business plan for the upcoming year. But also you share the same values as me, where as you want to make sure you’re setting aside time to be with your family,

 

to travel to your kid’s soccer, things that they’re going to do to go visit your family reunion at the Lake, whatever it is that you want to do, that you have a vision that you want to do, that you can do for the upcoming year. And the truth of the matter is, is if we don’t plan your business for this in advance,

 

it’s never going to happen, never, ever, ever going to happen. And regardless of any global pandemic or anything else that comes around or where we are as a world, as the new year rolls around, you have to have a plan or it’s never going to happen. So that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. And you know, people ask me all the time,

 

how I’m able to run two companies, have a busy podcast and still be able to travel with my kids. So in 2019, I was away from the house for almost six months for the whole year, traveling and living in different places. And this is how I did it. So even though this year, didn’t roll out the way all of us wanted.

 

I’m still going to teach you how to plan for it for the years to come. And in this show, this is what you can expect. At the end of this episode, you’re going to know how to lay out your whole entire year for lifestyle freedom. And I’m going to give you the steps, almost the order of operations in which I go through this every single year.

 

You’re also going to be able to assess what changes you need to make to your current offers. That’s actually going to make that happen. This shows can help you open up your eyes in a very sobering way. I’ll be honest regarding what you’re selling and whether or not what you have in your menu of offers and services and programs is honestly ever going to get you to the lifestyle that you want.

 

And we’re going to do that by making sure you have the most important math equation. I hate math too. I’ll be honest, but there are some pretty important math equations that most business coaches don’t tell you that I need to make sure that you’re aware of. Because if you don’t know these numbers, if you don’t hit these numbers, you’re never going to have lifestyle freedom.

 

And so we’re going to dive into all of those things on today’s show. Again, this is Sweetlife podcast episode number 203. So you can cruise over to Sweetlife code.com or find us on all of the podcasts listening apps in all of the show notes will be@sweetlifecode.com. Number two Oh three. And we do have a couple of bonuses for those of you guys that are really interested in making sure you’re nailing your 2021 business and profit plan.

 

The first thing is join us over in our Sweetlife community. We have just launched our premier members community. It’s $7 a month. Yes, I’m charging $7 a month for it. We really only want to make sure serious business builders are in there. And so we need to charge people something. Otherwise we just have dead weight. I don’t like dead weight in my communities.

 

So cruise over to Sweetlife community.com and in December, I am going to be teaching a class, a workshop taking you step-by-step through the process of laying everything out that I’m talking about high level on the podcast. So join me on December. The, let me look up the date for you 17th, as long as you joined Sweetlife community.com, cruise over there and pay your little puny $7,

 

I will be teaching you a live masterclass and taking your questions on top of that as you’re going through this training. And as we’re talking about what you need to do, step-by-step to lay out your year, if you’re struggling whatsoever with your offers, if you can’t hit your offer numbers that you need to hit, then go to signature offer.com. There’s nothing I can give you right now,

 

but you can join our wait list for our new signature offer masterclass. It’s opening up again in February of 2021. So those are some resources. They’re all there in our show notes. And let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training.<inaudible> The steps to plan your business year for profit and lifestyle freedom. So starting with the most important thing you have to have is a primary offer that you know,

 

will generate the revenue that you want. So how do you know that you have to take time to craft an outline, a high value, high impact program service, signature offer, or package. So if you haven’t done that yet, that’s your very, very first step. Again, if you need help with that cruise over to signature offer.com and we’ll connect in my in February.

 

But the very, very first thing is making sure that you have a primary offer that is high value, high impact that people meet, where they want so much, that they are seeking you out. It’s something that is incredibly needed in your space. And they’re going to pay you to solve this for them because they either don’t want to, or they can’t do it on their own.

 

They can’t do it without you. So you need to make sure that you have this primary offer and that it’s nailed down. Emitted is awesome. So we can’t plan your year. We can’t plan profit unless we know you have something incredible that you’re selling. And I’m talking about the primary offer that you were selling. So after you know what your primary income source will be,

 

then I want you to look at the year. I want you to look at a calendar and this is how I do this. This is how I teach it. And I’m telling you what you guys have been doing this now for about seven years, every single year, it’s exponentially better. So step number one is to look at your whole entire calendar.

 

If you’ve ever seen behind the scenes, I literally have a 12 foot calendar going across my wall. I’m a calendar dork. It’s a dry erase calendar I got from Amazon. And I can look on my wall and whatever calendar you like to use. I want you to block off all the times in this upcoming year that you plan to travel or take off work in the whole entire year.

 

So if you don’t have a specific plans yet, but you know, you want to travel, make sure you block off those times now. So for example, I have no idea where exactly I am going to travel next summer, but I can tell you what I know I’m going to be on the East coast, at least a dozen times at lacrosse tournaments over the months of June and July.

 

And I know I’m going to be on the West coast with my other son dancing in the spring. So I’m still blocking off those times in my calendar, even if they’re just general times. And I don’t know exactly when I’m going yet, but generally I know that I’m not going to be in the same work capacity. So after you’ve gone through your calendar and you’ve thought about the times that you want to travel,

 

even if you don’t have specific plans yet, even if we don’t know what the world is going to look like, I want you to block them off now or you know what you’re never ever going for sure. And step number two is to block off any professional development time after you block off your personal time. So this could be time for working on any projects that you’ve set aside,

 

like writing that book, or maybe doing a big project, like rebuilding your website that you really can’t dive into because you haven’t blocked off all the busy-ness of work in life. So I want you to go and I want you to think, when do I want to be working on these projects? When does this make sense to me to reach this specific goal?

 

And I want you to note it on your calendar and if needed, you might need to take off or reduce your client or business service time to develop your new professional skills or write that book or whatever it is. So step one is blocking off travel time, family time, when you just really don’t want to be in the office setting. Number two is setting aside your professional development time and what this does,

 

is this a side note here? It’s super cool because as you see these conferences coming up, whether they’re online or in person or a mastermind that you want to join being offered in 2021, you know that you will have already made those things important. And so now you can look for those things that actually fit into your calendar. Look for the opportunities,

 

the mentors you want to work with and the trips that you want to go on professionally or the work that you want to do. So that is why blocking off your professional time. Come second, because again, those are things that they come last, usually for us as business owners and they shouldn’t. And then after you’ve blocked off and secured your personal growth time and your lifestyle time,

 

now let’s get into how you’re going to pay for it. Right? So looking at your primary offer, I want you to ask yourself, can you still deliver this primary offer during any of your blocked off times as the answer is yes, then there’s really nothing much you need to do. But if the answer is no, then you’ve keenly become aware that you need to sell more of your offer in less time.

 

So you better be strategic to pull it off, right? So therefore I want you to block off your primary selling period and product or service delivery times for this primary product or offer. I’ll give you a personal example. I always like to try to show you guys behind the scenes. So I know that I’m traveling a lot in June or July. So when I open up my,

 

your signature offer masterclass, for example, it is never going to be in June or July because I will never ever do it. I’m not going to be here to do that, right? So I know that the times I’ve blocked off on my calendar to invite people, to join me in my signature offer masterclass, I need to make sure that I am hitting our financial end goal benchmarks during those times.

 

And you need to do the very same thing. So go on block off your primary selling periods. And when you are offering that particular primary offer in order that it’s going to work with the rest of your calendar side note to those of you guys that are in somewhat of a seasonal business, there are certain seasons that align with when people buy. So,

 

you know, if you’re a realtor, there’s a house buying. If you will kind of season, you know, you’re not going to not plan to sell during when your primary season, it would be like a bathing suit shop closing in the summer. So although we are designing your life because we’re creating a profit plan that gives you lifestyle freedom. We always have to be obviously realistic.

 

When do people want to buy what you’re offering? And so take that into consideration when you’re going through and planning this. So first we’ve laid out your personal time off second, we lay out your professional time off third. We note on your calendar, your primary selling periods. Again, in order to pull off the lifestyle side of it, we need to sell more in less time.

 

So now we need to look at those numbers. And this is when the sobering part of the podcast training comes next. You need to crunch the numbers. This is seriously not rocket science. I am terrible at math. How many of your offer do you need to sell in order to hit your financial benchmarks for that particular product in those groups of times,

 

for the year. And in order to answer that you need to know some basic things about your primary offer. First, first of all, what is it cost? And secondly, what is your capacity? Your capacity is how many people you can serve at once. So what is the cost of your offer and how many people can you actually have based on your business capacity,

 

serving during those times of the year that you need to sell your primary offer. And then once you’ve gone through it for your primary offer, then you’re going to rinse and repeat the same step for any other offers. You have secondary offers, digital products, quick grab things that might not require so much of your time. So first I want you to do it for your primary sales objective,

 

your primary signature program service, whatever it is, you do know how much it costs and ask yourself how many people can I serve at a time. And these numbers become really sobering for some businesses. You may realize that with your offer, the way that it is, you can never reach your financial benchmarks. And I’ll talk to you about what to do here in a second.

 

Give that to you then. And again, I want you to rinse and repeat this for any other offers that you have. And so you’re going to end up with some basic but powerful math and these answers to these math questions or really sobering. So you will learn that you possibly need to alter and change some of your products, business model to serve more people,

 

to reach your financial benchmarks. And this is what we call scaling. This is what my company does. This is our Ninja skill. We help companies take your assets and scale them with other online business models and offers, and is a side note. If you’re ready to scale, then you know where to come. But if you’re looking at your offers and saying,

 

wow, I have this really amazing. Let’s say, for example, you are a career coach have this really amazing career coaching, but it’s one-on-one. So we need to, to create other opportunities for you to bring in more streams of income, using your expertise, your intellectual property, your content, and your assets, so that you can still keep your one-on-one clients.

 

But then we’re adding more revenue through scaling by other offers. So this math is really going to let you, you know, Hey, does my current business model actually support the lifestyle I really, really want? And then here is the next part. This is the part that most business coaches, well not tell you. So we have this number, right?

 

We have this dollar amount that you need to hit in order to be able to take the other time off, to head to that mastermind, to pay for that mastermind for him and sakes. So the other sobering reality, every single entrepreneur should know and opens up the world of sales. Statistics is the average sales conversion rate is 3%. Now, every industry is totally different.

 

This is just generally speaking, but this is the baseline number to start with. I’ve done a ton of podcast, by the way, you guys, on how to increase your conversion rates. And as an example, most of our clients close it over 80% with their sales calls. But the reality is is if you’re selling like a digital product or a low touch sales funnel,

 

let’s just call it 3%. I would rather underestimate and have you underestimate than overestimate. So if we have our dollar amount, right, that you have to hit, right for your primary offers and your secondary offers taking the percentage that 3% are going to convert. This is your next question. You need to ask yourself how many people do you need to reach in order to convert the numbers of products you need to sell to reach your financial benchmarks at 3%.

 

So if you need to sell $300,000 to sustain the life that you want, that your company, and this is all growth, but $300,000, and let’s say your product or your service is worth 10,000, then you need to sell 30 of them, right? Basic math. But now here’s the reality check. Now ask yourself, 30 sales is 3% of what number in.

 

This is a number of people you need to reach in your marketing in order to hit that financial benchmark. And the answer to that is a thousand. So if you you’re wrapping up your really plan and you want to mindfully create your marketing strategy around the number of people you need to reach, not the number of people you want to sell. I need to know that you know that number.

 

So if you need to sell 30 of your primary offer or your combination of offers in order to hit the sales conversion yeah. And that you want, how many people do you need to reach? And as you’re going back to your map, your map, I call it map. Everything’s a map in my head. As you’re going back to your calendar could a map,

 

right? As you’re going back to your calendar, make sure that you are blocking off your marketing time out on your calendar, that you are enabling for ample warm up time with your audience, ample relationship, building time, grassroots marketing on top of the regular digital marketing strategies so that we can increase your conversion rates to exceed your baseline sales needs and expectations.

 

So this is all about planning and calendar planning, but it’s important that you know, the difference between how many you want to sell and based on basic sales conversions, how many people you need to reach, because we have to plan your marketing and your strategy, the time in your calendar to make sure that you are nailing it. Well, I hope that makes sense.

 

Again, if you want me to roll up my sleeves with you in there and talk about these numbers we can do. So, and the workshop that I am teaching in Sweetlife community.com in December, you can join me over there and I’ll give you some extra help with this and really work through, take your personal questions. I’d love to see you in there.

 

So in summary, wrapping it all up here for you to plan your year for freedom. First, you start with blocking out what you personally professionally need. That’s a very first thing to block out in your calendar. If you don’t do it, you guys it’s never, ever going to happen. Then you reverse engineer the numbers, hand in hand with your calendar to make sure that you have planned the marketing programs and the service delivery systems in conjunction with the sales to reach those numbers.

 

In most cases, you’ll realize it’s time to scale that you’re going to have to change some of your offers, maybe add some additional revenue streams of income so that you can work less utilizing the assets you already have in order to hit the numbers and reach the lifestyle for you and that you want. So whether you’re heading on a family reunion or are going with your girlfriends to hike the John Muir trail lifestyle freedoms,

 

the reason why you became an entrepreneur, right? So let’s make sure that you’re planning your year in advance and you’re crunching the numbers. You’re creating the programs and the offers that are actually going to get you there. So I hope you found this episode helpful. I hope this wasn’t the first time that you were aware of the percentage of, of sales conversions and how to plan that into your marketing time and strategy.

 

But if it is, I’m so glad that you were here, it’s a really sobering non-sexy number that really opens up how important marketing your business is. And so today we talked about knowing how to lay out your whole entire year for lifestyle freedom, making sure you’re laying out your things you need first. Otherwise it never happened. We talked about being able to assess what changes you might need to scale your current offers or change a business model in order to reach your lifestyle goals and to do so.

 

We need to reach your financial benchmarks. And we talked about knowing this basic math and making sure that you’re looking at your numbers and they’re going to tell you, do I need to change my offer? Do I need to make it more of a higher value? What do I need to do to my offer my program, my service in order to be able to charge that or do I need to scale other things that I already have?

 

So I hope you guys found this helpful. I love chatting with you. Welcome to December. I’m so glad we’re here. I hope that your holiday season is kicking off and that you’re just having a great time, that you’re super healthy, where you are and spending time with those people. You love again, cruise over to Sweetlife community.com. If you want to join me in there and connect with us further,

 

and thank you for tuning into this show, please share it with your friends. All the show notes can be found at Sweetlife co Right? I’ll talk to you soon.

Episode 202: Tactics To Becoming A Confident Introverted Entrepreneur – Stephanie Thoma

Stephanie Toma SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join our online community to start networking confidently in our monthly coffee connection. 

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for entrepreneurs in all stages of my business growth system who are introverts. You love who you are, but know that being a little “type A” could grow your business a lot.

Summary:

This episode is for entrepreneurs who are introverted but know you need to become more of an extrovert to share your business with others. It can feel like a challenge and our guest today, Stephanie Thoma, author of The Confident Introvert, is here to help.  In this short episode, you’ll learn simple strategies to become more comfortable outside of your comfort zone. Plus, we also do a little practice session in this episode to help you relax. This is a great show for those who really prefer your own company but know your business needs to be shared.

At the End of This Episode You Will:

  1. Feel most settled about being an introvert in an extroverted world
  2. Have meditation/prayer practice to calm your nerves
  3. Understand how to manage external communications while remaining the introverted person you love to be.

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And welcome back again to this sweet life entrepreneur podcast today, Or talking specifically with those of you who feel like you are an introvert and you’re an entrepreneur you want to lead in your space,

 

but there are some different social barriers that you have trouble approaching and crossing as an introvert and the work that you do in your business. You want it to feel authentic, how you show up on social media. You want it to be authentic to who you are, and you really love your comfort zone. And so today on the show, we’re talking to Stephanie Toma and Stephanie is truly an expert at helping those of you who are introverts to really step out and lead in your space.

 

She is a networking strategy coach event, host and founder of the confident introvert. She’s also an author of a new book that came out this past June called the confident introvert. She is an introvert herself and she’s facilitated over a thousand events and established a fulfilling career. Helping people generate meaningful connections at online and in-person events. And her mission is to help you feel confident and establish really amazing business relationships that catapult you forward in your career.

 

Stephanie has been featured by Forbes business, insider entrepreneur thrive global, and so many other places, including being invited to speak at Harvard, Northwestern, and Boston universities, as well as internationally to date, Stephanie has helped thousands of people just like you. You’re an entrepreneur, or you want to step into leadership. She’s helped thousands of people like you to make sure that you can celebrate your strengths as who you are and be authentic with confidence and make meaningful connections.

 

It’s not sounding so great. I’ll be honest with you. I learned so much. I’m not an introvert. I’m definitely an extrovert. And so many of the strategies we talked about on today’s show, including like a quick short guided meditation that we went through was so powerful. So this show is for you introvert entrepreneurs, but it also is for those of you guys that might actually be going so fast at a trillion gazillion miles an hour,

 

that you need some resetting techniques too. So I was so excited to invite Stephanie onto the show. At the end of this show, you are going to have solutions to how to approach anxiety and different hacks to get through times when you’re anxious, you are going to know how to approach social media as an introvert and how to show up across social media.

 

And you’re going to get tips on how to network, even though we’re talking about online networking, how to network confidently and different web apps, strategies, and different ways that you can connect with people that isn’t just doing it cold really ways to enter you into relationships with people in a way that feels confident to you. So if all that sounds great, stick around because we’re going to dive in all the show notes from today’s show can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com,

 

including all of the business programs available to you to develop your programs, your signature offers, and your 2021 business strategy cruise over to Sweetlife co.com. We’re here to help. Let’s go ahead and dive in.<inaudible> All right. Hey, you guys, April here and I am joined by Stephanie Toma. And today we are talking, especially to all of you introverts out there.

 

You are experts your leaders, your entrepreneurs, your creatives, you know, you are where exactly where you’re supposed to be, but maybe there are some struggles that you have that other entrepreneurs may not have as far as how to be confident and own who you are as a person and the business side of it. And that is why Stephanie Toma is here on the show today.

 

Stephanie, thank you so much for joining us. Tell us a little bit about you and your area of expertise when it comes to confident introvert entrepreneurship. Yes. Hey April, thank you for having me. So my company is competent introvert and there are a few different tiers there. I do individual coaching focused on leadership development and also a variety of webinars focused on networking,

 

remotely, networking in person, and also cultivating authentic competence. That’s rooted from within. I’m certainly not about faking it until you make it. It’s about actually from a root level, understanding what are the roadblocks and navigating those to have an authentic sense of confidence that is unshakable, even as an introvert, there’s such a common misconception that if you get your energy from solitude,

 

which is the definition of introversion, that, Oh, you’re meant to be a wallflower and that’s not true as introverts. We can authentically connect with more than just one person it’s quite possible, but there are just little tweaks that can help us navigate social spaces. I love what you said. If you get your energy from solitude, I never realized that was the definition.

 

I’ve actually think there’s probably a lot of people that can relate to that and be like, Oh gosh, maybe, maybe I do have some, some aspects or characteristics of introvert than I, then I didn’t even realize that, you know, people just really, really get their energy from that space. So thank you so much for being on the show and you are the author of a new book.

 

We want to make sure that you mentioned that just came out for those of you introverts. Tell us really quick about your book. Yes. Yeah. So competent introvert, a practical Guide to connecting with others at networking events and beyond it came out this past June. And it’s all about how to go from point a to point B point a being I would like to connect with people.

 

I would like to get out there and grow in my career, whatever that looks like. I like to become clear on my goals and achieve them become successful, but how do I get there? So this book really fills in those gaps and leverages the most fun way to get ahead in your career, which is through making authentic friendships, which is your network and coming from a place of,

 

okay, how can I help people? And then, Oh, I have a bunch of friends and maybe I can ask for help when I need it. And it becomes this really synergistic sort of experience, but it’s all about taking the first step and beginning to network. So basically I have hosted over 1000 networking events and before I hosted network events, I was attending them.

 

So that’s what prompted writing the book. I realized that there’s magic and there’s learning in numbers and having been to a high volume and hosted them. I was really excited to put pen to paper and just let this flow out of me last year. I love that what an amazing resource for people. And so you have attended thousands of events, you’ve hosted over a thousand events and you are stereotypically.

 

What somebody would say is, yeah, I’m an introvert. And so this like really leads us into the very first step that you’re going to share with us today. Let’s talk about just some general anxieties for introverts and some of the things that introverts experience that other entrepreneurs might not experience as far as from the social emotional standpoint at these events. Can you share a little bit about what that feels like for an introvert versus somebody who’s just super out there and in everybody’s business and face like me?

 

Yeah. And Hey, it’s great. We need both ways that everyone shows up, but I would say that one of our core needs is to feel understood and to be understood. So there are a couple of different areas of dissonance that introverts specifically can come up against in a networking capacity. One scenario is everyone thinks I’m so quiet. If I speak up,

 

then it contradicts what people expected me and what I expect of myself and not as uncomfortable. So that’s one way. And then the other way, this is what I more recently have sort of encountered, which is people assuming that I am an extrovert because I have developed social skills and I use them actively. So there can be this dissonance of, Oh,

 

I’m quiet. Everyone thinks I’m quiet. I don’t want to be different than that. Or Whoa. Everyone thinks that I get my energy from others because I can talk with people, but it’s like the secret that I’m an introvert. Interesting. I mean, I can’t exactly understand, but I can see how that, that would be stressful. And so from an anxiety standpoint,

 

how do you manage the anxiety of attending these types of events or frankly, how do you manage the anxiety of operating as a founder, as a CEO and as an introvert? What are some of those anxieties? Yes. So in a virtual world, one of the ways that we can alleviate anxiety is by taking steps to avoid burnout. I mean, I’m sure you’ve probably experienced zoom fatigue.

 

It’s just a guess. It’s super common just when you bond, like from one event, the other to the other and you realize, Oh, I should be energized. I’m just sitting in my chair for eight hours straight and not doing anything. It should be fine. However, we find ourselves depleted and the antidote to that is a concept from my book,

 

competent introvert, it’s called a solitude sandwich. Essentially, we can do this with our socialize. We can do this during the Workday. We can translate this in person or online. And basically what that means is the contents of the sandwich. The meat of it. If you’re vegetarian, let’s go with some PB and J that’s your activity. That is what you’re actively engaging in.

 

Maybe it is a phone call with someone, maybe it’s going out to dinner, whatever it is, making sure that on either end of the activity before and after you have a little bit of a buffer to let’s say, go on a walk, take a stretch break. Or one of my favorites is meditation. And that kind of leads me to the next tip,

 

which is to engage in a meditation practice. If you don’t already, do you meditate? Is that a part of yours? Yeah. So I meditate and pray, and that is, I actually start every Monday morning. That way I don’t feel like I need to as much throughout the day, but when I’m coaching sometimes a big stretch day. So like an intensive day with the client,

 

I absolutely have to back away with zero stimulation, at least halfway through it to recharge it. Yes. And you know, I’d say for introvert specifically, what can cause us a lot of anxiety and strife is overthinking and you know, I have joked with people. Well, I think other people just under think, you know, like maybe I’m thinking enough and it’s fine,

 

but you know, sometimes I’m like, wait, there can be thoughts that are ruminating and you feel like your wheels are spinning and there isn’t a lot of traction and it’s not benefiting you in any way. So what meditation does is it acts as a way to clear the mental fog. And if there’s any confusion about what are the next steps in my life that I should take,

 

or do I want to go to this event? What do I want in my life? What do I want out of this event? You know, I really view it as being such a powerful tool to be in. And So many people use this tool, but are doing so wonderfully in their careers. It’s pretty much a best kept secret and it’s not exclusive to monks or to people and,

 

you know, praying contacts it’s really accessible to all of us. And a great way to introduce yourself to meditation is with a mindfulness meditation technique. So I call it the breath of four, four, four. It’s pretty easy to remember. And if you’re feeling stressed or feeling anxious, this could be a foreign event. Or before you go to sleep,

 

when you wake up, whatever that anxiety pops up, just taking a comfortable seat, rolling your shoulders back and just breathing in through the nose for four counts. And you can do this with me. I do this, I love doing this stuff. We’ll do it here. If you got listening with us, you Guys can do it right here on the podcast with us.

 

Okay. So if you’re driving eyes open, if you’re so breathing in through the nose for one, two, okay. See, this is why I’m addicted to yoga, Lots of yoga. So these techniques, these anxiety techniques, what’s so great about this particular show. I mean, they really aren’t just for introverts. These apply to all of us with a really high level high stimulus world.

 

And so those are certainly important, but I definitely can see why they’re so much more important to an introvert leader to be able to strategically think and thrive. And there’s so many different parts of being a leader in this space that require you to be articulate and, you know, be proactive and be that leader in that, in that area. But I certainly see how that could be a struggle as well.

 

When we are talking about leadership for introverts. One of the questions that I get all the time is from clients and podcast listeners in general and just across social media, is it as an introvert. I hear a lot from people that they feel like they need to be present on social media. They need to be doing Instagram lives or Facebook lives, or they need to be out there really in a raw live capacity.

 

But that is not within who they are as a person. And it may or may not actually align with the brand they’re building for their company. How do you recommend, or what tips do you have for introverts that really feel like they may or may not. I mean, this is a whole business strategy question, but just generally for them, let’s say they really do need to be active on social media.

 

They do need to be doing live streams. They do need to be guesting on podcasting, do need to be present. How did you help introverts approach those types of things that are completely out of their comfort zone and frankly, they don’t even want to do. Yeah. Okay. You bring up such a great point because I get this all the time with my clients as well.

 

I don’t want to be visible. I don’t want to be the center of attention, or I don’t want to take up more space than other people because why should I should let other people speak? And from a certain standpoint, it’s like, okay, we can rationalize and say, you know what? I don’t need to do that. So I won’t,

 

but that’s how you stay small. And when you become about something greater than yourself, which is the reason why you have a business, because it’s not just about you, this isn’t a big ego trip. You know, if it is then maybe rethink your entrepreneurship, ideally you’re driven by a mission that extends beyond yourself and a part of getting that mission out there and helping people is being visible.

 

So even though it’s uncomfortable, I will say repetition for effect. So I’ve hosted so many events. And before that I attended so many events. And what do you think it was like when I very first started? Was it seamless? Was it perfect? Was it credible? No, it was not. But I mean, and that’s kind of an extreme example.

 

You don’t need to attend a thousand events before you’re comfortable, you know, it’ll happen sooner, but then the more you do something, there will be so much dissonance. If you dislike it and you keep doing it. So you learn, Oh, I kind of like that part of it. And then over time there are studies that suggest that the more you see someone,

 

the more likely you are to like them. So these, there are studies that suggest this, like at the word hand, for, within your home environment, you know, ideally. Yeah. So it would make sense if the more you do something and you don’t do it with the intention about why have to, even the referrals I get to, I am in such a privileged place that I get to attend this event and learn about this topic and meet others who are also interested in learning.

 

Yeah. So I’m hearing you say, it’s basically the response to a question that we ask our clients, what will happen to your people. If you do not show up for them, what’s going to happen to them? Like what is going to happen to them? If you do not, if they don’t hear about your services, if they don’t hear about your offer,

 

if they don’t experience the transformation that you deliver within your book or your program or your mastermind or whatever it is, what’s going to happen to them. So I love that. And that certainly does put it in perspective because it has nothing to do with the leader themselves. It’s all about who they’re called to serve and change. And then the other thing I heard you say was that repetition is going to make it easier.

 

Each time you do it, you got to show up. It’s not about you. It has nothing do with you actually whatsoever. And it’s really going to get easier each time you do it. So I love those encouraging words and it is, it’s so important because every single entrepreneur is different. Everybody brings something different to the table and there’s nobody like you and nobody will be out there.

 

If you aren’t out there, you won’t be out there. And that’s a big thing. So kind of trying to transition this a little bit here. So we have these online events, right? Or we have the social media we’re out there and being present. But what we also know is it, regardless of all the social media in the world, posting that you’re doing,

 

what really builds business is relationships. Relationships are what increase sales, bring other people into your business, word of mouth, nothing builds a company like relationships. And so with these introverts, what tips do you have for introverts for actually networking and building relationships online? The yes. I mean, we can talk about, we could do a whole show on in-person networking events,

 

but you know, right now, what do you recommend as far as how to go in network remotely, how to reach out and make those first connections. How to go about doing that as an introvert. So many introverts myself included, tend to really thrive when it comes to communicating. One-on-one maybe it’s not our first choice to be on a stage, but you can get there if you want to be there.

 

Right? So I would say that, especially if you are wanting to ramp up your networking and you do feel, let’s say a bit of social anxiety or just don’t get your energy from that, then one way to start is by doing one-on-one networking experiences. So there are a few apps, including lunch club, Bumble, biz, and shaper. And those apps,

 

what they’ll do is they will match you with a new professional every week. And so you could meet up to five people and one week, if you choose to, and you know, you can meet with them from anywhere from 30 minutes to an hour, and you just never know where these conversations will go, but what’s great about them is that you don’t necessarily need to go out there and find someone,

 

you know, this person wants to connect. So there’s a little bit less of that factor of I’m going up to this person. Are they interested in connecting? I mean, chances are, if they’re out of virtual event, they probably are, but it’s more foolproof this way. And then let’s say, if you are interested in connecting with someone and you’ve attended a virtual event,

 

be that person who in the chat feature drops their LinkedIn link and says, Hey, I’d love to connect and invites people. So what I have found in my experience as an introvert and event hosts is it’s so gratifying to have people come to you. You know, when you’re the host or when you are extending an invitation, then it really does open doors for you that you wouldn’t necessarily know to open yourself.

 

And also attending events that have a specified networking portion. There are a lot of really great tools right now. You know, I’ve used icebreaker a lot. There’s also teleport and other different online one-on-one connection games where they could be an entire virtual event or they can be a component. But if you are looking to connect with people and don’t necessarily want to do it completely from scratch,

 

have a warm lead, so to speak, then that’s certainly one way to go about it. That is so smart. As we were driving into this section, I was thinking that you were going to share with us just how to send a cold message to somebody on LinkedIn, asking them to have virtual coffee. And I identify that. I was like,

 

gosh, that would be a really big thing. I imagine for an introvert, these tips are so good. And the fact that we’ll make sure all of these resources are shared in the show notes for you guys who are listening. So all these things from the shaper of the lunch club, but Bumble, biz, icebreaker, teleport, and obviously every place else where you can find Stephanie,

 

we’re going to make sure they’re on the show notes for you guys. Stephanie, thank you so much for your time today. This is a great show and it isn’t a topic we’ve really hit on very much. I think we had a show about introvert entrepreneurship about three years ago. And I still remember that realizing that there are so many different aspects of leadership that truly need to be approached in a different manner for different types of leaders.

 

And, and I love that this is your area of expertise, so thank you so much. And then also for our listeners that are like, Oh my gosh, this is me. You know, she’s speaking my language. They Kevin’s talk a little bit about, you have a help sheet that we’re going to include in the show notes here about the working remotely resources sheet.

 

Is that, is that include some of the resources you’ve mentioned or what are our listeners going to get out of that bonus to this episode? Yes. Okay. I’m so glad that you’re asking about that. So that is just an easy one page cheat sheet of different tactics from my networking remotely webinar, but also we did touch on a few of them in this call as well.

 

So yeah, I would certainly say if you’re interested in just a refresher from this conversation and to perhaps learn about new concepts as well, that can help you in your online networking journey, then you’ll want to go to Stephanie toma.com/freebie and that Stephanie T H O M a.com. Perfect. Perfect. And then for Stephanie’s coaching programs, we’ll make sure a link to her coaching program is in that is in the show notes for this episode as well.

 

Stephanie, thank you so very much, any last words you’d like to leave for our introvert founders and CEOs listening to this episode? Yes. So I would like to leave everyone with just the sentiment that if you are listening to this podcast and thinking, you know, it seems a little bit of a reach. I’m not sure if I a leader, I Know that I’m an introvert,

 

but I don’t, you know, the thing’s kind of stretchy for me, just knowing that having the desire to lead and having a mission greater than yourself is the first step. And I truly believe that everyone can lead once you have that clarity of what you want to stand for and lead with that’s so, so good. Thank you so much, Stephanie.

 

We really appreciate you. Yes. Thank you for having me April<inaudible>. Thank you so much for tuning into today’s show. Again, this was Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, episode number 202, and Stephanie Toma was our expert guests today on the show to find all of the resources that we talked about, including how to find Stephanie’s networking, remotely strategy sheet, all of the apps that she mentioned on today’s show ways that you can work with Stephanie and she can help you walk into your authentic leadership and how to get your hands on Stephanie’s new book,

 

please cruise to Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number 202. I’ll see you soon. Have a great week. You guys

Episode 200: How To Write A High Converting Sales Page In 5 Steps – Amisha Shrimanker

Amisha Shrimanker SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Free Live Copywriting Masterclass with Amisha: November 19, 2020 and January 21, 2021
JOIN OUR ONLINE COMMUNITY to attend! 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs, coaches, course creators, leaders, teachers and others looking to sell your service or program online.

Summary:

You’ve worked hard to create a great offer, and it’s time to sell it, but no one is buying. Chances are your copy is bad. Writing sales copy is a craft and not everyone can do it well. But, in order to sell your program, your copy has to be as great as your service. 
 
In this episode, Amisha Shrimanker, founder of The Copy Crew, breaks down 5 steps to write a high converting sales page to increase those well-deserved sales. If you’ve struggled to sell your services online, this show/mini business training is a must-listen. 
 
As a bonus, Amisha is also teaching two live How-To Copy Writing Classes for our SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast listeners. To join the live (or replay copy) writing class, join our online community at www.sweetlifecommunity.com

Highlights:

  1. Have a 5 step plan to write great copy
  2. Know where on the page to start writing
  3. Understand how people buy
  4. Know what to say to separate and elevate your offer

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
Free Live Copywriting Masterclass with Amisha:  November 19, 2020 and January 21, 2021
JOIN OUR ONLINE COMMUNITY to attend! 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And Welcome to episode number 200. The Sweetlife entrepreneur in business podcast. My name is April beach founder of this Sweetlife company. And your host here on the show. This is episode number 200.

 

Thank you so much for being a podcast listener of this wheat life for the last almost four years. We’re coming up on our birthday here soon in January, and we just appreciate your listenership and the reviews. You leave us so much. We are here to give you trusted, proven business strategy that other coaches and programs charge thousands of dollars for. And that’s exactly what we’re doing today.

 

Yet again on the show. Again, this is episode number 200. So all of the show notes and everything, you can find that we talk about the summary of what we talk about and the gold I’m going to tell you. It’s gold that our guests gives you today can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com clicking on podcast. And this is episode number 200 today.

 

We’re talking about how to write high converting sales page. Copy copywriting is a tough thing. You guys, copywriting is in fact, one of the hardest things that could stand in the way of success and failure. You could have an amazing program. You could have an amazing service or a course, but if your copywriting doesn’t really speak to the buyer, nobody’s going to buy it.

 

And so it is a huge wall. It’s a huge barrier and a huge gateway for a lot of companies. That’s why today’s guest is so important to be on the show. Ameesha Sri Moncur is a conversion copywriter and founder of the copy crew, and she specializes in writing and sales copies for online product and online program launches. When she’s not whipping up persuasive sales copy in her to 10 X or clients launches,

 

she’s busy, plane, mom, staying fit and catching up on her reading. You can connect with alicia@thecopycrew.com and at the copy crew on Instagram as well, just under a DM. She’s always happy to answer your questions here and on today’s show. We’re talking about the reasons why people struggle with copywriting, but honestly, we really dive into Results today’s show is going to give you five different steps on how to write,

 

copy that converts for your sales page. But I’m telling you in step number one, you guys she’s diving into seven other sub steps. You need to know. So this is going to be one of these episodes. I know you guys have these episodes. I hear this all the time. These saved at Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, business training episodes, right?

 

This is going to be of those. You’re going to come back to again and again, if you’re driving your car or you’re working out or you’re cooking dinner or whatever, no worries. You can come back and listen to it again. Also, I will say that Alicia is so amazing. She is going to be teaching a master class in our community.

 

So if you aren’t yet in our online business community, cruise over to Sweetlife community.com. So if you want more help with sales and copywriting cruise over to Sweetlife community.com, you can join our private online community app. It is not a Facebook group guys. We left Facebook a long time ago. It’s actually a separate app where we connect as a community. You can network with other businesses.

 

We’d love to have you there. And Ameesha is going to be teaching, not just one, but two different masterclasses in November and in January for our exclusive community members. Just so you know. So let’s go ahead and dive into the episode. Again, we’re talking about five steps to write high converting sales copy. You’re going to get the goods here on today’s show and all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com.

 

This is episode number 200 and connect with us. Join Ameesha in the masterclasses by visiting Sweetlife community.com. Okay, let’s go.<inaudible> Super excited. You guys to be joined by a Nisha Sri mocker. When I saw her application for the show, I knew we needed her on here because she is a copywriting genius, and she helps those of you that are in the digital space.

 

Really get it. What is in your head out into your sales page, which there’s this huge hang up usually between what you want to say and actually how businesses are able to say it, how well they’re able to execute it is a big problem in a copywriter is a must, I would say, on every single strategic online business team, you need to have somebody with excellent copywriting skills.

 

And frankly, personally, I am not one of those people. So I have people that do that because I already know that that I’m one of probably the 90% of the people that are not great at this, but I think we can learn, right. And that’s why we’re kind of here on the show today and Ameesha is going to dive in. And today we’re talking about how to write a high converting sales page in five steps.

 

But before we dive into that, welcome to the suite life entrepreneur podcast, and Meesha, I’m so excited that you’re here. Tell everybody who you are and why, why you love doing what you do. Sure. Well, thank you April so much for having me. It’s great to connect with someone who loves digital marketing and entrepreneurship, as much as I do.

 

And it’s evident in the content you produce because I’ve been listening to some of your podcast episodes. So a little bit about me. I may conversion copywriter and I write launch copy for online entrepreneurs. So whether you’re Launching a digital course, a membership site or a coaching program, I’m your gal. If you things that set me apart from other copywriters, because there are a lot of launch copywriters,

 

I bring my strategy skills to the table. I know how the overall funnel works. So with me, you get copy and my launch experience to launch your thing. I don’t just write pretty words on your landing pages and sales pages. I really dig deep into research. So I find out everything about your industry, you as a person, as the creator,

 

your clients, I talk to them. I stop people in Facebook groups, find out everything before I write a single word of copy. And that’s why the copy converts. And lastly, the other thing is I have an eye for detail. So lot of copywriters, what they do is they write, copy, hand the Google doc a word, but I go deeper than that.

 

I like to see the finished result on sales page. So tiny details like, Hey, what are your bullets? Symbols look like? So if I was writing for a makeup course, creator I have in the past, there are symbols. The bullets symbols could be something like lipstick, right? It’s a tiny details, but it makes so much of a difference when you’re kind of like trying to stand out there because copy your funnel is a package as a sales and a marketing package.

 

So it’s got to stand out, not just with the words, but even with those little details. So those are three things. That’s a new part. Wow. So you are the copyrighting unicorn that everybody has been looking for. Just so you all now know you guys can, you can pause the podcast right now, go follow Ameesha at the copy on Instagram.

 

And we’ll of course, make sure that all the links to connect with her are available to you guys in the show notes. So in this process that you have to help business owners to help experts and leaders really launch and sell their programs, launch and sell their methodology. There’s zone of genius and it’s in their head. They already have a struggle. People struggle with even creating the actual program itself.

 

So there’s always kind of like this bigger picture we’re looking at, they’re creating their actual intellectual property into their program. That’s one step, but then we need to take it down a step further and actually talk about it in a way that an audience that might be a totally cold audience that has never experienced this company before understands. So how do we do that?

 

Guide us through these five steps to write a high converting sales page, especially now that we know how much more you bring into it, then just a regular straightforward copywriter. I’m super excited for you to share these with us today. Sure. So I have five steps and the first step, really the step that proceeds before and in these five steps is obviously do your research.

 

So if you’re writing for yourself, this should come a lot easier kind of because you know who your avatar is, who, you know, who’s your audience. So when you’ve got that nailed, let’s start with step one. Step one is you need to know the seven most things before you write a single word of copy. And this kind of digs into that research.

 

The first thing is you need to know what’s your one offer. Like we’re not selling a bunch of things on that one sales page. So this is kind of like, you know, straightforward. What is your one offer? Is it a course? Is it a coaching program? Is it a membership site? So get clarity there. The other thing you want to know is what is your one promise,

 

right? So like, what is a specific promise that if your avatar or your buyer does everything you tell them to do, what is the outcome that you can actually guarantee? And that’s important because you’re going to write about that on your sales page, every sales page offers a guarantee and the guarantee kind of ties into the promise, the big promise that you’re making.

 

I see a lot of my clients who come to me and they’ve got an idea for this huge, amazing offer, like, Oh, okay, we’re going to do, it’s a 30 day program. I’m going to tell them how to set up an online business. That’s great. But what is the outcome? What does that one promise that after the end of 30 days,

 

when they’re done with the program, what are they going to get? Are they going to get a website that they can show off? Is it going to be a landing page that they can show off? What is it to get clear on that third thing is, this is obvious. Who’s your one reader, one human being that you’re writing copy to like really know this person,

 

you know, what are they like? What are their 3:00 AM sweats? You know, what gets them anxious, hopes, fears, dreams, all the good stuff you want to know. What is your one big idea? Now this may be a little tricky to wrap your mind around because I had a client whom I wrote a sales page for, because he was selling his Facebook ad course.

 

And he wanted to kind of make this big promise. If you take this ad course, and it’ll help you scale your ad programs or your ad campaigns, and we’ll help you to X your ROAS and you know, all that good stuff. And I’m like, no, you’ve got to lead with one big idea. Like one promise. One thing that a person who reads it gets it.

 

And here’s the other thing it’s a pro tip. The more ans you have in your big idea, the more confusing it is for your buyer to kind of connect with you. So let me give you another example, Nike, their tagline says, just do it. They don’t say just do it and also have fun and also take care of your health.

 

Right? You’ll lose someone there who your one big idea is just this one sideline thing. One thing that someone can like instantly get it. And they’re like, yeah, I get it. Now I’m intrigued. I want to know more. So I’ll stop there. I love that. Thank you. Then comes your stage of awareness. Like how do you market to someone who’s unaware or even problem aware is very different to how you market write copy for someone who’s most aware,

 

right? If someone who is unaware, you’re not going to write a sales page, selling them something. You’re going to give them top of the funnel stuff like a blog or a podcast episode and all that good stuff. But someone who is solution aware has a problem, knows it is looking for different solutions, has tried different things. They’re an easier sell.

 

So kind of your copy, you know, follows that suit. The other thing is traffic temperature, are you running traffic or are you running your sales copy to a cold warm or hot audience? Know who you’re running into? If you’re just emailing your list about your offers, it’s an easier sell because your list, hopefully you’ve been emailing them consistently. They know you like you and trust you,

 

right? So it’s easier. But if you’re running sales page to a Facebook ad campaign and it’s all to cold leads, they don’t know who you are. So you kind of have to like build that rapport. At the beginning of the page, the seventh one is your unique value proposition. What sets you apart from others in your industry who are offering the same thing or similar thing to a similar audience,

 

you kind of want to set yourself apart. Know that what that one thing is, and kind of like go double down on that in your sales copy. So that’s step one. Okay. So just to recap, so for those of you guys who are listening this alone, we could do like two podcast episodes on this, this alone, a huge training you guys.

 

And so if you get nothing out else, not that you won’t, you’re going to get a ton of value because that’s what we do here. But if you take away, if you can remember anything out of this episode, I want you to remember step one, come back to the show notes. I will make sure these are in the actual show notes of the episode for you.

 

This is gold. You guys I’ve been a business strategist for 24 years. I’ve been coaching entrepreneurs and experts for 24 years. I’ve never once heard anybody explain it like this on a sales page. So I’m telling you like, pass’ replay this, these seven things, the seven most important things of going through and outlining your sales page. Literally take this to the bank.

 

This is step number one. These seven things are within step number one, again, sweet life co.com for the show notes for this. And we’ll make sure all the Meesha stuff is linked in there for you too. But, but just pause for a minute and saying the seven most important things are your offer. Your promise, knowing who your reader is,

 

you know, being able to articulate clearly and simply your big idea, the stage of awareness, where people really, when they come to your page, what sort of solutions are they looking for? Whether or not they even know they’re even looking for a solution, your traffic I’m going to these new people are these people that know you, at least in some capacity who is actually landing on this page.

 

And then of course your unique value proposition, which is always a fun part of figuring out, you know, how your business fits within the landscape of the rest of your market and your niche. So I just wanted to just pause for a second and say, that is incredible and incredibly powerful. So although it’s only step one, I don’t want people to,

 

I don’t want people to overlook that. Yeah. Okay. Now let’s continue on is step number two, to writing a high converting sales page. So Step two is where you use the golden ratio of sales page copywriting. And I use this because it’s slashes writing time. It reduces blank page syndrome, and you can just overcome perfectionism, even as copywriters,

 

we get this, you know, we do wake up with this like, Oh crap, I have this Google doc in front of me. It’s blank. I don’t even know where to start. So here’s a trick. So what this means is, you know, you should start writing your sales page from the introducing section. You know, that part where you’re like introducing,

 

and then you announce your offer and the name. And then you kind of like dig into like, you know, number of modules or these are the benefits. And these are the features I would say, start your sales page, right from that point, which is, you know, midway down the page and this section and everything else that follows below is mostly logic based.

 

And in fact, I don’t know what studies this is, but it was discovered that a lot of people who are familiar with a particular product or the creator will jump straight into this introducing section to find out, you know, what’s included in the course of the program. So it’s kind of like its own mini sales page, for sure. Yeah. I’m that person I’m like,

 

just tell me what’s in here, girl. I just want to say, I could care less about anything else. Just give me the meat and potatoes. Okay. All right. Yeah. So it’s super fascinating. And then chance to actually start with that, first of all, understanding what you’re selling, having an incredible signature program service or offer and being able to articulate it.

 

But how else do you recommend people kind of execute this stuff? Number two. So from the perspective of someone who’s creating the course, you know, your course very well, right. You know, the outline, you know, what is step one, step two. So you kind of like go into that. You write that because this is more logical base.

 

It’s, it’s funny, it’s easier to write something that comes logically natural to us, sort of like, you know, Hey, this is what my course is and we know what our product is, so we can go on and on talking about it all day, it’s easier to do that than to switch tracks and kind of like, you know, talk about your reader and their problems and the agitation and all that stuff,

 

which really happens at the top of the page. So when you’re at this part of the sales page, you talk about the benefits and the features you talk about the most frequently asked questions like, Hey, is this course for me? And you kind of know that if it’s you or not, you anticipate that you can write that out easier than, you know,

 

anything else, which you’re talking from the perspective of emotions. Does that make sense? Totally. A hundred percent. So how do you define what the golden ratio is? That’s a very good question. So the golden ratio, I like to look at a sales page is the 80, 20, 20% Israeli, everything from the introducing section, everything down below.

 

So that includes introducing, calling out your offer, talking about what it contains, the FAQ, who is right for this program or offer that you’re creating and who isn’t the guarantee. Is there a guarantee and the closing section, these are more logical base elements of your sales page, easier to write. So this is the 20%, the 80 Israeli, where you’re starting at the hero of the very top,

 

which is your headline. You’re talking about the problems. You know, your avatar has the things that they’ve tried. You’re kind of crushing their objections. So it’s more emotional blocks, you know, crushing objections, getting into the mind space of the avatar. So that’s where 80% of your efforts should be dedicated. And that takes a little bit of time.

 

And, you know, also comes with a little bit of practice too, the more, you know, your industry and your avatar. It gets easier with time, but this is more like an exploration into what really goes on into your avatar site and you know, what’s going on in their head and those emotions. So that’s the 80% Fascinating. And I love this approach because I think it’s so much easier than you were saying,

 

just looking at a blank page and just saying, okay, I have to come up with this copy here, but really starting with the deliverables within the program and the facts and the things that are not so much emotionally based, it’s just black and white. Like I said, like, here’s the meat and potatoes. This is the deliverables. This is what it is.

 

This is what it, who it’s for. So what a great way to overcome that initial, not even writer’s block, but just such overwhelm that I know a lot of incidents owners face and really figuring out how to start creating this content. So that is step number two. So what is step number three, Step number three is where you go back and write everything else.

 

And you’re writing your page. You don’t edit yourself here after your 20% is done. You’re going back and you’re going to write your headline, your hero section, your body copy. You’re going to follow a framework. There’s a sales copywriting framework. And there are a lot of frameworks, but the one I particularly like, and I talk a little bit more about it in my program,

 

it’s called PAs problem agitation solution. And you know, you write everything that you know about your avatar. This is where your research comes in handy. But what I find often is like a lot of people want to edit everything they write like, Hmm. You know, they’ll write something and they’ll want to edit it because, Hey, this doesn’t sound grammatically,

 

right. Or how can I make this more sexier or, you know, more live with personality that doesn’t really work like that. Just write, don’t worry about editing because the editing will come, right? What you want to say first, then clean it up on how you want to say it. And the how is really your personality. And it’s really kind of like cleaning up the grammar and all that stuff.

 

So that’s, those are later steps. So write, write, write, and then come back and clean it up. I even think about it. Just dump it all on the paper, put what you want down there. Don’t judge yourself. Don’t try to make it sound better than it is. I, it was really funny. I was, I came across an article or some,

 

it was a graphic on LinkedIn about how a new entrepreneurs try to use really big words and their sales copy and really confusing. And like you were saying sexy wording and how it was actually a really funny graphic, but it actually showed that like the percentage of their success actually giving people Results is like 90% less than just the person that’s just putting out the basic sales of age there.

 

I was like the educational level people that try to use big, crazy words that, you know, to prove they’re, they’re further along than they are. So you guys don’t need to do that. You know, we’re going to talk about how to get your personality in here in just a minute and the other steps, but just write the dang copy,

 

write what you know about your program, right. Well, you know, by your people and just write it all out. So love step number three. There’s no judgment. There’s no grade on how well you did this paper. If you will, it’s just writing it all out. Okay. And then step number four is really then getting back in there and talking about editing that sales page,

 

you’re talking to boost conversions. What does that really look like for our writers? So next comes the editing process, like you said, I use Grammarly to edit my work. I also have an awesome copy editor who understands my client’s voice. So when we get to work with clients, I have this other Ninja trick, which when I tell clients it blows their mind like,

 

Hey, you know what? I can write exactly in your voice because I have it down to a science. I have tools to kind of like really understand what you sound like, and you know, how you write. And if you use long sentences, short sentences, are you writing a grade three level four level? You don’t have to be that Ninja,

 

but you can analyze your own writing voice when you’re using these tools. So I give that kind of brief overview to my editor. Like, Hey, we’ve got a client. She writes great. Three-level she writes long sentences. That doesn’t mean that you don’t edit it because you want to make it punchier. So she writes at this level, she kind of has this optimistic overview of,

 

in everything that she does. So like, if you sound, if you’re like Marie Forleo, you know, who’s like her tagline is everything is figureoutable. For example, she’s optimistic, she’s cheery. She’s happy. I do work with some clients who talk like that and have that personality when they write their emails or their newsletters. So we kind of take that and I give that briefing to my editor saying like,

 

Hey, this is how she writes. So you want to kind of like have that zing factor onto the sales page. So use Grammarly. It’s a great app to edit all your work for paid version. If you can get a copy editor. Excellent. There are lots of amazing copy editors out there who will edit your copy, cut out the jargon.

 

You don’t want to write jargon into your sales copy unless it’s some of the words that your avatar, your audience already understands, but you don’t wanna be too heavy with that. You know, obviously grammatical errors you want to correct that you don’t want any of that stuff. I’m known personally to write a lot of personality based copy in the work that I do to help my clients,

 

you know, kind of reflect their quirks, bring it out into the copy. So my copy is alive with that. It’s not as dry, but I kind of like, you know, try to get that from the client’s like, Hey, how much humor is, okay. Can we use gifts in your copy? Do you swear in your copy?

 

All that stuff. And last but not the least, you want to also do what? My copy mentor Joanna Wiebe from copy hackers does she uses what I, what is called the seven sweeps of clarity. And I’m just going to quickly go through what these are. Number one is clarity above and beyond. You want to make sure your messages are clear,

 

so they’re not confusing and long winded. Number two, you want to check for voice and tone. Does your copy have appropriate tone? Is it angry? Is it happy? Is it helpful? And this goes in with your messaging and your personality. The third thing is you want to ask yourself every time you read a line of copy. So what our reader never re has to read a line and wonders.

 

So what, so what if she’s telling me to do this? Or so what if she tells me this is how I feel? So for every, so what do you want to kind of like have that so that you can, because I’m kind of like have that explainer copy. The fourth sweep is approve it. And you know where every point is supported in some sort of proof.

 

If you’re making a claim that using this Facebook ad Ninja strategy, you’re going to get to X row. As you want to back it up at some proofs, very important, because you will lose someone’s trust. If you can’t back that up on your sales page. The other thing is how specific is your copy? Anything that’s vague messaging. If you’re reading your copy needs to be replaced with something specific like numbers,

 

think in terms of quantities, sizes, emotions, can you paint a picture, make it interesting, make it more specific, right? Like the whole thing, just, you know, show don’t just help. And then one look at your copy and check. If it has feelings, if it has emotions, do you think reading something will kind of compel the reader emotionally.

 

We want to do that because copy, it feels like it’s an art, but there’s also logic. And there’s also emotion. Do you want the reader to feel a certain way to take that action? And then the last thing you want to do is have the zero risk would that means us. Have I given my reader everything they can today to take me up on my offer and that there there’s no risk involved,

 

meaning you have to have a guarantee. So you want to look at these seven things. And I know this seems like impactful. So I’ll just recap Grammarly or an editing app. Copy editor. If you get one and the seven sweeps also call the Greek sweep or the seven sweeps check for clarity, your voice answered the so what with every line of copy,

 

you read, prove it, whatever you’re writing on the page, you need to prove it. And back it up specific, be specific. Don’t be vague. You want to make sure your copy has emotion and last but not least, can you back up with a strong guarantee? So there’s no risk for a reader and they trust you. I know that was a lot.

 

That’s. I mean, again, there’s just so much, there’s so much gold in this episode, you guys, this is going to be one of these podcasts that people come back and, you know, we have a handful of those they come back to and they listen to it again and again and again, because they’re really going through the process of training and learning how to do this.

 

There’s so much information. So I just appreciate you being so generous. You know, a lot of podcasts you go on, people are like, well, I’m going to tell you three things. And then, you know, again, we’ll leave you hanging in and unless you work with me, I mean, you’re really just pouring so much into our listeners and we just,

 

we love that. And that’s what we do here on the show. And I just appreciate you so much for this. It’s definitely not too much. W we’re all sponges here. So bring it on. We listened a bunch of times and that kind of ties into your final stab. That’s really well said. And the final step is bringing in your personality into your writing.

 

And that is kind of that fifth step of creating high converting copy on sales page. That’s really going to increase sales and increase profit. And what’s so cool. And listening to this is a lot of times, you know, we work with companies that sell and they sell really well, but they don’t take the opportunity to really make sure that who they’re selling to is actually the people that they really want to be working with.

 

So they might find out that they’re even incredibly lucrative or they have hundreds of people in their course or their membership, but it really, really isn’t that person that the founder, the leader, the teacher really wants to be connecting with. And so I love also the, what you’re saying is that it isn’t necessarily just going to increase the ROI of the sales page,

 

but it’s really going to, you know, what we always want to do is disqualify at the same time as pre-qualifying people into, into our program. And, and I, and I love everything you said, because I can see how that is just naturally part of the process interwoven into how you copy. So you recommend people write copy on their sales page.

 

So I, I appreciate that is from a business strategist standpoint, you know, making sure that our listeners are not only selling, but they’re selling to the people that they really want to be selling to. So is there anything else that, you know, our listeners really need to know as far as generally speaking, the psychology of writing? Great copy.

 

I think it’s really scary because a lot of people aren’t great writers and then they really aren’t great sales copywriters. So w what else can you share with our listeners? Just an encouragement to kind of wrap this up, put a bow on it here at the end. It’s just encouraging them in the direction. Maybe it’s not, maybe it’s not encouraging them.

 

We shouldn’t always do everything ourselves as leaders. You know, there are some things that I hire out because I know I suck at it. And as a leader, we might just need to identify, Hey, you know what? This is not your area of expertise. Hire it out, have somebody else do it for you. You know, what can you leave our listeners with and,

 

and really deciding how to move forward from here? Sure. So I would ask you this copywriters come in all kinds of budgets and all kinds of price tags. Of course, if this is your first launch, if you’ve never launched before, and you’re on an unlimited budget, you could learn how to write your own copy. It is not next to impossible.

 

In fact, I do have a little program that teaches people how to write, copy your own copy. It’s really takes you step-by-step right from the headline all the way down to the closing argument. And we talk about everything and how you can use the personality section of how you can pump up the copy with your personality, your quirks, because people want to not just know and trust you.

 

They need to like you, the copy has to be engaging like you rightfully said, and you can do that. You don’t have to sound dry and corporate-y and sleazy. So yeah, I would recommend that you could do this on your own. It’s not next impossible. The other thing is, if this is not your first launch and it’s a live launch,

 

or it’s an evergreen webinar launch, for example, there are a lot of moving parts in the funnels. There are 10 to 20 emails, there’s a landing page, there’s a webinar registration. There’s so much of stuff and I can keep going on and on if that is a whelming. And if you have a team to support you with the tech and the marketing,

 

right. And if you can afford a copywriter to come on board and kind of like, you know, take over and say, Hey, you know what? I can write all this for you, hats off to you do that, because that will a good copywriter. Won’t just write the copy, but they will even interview your customers to find out what they feel about you and what they have to say.

 

And, you know, sometimes I’ve given that to my clients and, you know, the recorded conversations and survey data, and they’re like, wow, I just got an idea for a new product. I never even thought of until, unless you would have interviewed my clients. And that’s like, it’s a huge deal. Like ask yourself. When was the last time you did a market research survey or even talked to 10 of your clients or buyers,

 

if you haven’t done that, a good copywriter will do that packaged as a deliverable and give it to you like, Hey, this is what your clients want from you. And this is what they’re saying, and this is what they desperately need. They just don’t know it yet. And in this box of product ideas, here you go. And you know what?

 

You just 10 extra return on invest. Right? So true, love that. And how can people find you? So I know that you have something you’re going to give our listeners here. That’s really going to springboard them to get started in the right direction. But also I want to make sure that we’re going to put in our show notes to a link to this,

 

write your own copy program as well. So wherever our listeners are, they can connect with you. We’ll put it on the show notes too, but where people find you and what is this tool that you are giving to our listeners as a bonus for this episode? Sure. So I have a website, the copy crew.com. You can find me there.

 

I’m also on Instagram with that same handle, the free gift that I have for your listeners today, it’s called the ROI sales page outline. It gives you a sales page outline. What do you need to do first and what you need to do last 15 to 16 sections of a sales page that you’ve got to have if you’re writing for a digital course and the paid offer that I have,

 

it’s a $37 course. It’s how to write your own sales page. It’s kind of serious sales page. You only charge seven 30, $7 to that. Oh, you guys, everybody should go grab that right now. Okay. Okay. Yeah. It’s pretty cool. That’s amazing. Okay. We’ll make sure there’s a link to that in the show notes for this as well.

 

So finding you@thecopycrew.com, we’ll make sure a link to this ROI sales page worksheets are all there for you, as well as a link to this, write your own copy. $37 course. You guys, even if it’s not for you, maybe somebody on your team that would be an investment that I would certainly recommend as a CEO. Ameesha thank you so much for all of your time today.

 

I have loved having you on the show. I have so many notes here. If you guys are watching this video on YouTube, behind the scenes, you see all my chicken scratch notes here on this piece of paper. I’m real old school like that. We really appreciate your time and your expertise. You know, really not holding anything back in orange is incredible wisdom and training and high level business and copywriting strategy and to our listeners.

 

So we just appreciate you so much being on the show. Thank you. Thank you. This was a pleasure. Thank you so much for having me. You are welcome. Sure. We’ll be connecting again soon.<inaudible> Thank you so much for tuning into this show. What an awesome episode again, if you would like to join a Meesha in our private suite life,

 

business owners, community, then cruise over to sweet life, community.com and join us. She’s going to be teaching a masterclass to you, diving in deeper and taking your questions about the steps we talked about on the show. And she’s going to be coming back in January and working through actually your copy tearing down your copy and providing some extra level, higher level services to those businesses within our community.

 

So cruise over to Sweetlife community.com to join us there. And again, for all the show notes and everything, we talked about cruise over to sweet life, co.com. Thanks for tuning in you guys. We’ll see you soon.

Episode 199: How To Love Your Business Financials To Create The Life You Want – Megan Dahle and April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

Megan Dahle’s FREE 36-Page E-Book: Getting Your Money Right

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established entrepreneurs (in all Phases of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who want to stop being scared of the money and start taking control.

Summary:

You either love or hate to talk about money in your business. In fact, most entrepreneurs run and hide when it comes to financial ledgers. But on today’s show, we’re gonna make you love the money and control it. Getting your money right in your business is the best feeling ever, and the first step to getting a company that’s going to scale, grow, and give you what you really want in business and life.
This week we’re diving in with guest expert, accountant and CFO Consultant, Megan Dahle, and talking about where you are now, understanding where you want to be, and making sure you’re on the right path to get there. We do this by teaching you the simple three numbers you need to know that will give you the power, confidence, and control you seek.

Highlights:

  1. Understand why you need to name your money
  2. Get clarity on the dangers of reinvesting every dime into your business
  3. Know the most important number that you really need to pay attention to
  4. Get a simple routine to look at your numbers without being scared

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back. This is sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast, episode number 199. And yes, spoiler alert next week is our 200th podcast episode. And there’s some really cool stuff.

So make sure you’re subscribed. So you don’t miss out on that today. We are talking about how to love your business financials. So, first of all, if you clicked on this episode, then you’re pretty brave because the reality is that you either love to talk about money or you hate to talk about money in your business. And in fact, most entrepreneurs run and hide when we’re talking about financial ledgers,

but on today’s show, we’re going to dive in to make you love your money and take control of it. Getting your money right in your business is seriously. One of the best feelings ever really start to pay yourself. You’re paying valuable team members. Nothing feels better than that, but then we need to take it a step further. Is your business actually going to give you the life that you want.

First, we have the business foundations and financials that need in place, but today we’re talking about your life. How do we have the company generate enough money? And what do we need to do to get your life, to look the way that you want it to? And today’s guest expert, Megan Dali is here to talk about all of that. So the reality is let’s face it.

You either don’t understand the money in your business, or you have zero control of your cashflow, or you’ve done a really great job getting your financial systems in place. And now you’re ready for the next level either way. This is a great episode for you to tune into entrepreneurs. Don’t inherently come wired as accountants, as a matter of fact, most entrepreneurs are creatives.

And so when it comes to these types of systems, you might run the other direction. So that’s why today’s a really important show. And these are the things we’re covering on today’s episode. At the end of this episode, you’re going to know why you need to name your money and what exactly that means. You are going to get clarity on why it might be dangerous to always reinvest your profit back into your business.

So raise your hand. If every time you make goes back into your company, raise your hand. If every time you make those back into your company, but you also pay yourself a little bit. We’re going to talk about why both of those are not good, even though everybody does it and how to start changing that pattern. So you can reach your long-term business goals and we’re diving into important things like the number one number that you should pay attention to.

And why Megan says you don’t have to know all the numbers. We’re not getting into financial accounting lingo here. You’re just going to walk away understanding the most important number that you should know and a simple routine to look at your numbers on a regular basis, to make sure that you are on the right track. And let me introduce you to Megan here,

she’s our guest expert today, and she’s a doll you’re going to love her 15 years in a Megan Dolly’s corporate accounting career. A business owner reached out to her Megan privately because she was worried that one of the partners was taking more of their fair share. After looking at the books, Megan discovered that the partner had in fact taken $400,000 out of the account without the other partner,

knowing it was this sensitive project that was a launching pad for Megan. She is now a consulting CFO who creates light bulb moments inside her client’s businesses. And she makes the numbers easy for you to understand more importantly, easy for you to use so that you can learn how to grow your business stronger and make sure you’re generating cash and that it’s producing long-term wealth benefits for you.

So let’s go ahead and tune into today’s episode. Again, all of the show notes and the resources make it has here for us can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. This is podcast number 199. And if you haven’t yet, please take a second to leave us a review on Apple podcasts and share this episode with your friends, other business owners who really need to take control of their financial numbers as well.

Okay, let’s go.<inaudible> All right. You guys are welcome to the show. I am here with Megan Dolly, and today we’re talking about money. We always talk about goals and so many other podcasts talk about goal setting, but what are really comes down to is actually looking at the numbers, then the path that you’re on to make it happen.

And so that’s why I’m so excited to have Megan on the show today, because this is her area of expertise. And before she introduces herself, I wanted to read something to you that she sent to me, which is why I knew she absolutely had to be here on the show, talking to you guys today. She said light bulb moments are my favorite thing.

When my clients finally see what the numbers mean, it’s like watching. One of those videos were colored by blind people, put on those special glasses and can see color for the first time. It’s magical. Those magical moments have appeared in many parts of my life. And that’s how I know I’m on the path God has designed for me. Things that start by devastate is devastating.

Disaster is turned into something beautiful. And these transformations, these transformations that make me believe that all things are possible. And so Megan is absolutely an expert. She has crazy credentials, which I’ve already read for you, but what’s so important when we bring experts on the show is understanding the why behind what you do, not only what your Ninja zone of geniuses,

but the why behind. And so I wanted to share that with you guys before we, we dove into talking to Megan today. So Megan, take a minute and introduce yourself to our audience and tell people a little bit about you and how you got to be what you’re doing Today. Sure. Well, thanks so much April for letting me come on your show.

It’s amazing. I love how many shows you’ve done your consistency. The content is like, Oh my gosh, this is stuff I actually use. Like I’ve actually implemented stuff from your podcast. And so it was no brainer that I wanted to be on this show. So I’m a small town girl. I’m from Midwest, South Dakota. I like gardening. I have my kids.

I work with the marching band at the high school. I like to volunteer there. Yeah. And the numbers are my game. Numbers are my jam. I’ve just always seen them differently. Math always came easily. And my math teachers are like, your brain just works different. I love that. Yeah. You have to have a special gift to see numbers differently.

I do not have that gift nor to any of my children. So there you either have it or you don’t. I think. And, and so we’re grateful for people like you. So how do you work with clients? Primarily you have this amazing framework that you’ve created to help entrepreneurs and business owners make sure that they’re on the right path and that they’re going to achieve their goals.

I mean, this is a tangible framework and we’re going to dive into it today, which I’m so excited to on this show. Yeah. So the whole thing is that people are scared of their numbers or they don’t know what it means. They’re timid around them conversations with their bookkeeper and their accountant. Don’t go so well because they’re using that chart in the depreciation,

but you’ve been a, the, you know, those revenues Rose, it’s almost like they don’t want you to be asking questions, right? I’m going to use some jargon. So you just stop asking me questions. What I want to get to is what’s useful for you. I mean, you don’t need to know the ins and outs of your financial statements.

What’s actually useful. That’s going to help you make good decisions that you can have confidence in and know why you made those decisions and see the progress down the road. So it’s breaking it down into what would be a need. Right? Right. And your framework that you share, and you have a book about this, we’re going to, we’re going to let everybody know how to find you is number one,

where are you in identifying that number two is where do you want to go? Where do you want to be? And that’s the one we’re really diving in here today, which I’m super excited about. And then the third one is, Hey, you know, are you really on the right path to get there? So guide us into that second part of how,

how do you protect your goals? How do you identify, you know, really what is it going to take for me to get that beach house or send my kids to college or, you know, sell my company or whatever that is. How do you work with clients to understand that? Yeah. So it’s like the second half of goal making that is completely missing.

People don’t want to talk about the math part of the goals because it’s scary math or they forget about it or, or they’re more about it’ll come set the goal, set your vision board and it’ll come. I’m more about, well, let’s go get it. Let’s not wait for anything. Let’s not sit around and wait for it, but let’s actually quantify it and then go get it.

So it’s like, yes, I want that beach house or yes, I want to sell my business for X amount so I can retire with that cash. That’s great. Now let’s put a number on it. Let’s put a date on it. And where are we at compared to that? So we can go and get that progress. What happens when you don’t do this is that you make progress towards your goals,

but you might not recognize it. And so you take that progress and you reinvest it in your business, or you use that progress towards, Oh, some other expenses that might come up or the next shiny object. And then it’s like, your three-year goal is still your three-year goals, six years down the road. Wow. That is so true. That is exactly what business owners do.

So we think that that progress that we made financially, you know, instead of putting it to maybe what you’re saying is this in goal, they just automatically invested back in the company, which could be great. Or maybe it’s not what they should be doing with that. Yeah. That’s really fascinating. Oh yeah. Thank you. Yeah. So curiosity,

I love it. When business owners get curious and they start experimenting with things, but it’s also important to like have a, if you want to be curious and experiment, that’s great. Let’s have money that’s designated specifically for that, but let’s not be taking all of our progress and throwing it at this next shiny object. Yeah. Okay. So being proportionate about what you invest,

where each time you get each time you make progress, whatever that is. So if you have 20, $30,000, instead of reinvesting all that say, okay, we’re going to put 10 to this and then, you know, 20 or 30 to that. Interesting. Okay. So super interesting. So step number one is really quantifying how much it’s going to cost for you to get to that goal and really drilling down on those requirements.

And I think that alone, like we could just end the show here. How many of you guys listening to the show have actually sat down? And I know you all have thought about what you want because you’re entrepreneurs and we’re creative. And that’s what we do. How many of you have actually sat down and crunched the numbers to figure out what it’s actually going to cost for you to get there?

Connect with us, like send us a DM on Instagram Sweetlife podcast and let us know if you’ve actually crunched the numbers. And we’ll do like a little poll on our Instagram story on this with the week. This show airs, because I guarantee you, I mean, tell me Megan, how many people actually that come to your, like, this is going to cost me a million dollars.

I’ve had one client in my five years. I’ve had one, one that’s like had everything set up and she’s like, I know exactly how much I want for my daughter’s wedding. I know how much I want for my retirement. I will know how much I want for Beneta da. Great, awesome. That was so cool to come across. It’s like,

all right, let’s work on the next step. You’ve got this covered, right? That’s right. Yeah. Okay. So yeah, it’s a 90% of people will not have that 99.9% of people will not have that. Okay. So after somebody identifies really how much, what that’s going to cost the next step you say is really assessing their progress towards that.

Is there a certain frequency in which a business owner should stop and take a look that you recommend financially about how they’re doing? Is that quarterly? Is it monthly? Is it yearly? Is there a routine that you recommend entrepreneurs are in assessing, not their monthly? I mean, this is not a show about monthly operational costs. This is a show about where I am,

as opposed to where I want to be in my future. Right. So if it’s set up correctly, you’ll just be able to look and see, okay. Part of it is just taking that money out and hiding it from yourself in a special place. That’s either getting interest or invest in somehow to protect that progress and maybe do some work for you on the side while you’re not watching.

So I’ve lost my train of thought a second. When you triggered something, when you said it’s it’s mom mode, it’s our mom brain. No, what I was saying was I feel like as business owners, if somebody is like 30th of every single month, you should do this every single quarter. Should you do this? So I think that entrepreneurs,

you know, we’re super creative people, but when somebody gives us a system, we love systems. We geek out on systems too. So do you have a consistent system where you say to your clients, Hey, we’re going to have a, check-in call every quarter and make sure that your money’s moving, where it needs to be, and you’re still on track or we need to assess what’s happened so far or just regular,

like a routine that you recommend businesses really pay attention and reassess. Yeah. I actually have only a few numbers that I want my people to pay really close attention to. Because if I tell them to, you know, start pull your financial statements every month, it’s one of those things that, eh, I got it, they pull up, open an income statement,

they look at the bottom line. They’re like, yep, that’s about right. And they move on, right? It has no meaning to them. So I actually pick a few numbers, like one that you might need to watch weekly and other that you’ll want to look at monthly and another, that you’ll want to look at quarterly just to make sure that things are going along the way that they need to be.

And we’ll do that deep dive, more quarterly. But one of the most important, one of the most telling numbers is your 60 day cash in 60 days, how much cash am I going to have in the bank to run my business? And then we make sure that what we’re taking out and protecting isn’t going back in and what we’re taking out and protecting isn’t hurting the business.

Cause that’s, you know, you don’t want to be taking out too much cash. And when you can see what your cash balance is going to be in 60 days or other types of business, if you’re like retail and you have busy seasons, we actually take that out much farther. They want to know where the cash is going to be. Cause that’s the blood.

We don’t want to be donating blood if we can’t afford it. Right. Right. Right. So smart. And so the next thing you say is to name the cash before it comes in, let’s talk a little bit about that. What do you mean by that? So once we have that cash projection created, we know what we think our cash is going to be coming in for the next couple months.

And now that we think we know what that cash is, we’re going to have a purpose for it because if we don’t have a purpose for it, what’s really easy to do is to spend it. If we don’t know at that way, coming in as man, those coaching programs, the advertising, the marketing, all it’s, it’s sexy and it’s fun and it’s,

it’s new and it’s novel. So we actually name it like, okay, we know that next week we should have about 2000 coming in. And two weeks after that we have 4,000 coming in and then we know where it’s going out in terms of expenses. We know where it’s going out in terms of the progress towards our goals. And we know what’s being set aside for a little sandbox fund cash and owe taxes.

Don’t forget about taxes. I do taxes and taxes yet. So you actually say Before it comes in, so you know where it’s going versus where somebody like myself, I have a tendency to not just name the money to actually spend the money before it comes in. So in my mind, I’ve already and I don’t actually spend the money, but I think maybe I do that.

So in my mind, it’s already saying this money is coming here for this. This money is going to this and it’s not like robbing Peter from pain, Paul, but I definitely know where my money is going well before it gets here. And so I feel like I’m doing good, according to what you say in that area. Although I’m sure that the categories in which I named my money could use some work.

And like you were saying, so you’re saying taxes, of course, business operations. And you’re saying that we really need to pay attention to the 60 day cashflow. And that is the key numbers are our listeners should be paying attention to, is that correct? Yes, that’s right. And on that cashflow, you’ll see the different categories. You’ll see,

like the marketing that one can get out of hand really quick. You’ll see the tax and all of those buckets, because truth is to get a little bit accounting, jargon ish on you, not everything that is cash out actually appears on your income statement. So your income statement might show that you’re showing have a profit, but cash is like, did you know that you paid yourself?

And did you know that you had these debt service payments? And there it goes, what you thought was your free cash flow. Right. Okay. And I’m sure this happens all the time. It’s just why people need somebody like you to make sure that you’re helping them protect their assets. So the third step you say is protecting this actual progress. So as businesses,

they have their structure in place or they’re getting their structure in place. What does it take to actually do that and put that structure in place so that the money is accumulated in the appropriate buckets so that they can reach their goals. How do you put this structure in place for your clients? So I have a really easy Excel tool in all my clients have to do is put in their bank balance.

At the top of that tool, like open up the bank balance today, it says $7,500. And it will tell them exactly what to do with that $7,500. If something’s going to stay in the business, if something is going to be moved to pay themselves and put it in their pocket, or if something is for their goals specifically for that, and going to move directly to,

I work with a lot of like personal finance people, like go put that in that account over there and your personal finance, personal take care of it. If they don’t have a personal finance person, I’m like, go put this in your savings account, your money market, account, your investment account, and just let it be happy over there. All by itself will take care of itself,

right? Who are The primary clients that you work with? I work with creative females primarily, and between being told that you’re creative and between being told that you were a woman you’re generally taught from a very young age, that numbers aren’t for you. And so when it comes to those conversations and showing people visually how this works so they can get that shift of,

Oh, this isn’t hard. I totally get this. I’m smart enough. I’m good enough. And now I feel like I am a true business person. I feel like I’m in control of my business. It’s really cool. Yeah. Super. It feels super powerful. It’s such a rush when yeah. I think as, as women, as men,

they just are expected to, but as women, when we finally take control of the numbers, it’s such a, such a feeling of, I don’t like to use the word empowered because it’s so overused, but this is a perfect instance in which she used that. And so I love, absolutely love what you do. So now I’m going to put you on the spot and I didn’t prepare you to ask these questions,

but I really want to know what are your favorite books for women founders when it comes to being smart about money? Do you have, besides your own? So let’s talk about your book, you know, getting your money. Right. I know that I hear a lot of people whose agenda and Cheryl’s book, you’re a, bad-ass at making money, which is more mindset around money.

It’s not money strategy. I personally actually loved that book. Are there any other books or resources that you recommend that our listeners who might not have a healthy relationship with money in the first place can use to kind of dive into reset their perspective? Yeah. So profit first was transformative for me. Mike McCullough is a great guy. And when it comes to bank balance accounting,

he’s the King and that’s what we’re doing and using what he has built and expanding on it. He’s really good. He’s really funny. If you listen to his books, listen to it on two X and he’s hysterical the other, I’m actually going to stand up and get the author’s name cause I can hear it. Oh, I love it. Thank you.

And then we’ll make sure you guys that we are sharing, we’re sharing these resources in the show notes too. Along with Megan spoke to one of the things that I know that businesses struggle with is just understanding the fundamentals of money. And it’s really interesting. I have a lot of clients that are CPAs and that are accountants and you know, that are finance coaches.

And it’s interesting to see as we’re helping our finance coaching clients build their business, how they approach scaling their business online and developing their coaching service versus our other businesses because they already know. So a part of the strategy is also part of the structure and the foundation of the money. It is that profit first approach. And it’s a beautiful thing as a business development coach,

you know, to go through and watch. And they’re saying, okay, well, this is the way this is going to be. And they’re very, they’re very strategic about that as far as being entrepreneurs themselves. So I, I love to ask these kind of behind the scene questions like about your own business and how do you do this and what are some of the resources that you love for your own business?

Just because I think that teaches a lot as well. So what was this other book? Cunningham has a couple of really great books. His blueprint to a successful business is like, this is why you need to understand the numbers in your business and how they make you incredibly profitable when you understand them. And he’s also not about all of the nitty gritty bits and pieces of the numbers.

It’s just the overall picture of how it flows together and how it works. Yes. Awesome. Cool. Thank you so much for sharing those. Okay. So in closing today, we have talked about how to not only protect your goals, but how to actually make your goals come to fruition because you are quantifying them to figure out the importance of how much your goals and what that looks like is going to cost you.

We talked about the importance of actually assessing your progress on a regular basis and naming the cash before it comes in and making sure that you are hiding and you’re protecting your money and you are not giving 100% of your profit back into your business that you’re pulling out these small chunks of this. And that’s a really big deal, I think for a lot of our listeners as well,

because especially in the first five years of business, like every dime they make, they put back in, and that does, you’re saying that’s a risk factor of, you’re just putting off that amount of time to even start working on their personal goals. Is that correct? That’s right. Yep. They need to start getting rewarded for the work that they do,

change your relationship with your business. Yeah. And then in your book, this ebook, you have getting your money, right. What does that look like? What are some of the things that our readers can expect to really learn from you in that book? So there are three types of numbers that you need to know in your business. There is the number that tells you,

where am I at? Like, where am I even at relative? How did I get here? What direction am I facing? When, where am I? And the second one is, well, hang on a second. Where do I want to be? And that’s the quantifying, this is what I want my from my business. This is how I want it to serve me.

And then the numbers that tell you, are you on the right path? Are you doing the right activities or does something need to shift? Do we need to take a detour in what those different numbers look like and how you can find them? Great. And so you’re going to, you’re going to dive in and guide our listeners through that process. Megan,

thank you so much for being on the show today. I appreciate your expertise and your wisdom and your sense of humor and just really making this so much more fun than I think that entrepreneurs experience a lot of times when we talk about money and being so real about the fact that you don’t have to know all the nitty gritty terminology, but these are the basic three numbers you need to know.

And our listeners can find out more about that by downloading your free book, which we will make sure there is a link to that in the show notes of this episode and where else can our listeners find you Come on over to Meghan dolly.com or connect with me on Facebook. I love conversations to begin to sit back and have 15 minutes of coffee together, sometime if you want,

Love that. Okay, perfect. We’ll make sure that those links are in the show notes. Thank you so much for being a guest. Oh, thank you so much, April. This was fun. Yes. Appreciate you.<inaudible> Thanks so much for tuning into this show. Here is a reminder that you can get all of the notes that we talked about today,

including all of the bonuses and strategies by visiting Sweetlife co.com episode one 99. And if you are in a place where you’re ready to develop your signature offer or your program now is a time to get in through pre-registration by joining our wait list for our, your signature offer and program masterclass coming in 2021, I would love to work with you and extract your expertise to create your intellectual property,

to make you be this beautiful leader and your space to learn more about our, your signature offer masterclass, simply visit signature offer.com. I’ll talk to you next week. We have episode number 200 coming right at you and almost four years of Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Rolling out so excited and you appreciate so much have a great week.

Episode 197: Will Your Service, Course, or Program Sell? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab the cheatsheets and a 6-minute video to get started building your Signature Offer.

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to launch an online course, program or service
C) Want to make sure what you build is a needed commodity 

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Course, Service or Process. In this episode we’re talking about how to know if your new service, program or course will sell? 
 
 Is it really needed and will people actually buy it? 
 
So if you’ve been working on building your first online course, corporate program, service or offer, today’s show will help you determine the need and make smart decisions to scale your business faster. 

Highlights:

  1. Know how to assess market demand
  2. Get clarity on how to make your offer stand out
  3. Determine if you should move forward or scratch the plan

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheetMust-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process.
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey there. And welcome back to I’m April beach. Thank you for tuning in with me this week. This is the fourth episode in the series that we’ve been doing called how to create your signature offer program,
service or process. And so for the last three episodes we’ve been talking about what is a signature offer or a signature program, a signature course, how to differentiate yours, how to create it using the assets you already have and how to make sure that your business can really stand out as the undisputed leader in your space by creating a signature service in today’s episode is the wrap up of those four.
This is episode number 197. So when you’re referencing looking for the show notes and things I’m going to talk about here today, you can always cruise over to Sweetlife co.com, click on the podcast and simply find episode number one 97. Today, we’re talking about how to know if your service program or course will sell. And we’re going to dive into some questions and some strategies that you can go through.
I’m going to guide you through that so that you can get clarity to know whether or not what you’re creating is actually worth it. And for you who are listening. And you’re like, yes, I want to lead in my space. I’m ready to scale my offline business online. I’m ready to launch my program or course, make sure you go grab the cheat sheets that I have for you.
And a six minute video on how to get started building your signature program over@signatureoffer.com. You can also join the wait list for my next master class called how to create your signature program and offer on that page as well. So I wanted to make sure that you knew that those tools were available to you, and you can go grab those right away. So who is this particular episode for this episode is for experts,
entrepreneurs, and small businesses who a, you either want to know more about creating a signature program or offer B, you want to launch an online course or an online coaching service or an online program, or C you just want to make sure that what you’re about to build, isn’t going to be bunk. Isn’t going to be a total waste of your time.
And you might be asking yourself, is this really needed? Are people actually going to buy this? So if you’ve been working on building, maybe your first online course developing a corporate program or a service or an offer today’s show is going to help you determine the need and make sure that you’re making smart decisions to scale your business faster. And of course,
time is money. And so today’s show is going to save you both of those. And at the end of this episode, you’re going to know how to assess your market for demand. You’re going to get clarity on how to make your offer stand out. And you’re going to determine if you should move forward or fully scratched the plan and save yourself time and not do that.
So I’m excited to dive into this conversation with you. Let’s do it.<inaudible> Okay, guys, we’re continuing our conversation in this four part series on how to create your signature program offer process course or service. And for the last month we’ve been talking about what is a signature program. You know, we hear all the time businesses saying, Oh, this is going to be my signature offer.
And we’ve covered in these episodes. Really? What is a signature offer? And just a little short recap. I do want you to need into those episodes. If you’re landing here the first time, those are episodes number one 94, one 95 and one 96, but just a short little recap, not every offer is a signature offer, just because you say it’s a signature offer,
there are specific things which is taking your thoughts, your intellectual property, and turning that into your methodology that becomes a foundation for your signature offer. So if you haven’t listened to those episodes, definitely go back. Cause it’s going to be a really powerful springboard for what we’re talking about today, which of course is how to determine if the signature program or offer you are about to create,
will actually sell. So this show, again, wraps up this whole entire series. And I wanted to make sure that you knew that all of it is available there for you. It’s a perfect way to wrap up this series because obviously we want to work smarter and not harder. We also want to make sure that you’re leading your space. So let me go ahead and start out with a story so that you know,
that if you’ve created something that hasn’t sold before you are not alone, I had this genius idea. I’m sure it was a genius idea. It was 2009. And I decided that we needed to have a website, which was a resource where all these parent coaches could come together. And I spent thousands of dollars building this website and recruiting different businesses to be found on this website,
paid my designer and it totally flopped on its face because I just wanted to create it because I felt like the industry needed it. There was no plan behind it. It was just April being creative and also April losing like $10,000 and a whole bunch of time. So the problem that we have as thought leaders and as creators is that the joy is in the building.
Most entrepreneurs have a bunch of ideas and oftentimes we’re so damn excited about what we’re about to do. We don’t even take time to research whether or not it will actually take off. Now, once you get a little bit more wrinkles and a lot gray hair in years, go by, you know, maturity combines with creativity. You get smarter and exponentially more profitable,
but you know, if you’d rather not wait for the gray hair and saggy boobs, that is why we are talking about this on today’s show. You are welcome in today’s episode, I’m going to give you questions to research, to know whether or not your product will sell. It’s like Pat Flynn calls it in his book, will it fly? And these questions,
there are six of them. So if you’re driving your car, you might want to get a little scratch piece of paper out. Or of course you can always replay this on all of your podcasts, listening devices and visit our show notes for this episode. But these questions are going to give you super insight into whether or not what you’re creating is really worth your time.
So let’s go ahead and dive in. So I’m going to go through these six questions and jam a little bit on each one to give you a little bit more background and insight about them. And then we’re going to talk about how to combine these six questions with what we have discussed and the business trainings that I’ve delivered on the last couple of podcasts to truly give you the gold and the answer that you need for moving the creation or the launch of your program or service forward.
Okay. So let’s dive right in question number one, what is your ideal client’s biggest problem as it relates to your specialty? And let me jam on this question a little bit, and then I’ll repeat it for you. Especially if you’re taking notes, we oftentimes talk about the solution. We create your product, your offer. That is the focus of our discussion and today’s podcast episode is the solution.
What you need to ask yourself is what is the problem I am solving and is the solution that I’m creating, solving a specific problem for my ideal client, certainly as it relates to your specialty. So you need to be able to answer the question very clearly. What is my ideal client’s biggest problem. As of course, it relates to your area of expertise.
So question number one is really hammering that out. And again, the clarity this is going to give you is, is what I am about to propose as my signature program solving this biggest problem. You might be able to stop right there and just say, Hey, you know what? I don’t think it’s hitting their biggest problem. And this is enough.
There you go. Edit it and fix it. So that’s question number one, question number two. What solutions are currently in the market? Now? This is a competitive analysis question, but I, when you’re talking about competitors, most businesses automatically think, Oh, I have to find everybody in my space that is just like me, every other program or a or service or in my geographic area.
One of the things I want you to think about is there are times when other business models provide the same solution that you do. So for example, if somebody’s biggest problem is they don’t know how to create a backyard garden. They can either, or a company to help them come in and do it that, or they can read a magazine. If you’re the company that’s great in a signature program about how to create the most amazing backyard vegetable gardens.
You need to know that one of your competitors or another place that they might be looking could be a local magazine. So just realize that when we’re talking about competitive analysis, it isn’t always what looks exactly like or close to what you’re about to create. It’s other places your clients are going for the same answers to their problem. So question number two is what solutions are currently in the market.
Question number three, what is actually selling now? Obviously you’re not going to be able to get into the back of the numbers of local competitors or similar businesses, but do your best at trying to determine, is this something that people are actually buying right now side note, just because somebody has thousands of Instagram followers doesn’t mean they make a lot of money.
I think that hopefully this, this year, everybody has realized that the number of Instagram followers you have has no correlation at all to how profitable your company is. Just a little side note. So what is currently selling right now? And don’t go to Instagram to see how many great looking posts they have that just figure it out. You can ask people in your market,
you can ask potential clients. Maybe I have purchased a service that could be a competitor of yours. Why they chose to do that question number four, what is missing? You see what is the need that has not been met? I still don’t know. I remember my favorite class in high school and no, I did not go to school very often in high school.
I was pretty much dishing school, but I never missed missing Holloway’s entrepreneurship class. I was there every day, single week, this guy was amazing. And he always said whole bunch of things like small businesses. Beautiful. But yeah, he always was saying, find that need, look for what people are craving. And sometimes it’s hard, but not for you creatives.
You can see right through that. If you really look hard, you can see what’s missing and it might not be the solution. That’s right. Seeing that maybe what’s missing is how it’s being delivered. Maybe what you’re proposing to launch as a signature service or program is very similar to what somebody else already has. But what might be missing is a way in which it’s administered or delivered the business model.
Okay. Question number five is, will your offer fill an unmet or under met need? This is a basic thing. You know, business one Oh one guys, we have to make sure that there’s a market for it. And people are going to buy it. That means you either need to be solving a problem or fulfilling a desire that people are willing to pay you for.
Okay. I can move on after that one. Number six, why are you uniquely qualified to create and to deliver this offer, you need to be able to answer that and you should be able to answer it for yourself. The answer to this question is also the solution to what a lot of, especially female entrepreneurs struggle with with imposter syndrome, like feeling like you aren’t enough or feeling like you’re never good enough.
And I just know, cause I’m a woman. I know a lot of women struggle with that. And I have certainly struggled with that as well. This answer to this question, why are you uniquely qualified to create, deliver this offer is like the hammer that shatters that totally not true last wall, right? You need to be able to look at yourself and say,
what have I been through? What is my story? What is, what have I walked through? What education have I received? What you know, on the job training and certification hours and hours performing this type of act, whatever it is, service consulting, what is that? And you need to hold that true. And you need to hold that close,
especially as you are creating a signature program, because nobody sees things like you do. Nobody provides solutions the way you do, especially when you have a history with that. So ask yourself and please make sure that you give yourself grace in this because you might fumble through it a little bit and you might not actually know the answer to this question and that’s okay,
but for sure, ask yourself, why are you uniquely qualified to create and deliver this offer? And when you answer these questions, it’s going to give you clarity on whether or not you should move forward and build and create your signature program or service. So let me summarize these questions. One more time. Number one, what is your ideal client’s biggest problem as it relates to your specialty?
Number two, what solutions are currently in the market? Number three, what is selling number four? What is missing? Number five, will your offer fill an unmet or under met need? And number six, why are you uniquely qualified to create and deliver this offer? Now know the answers to these questions alone are not enough to give you a total full insight into whether or not you should move forward in building this offer.
But these questions combined with what we did on last week show, which is sweet life entrepreneur podcast. Number one 96 are literally worth their weight in gold and will give you complete clarity on whether or not you should move forward or run the other direction. And don’t keep going. So today’s questions combined with one 96 are going to give you that foundation and that confidence to know whether or not you should move forward and building and creating,
launching, developing your signature program or offer. So let’s do a big rate cap over the last four weeks. We’ve been talking about creating your signature offer program course or service. And most companies start with the actual business model. Like literally I hear people say, I want to launch an online course, or I want to launch a membership site, or I want to develop a corporate benefits program,
or I want to create a certification program that is the business model of your signature method. You first need to start with outlining your intellectual property in creating a predictable transformational result that becomes the content and it becomes your methodology that gives people Results literally, I talked to businesses all the time. Then I just got off the phone with another really fabulous woman out of New York.
And I spoke to her last week and she’s like, gosh, I have been creating this course forever. And she’s so qualified to do it, but there was something in the way of actually just building the course. And it’s because she hadn’t gone through the process of actually extracting her ideas out of her brain and dropping them into organized buckets. If you will,
into a timeline or an outline that really can then become the business model, which is the course. And so I just want to share theirs first, going through this process, as we’re wrapping up this four part series, first, you create your intellectual property, your content, and then choose the business model. So you first want to start with that part and then choose a business model and how it will be delivered.
Again, a live course, a recorded course, a one on one coaching service, a group coaching service. You could be planning a retreat, a series of classes, corporate programs, sky’s the limit when it comes to the business model. And as a side note, if you have not yet, if you’re wondering about what business model, make sure that you download the ultimate guide to online business models that can be found right there on our website@sweetlifeco.com,
it’s a 14 page guide and it tells you every single online business model. So that’ll give you a lot of really good information there. And to summarize the last four podcasts, one 94, one 95, one 96 and one 97 are really powerful to get you started in the right direction, building your signature program or offer. So I know we discussed a lot of things.
I absolutely love you too need into this show. And I appreciate you guys so much. We’re almost at episode 200 and coming up on four years of the Sweetlife entrepreneurial business podcast and totally could not have done it without you liking this show and subscribing to this show and sharing the show with your fans. Our mission really is to deliver you proven, trusted business consulting and strategy that other business coaches charge thousands for.
This is our outreach and it’s our impact. And it’s the way we pour into the entrepreneur and the small business community first. And so I really appreciate you listening to the show and sharing it with your friends. And if you’re ready to totally knock it out of the park and become the undisputed leader in your space, you want help taking your thoughts, turning them into reality,
taking your intellectual property, outlining your methodology and turning it into your signature program or offer. Make sure you cruise over to signature offer.com and you can get information. You can add your name to the interest list to join my next masterclass. And of course, that’s also where I have the cheat sheet for you and the short little six minute video to get you started in the meantime that signature offer.com.
All right, you guys, thanks for tuning into the show. Next week, we have an awesome guest take Carney’s on the show and she’s helping you transition the mindset behind being the founder and doing it all. Just starting to delegate the processes so your businesses can scale. All right. Talk to you guys soon. Thanks so much. Bye bye. For now.

Episode 196: How To Use What You Already Have To Develop A Signature Program – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab the cheatsheets and a 6-minute video to get started building your Signature Offer.

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to understand the fundamentals of what a Signature Offer or Program really is and isn’t
C) Want to know how to get started in creating your company’s Signature Offer or Program and you’re wondering what to do first. 

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Course, Service or Process. In this episode we discuss the problem most entrepreneurs have as you struggle to organize your ideas thoughts and expertise into an outline for your offer program for service. So if you’ve been working on building your first online course developing your first membership community are creating your first steps of service and struggling with taking what’s in your mind and getting it out on paper and then building it into your business model this show is for you. 

Highlights:

UNDERSTAND HOW TO:
  1. Organize your ideas.
  2. Outline your first offer.
  3. Guarantee your clients results.

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheetMust-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process.
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Welcome to another episode on entrepreneur business podcast and April beach. Thanks so much for tuning in with me again this week, especially in this topic, I love talking about signature offers and programs, and some of the messages you guys have been sending me are so cool seeing what you’re building,
getting your questions. I love it. So, so thanks for your feedback and insert connecting with me even beyond this podcast today, we’re talking about how to organize your assets into a signature offer program or worse. This is the third episode in our series on how to create your signature service offer program or, or methodology we’ve been talking about what a signature offer actually is and what isn’t a signature offer.
We’ve talked about the two different kinds of signature offers that was in episode number 194. If you miss those, go back last week in episode number 195, we talked about the four prerequisites are the four things that you have to do before creating or even thinking about creating your signature offer. So make sure that you don’t miss those because they’re definitely a foundation for what we’re talking about here today.
And on this week’s show, we’re diving in more in discussing how to use your current assets to develop your signature offer or program. And again, this show is part of this series we’re doing on how to create your signature offer program service or process. And on today’s episode, we’re going to talk about the problem that most entrepreneurs have as you’re struggling to develop.
Your outline is you’re struggling to organize your ideas and your expertise into an outline that becomes your program or offer or service. So if you’ve been working on building your first online course and developing your first online membership community, or, you know, creating your first signature service, this is discussing the first steps. If you’ve been struggling with that outlining process. So today on the show,
we’re talking about how to take what’s in your mind and getting it out on the paper, but then getting it from that step and building it into the business model that you actually want. Last week, I received a phone call from a woman who has been working to outline her signature offer for her course, for a year and a half. This woman is absolutely an expert at what she does.
She’s super excited to launch her first online course, but like most creatives, she’s a business woman, but she’s still creating. She’s having difficulty staring at this black and white outline on a piece of paper and trying to figure out what am I really missing? And turning that outline into the magic that she knew it could be, and then taking it fully and actually building the course.
And so she was missing so many aspects of what she really wanted to include in her course. And the reason was because the process in which she was taught to outline her course was not ideal for the way her mind works. And so she was just like, is this okay? I want to do this a different way. Help me, does this make sense?
And this happens all the time. The hardest work you’re ever going to do as a business owner is strategic thinking. And the process of pulling your ideas, experiences, and expertise into creating this signature outline for your new online course or your new service, or you knew your new offer. It’s totally exhausting. And it can be incredibly difficult if you don’t have a system that works with the way your brain works.
Okay. Especially if you are a creative person and you need to see things. And so I have a system and I teach entrepreneurs and experts to extract their expertise and ideas and put it into an outline that becomes your signature transformation, whether that’s a course or a membership community, or a service or a corporate program. And today on the show, I’m going to teach you the very first step in the process to start being able to outline your offer.
And I wanted to share this with you in the phone call I got last week was just even more of an emphasis that I needed to talk about it on the show. So today we’re talking about how to organize your mind. All right? So once we take all of your expertise and we organize in your mind, that’s how we can pull it into your signature offer or program.
And at the end of this episode, you will understand how to organize your ideas, pull from your assets you already have. And so let’s chat about that for just a hot minute here. We don’t want you recreating the wheel from scratch. Creating your signature program, entails pulling from your assets and your expertise. You are ready. Have we want to take what you’ve already done in scale your business?
That’s what we talk about. We talk about scaling businesses. So we’re going to talk about organizing your ideas, outlining your signature offer, guaranteeing your client’s Results with your offer, but you’re going to understand the importance of pulling from your established assets. And like I said, that is how we scale your business. So whether you are a new company that’s going to offline to online,
or if you’re an established entrepreneur, that’s really wanting to launch your signature offer. We want to pull from everything you’ve done already. And that’s what we’re going to talk about on today’s show. So all of the show notes for this episode can be found by sweet life co.com. And you can click over on podcast. And of course, this episode of like our other episodes here in our series,
we’re talking about on how to create your signature offer program service or process comes with some serious, awesome bonuses for you guys. You can get them totally free. We have a cheat sheet to help, you know, the components of a true signature offer and a six minute video to get you kickstarted on building your signature offer. And if you are ready to take the lead,
you can add your name to the wait list to join my next signature offer development masterclass. That’s coming up. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode, but don’t forget to grab all those bonuses by visiting signature offer.com.<inaudible> Okay. Let’s go ahead and get started to help you outline your first signature offer and turn your thoughts and expertise into business reality.
In this process, I’m going to guide you through a process that I call your asset inventory. And here is the gold in this. This is why this is incredibly important. And I mentioned it in the intro. We have to take what you already have. We’re going to scale your business by creating your signature offer and to do so. We want to pull from your assets.
We don’t want to recreate the wheel a hundred percent. This is a process in which we inventory all of your expertise, the things you know right now, the things that you can turn into your signature offer and program right now, this is the golden it, okay, because here’s the deal. We literally don’t want to start you from scratch. If we’re starting from scratch,
it’s not a signature offer. It’s a first offer and we need to get you more experienced in that signature offers are for those of you guys that are ready. You’ve gotten people experience in different areas before you really, really ready to dive in. If you’re a new business and you’re launching a foundational signature offer, then this is a great way to figure out maybe what new first offer you would like to launch.
And I love helping experts launch their signature programs and scale their business with what you already have. So I totally geek out on this topic, and this is how we start. If you have a piece of paper and a pen, I highly recommend you take notes while I’m going through this episode. And you can even splash down out of your brain as I’m guiding you through the steps.
So here are the six steps to inventory your assets. And after you do that, then you are going to be teed up to outline your signature offer. That’s going to make you the undisputed leader in your space. So step number one is asking yourself the question, what can I deliver right now? So what are services that you already can deliver? You already are delivering.
What can you deliver to your people right now? Literally make a list on a piece of paper. What can you help people with right now, right now, right this second, it can be from cooking to walking the dogs, to developing a high level brand, to brewing beer. Literally, you’re going to splash down from your brain. Everything, not necessarily just as it applies to your business,
because sometimes seeing what you can do right now in all aspects of your expertise, create some of the most amazing signature offers with your spin on them that nobody else has. So step number one is asking yourself the question, what can I deliver right now? What can I do right this second today and teach somebody else how to do step number two, then you look at that list and you say,
what am I an expert at? What am I really, really, really good at from your first list? So first is what can you do right now? Step number two is what are you an expert at? And step number three is what do you feel most comfortable offering right now? So what do you literally feel the most comfortable with? If somebody,
if I came up to you tomorrow and I was like, Hey, Cindy, I really need help in this area. I heard you do these kinds of a variety of things. What would I say that would totally freak you out? And you don’t know if you could actually help me. We’re going to cross those off the list, but what could you tell me that you could help me with and be super comfortable helping me get results in that area?
Do you maybe need to work a little bit more on your process of giving me Results sure. Of course. That’s the process of developing your signature offer, but what are you feeling the most comfortable about offering right now in your business? I don’t care what anybody says. Your level of comfort totally matters. You want to feel confident and you want to feel comfortable moving forward.
Are you always gonna fill out a hundred percent confident? No. Sometimes you just have to take a big leap, but if there’s like a feeling inside you and you’re like, yeah, I just don’t feel right about this. Or I just don’t feel like this is the right direction. Listen to your voice inside. That’s telling you that. All right.
So what do you feel most comfortable offering right now based on the things that you can deliver right now and the things that you’re an expert at and step number four. What do you love so much that you would do it for free? Don’t freak out on me. I’m not telling you, you should offer your signature services for free. Most of you guys probably actually aren’t cause you’re my listeners and you love your business.
You love what you do. Half of you guys actually probably love that question, but what do you love so much that you would do it for free? What lights you up? I’ll tell you when I get off a call with a new client, who’s just shared their business ideas and goals and the things they’re struggling with. And I’ve been able to give them steps to move forward.
I am the happiest I ever am in my business. Nothing fires me up then talking to people. One-on-one I love it. I live for that. What in your business do you know, after you’re done doing it, you’re going to have a huge smile on your face because you’re just going to be like, this was so awesome. I love helping people that way.
And so we’re going down this list of asking again, first, what can you deliver right now? Number two, what are you an expert at? Number three? What are you comfortable with? Number four. What do you love so much out of all those that you would do it for free. And now here’s when the real hard work comes in because that’s all mind work and decision making here is when you need your piece of paper and your pen,
and you also need to give yourself a couple hours to do this. This is not fast work for some of you. It could take you a solid week of work to actually complete this process. And by the way, side note, this is a great thing to hire a VA to do for you. Step number five, what current offers, assets and deliverables do you have right now?
Basically, what are all the things that you have are already created? We’re going to take an asset inventory of everything that you’ve already created. What do I mean by that? I mean, everything, videos, not just paid videos, your Facebook live videos, your Instagram live videos, videos on your phone that you recorded, that you never put anywhere,
your articles, your current services, audio files that maybe you’ve put out into social media, PDF downloads, podcasts books that you have written or contributed to journals that you’ve kept over the years of ideas and things that you want to create and little outlines. And don’t tell me you don’t have a notepad or a trillion of them in your house with all your ideas.
Cause I know you do cause we all do right. Some of those ideas, you’ve never done anything with you wrote them in a notepad and they’re still sitting there aren’t they? So it’s time to inventory those assets. That’s your mind, that’s your goal? That’s your intellectual property. And those notebooks could be Evernote files. It could be little audio notes.
I literally leave a million audio recordings to myself on my iPhone. And I very, very rarely am great at going back and listening to them again. So it could be audio notes on your phone. Also, it could be many courses that you’ve created products that you’ve created and it could be infographics, different social media, graphics, branding, graphics, ideas of different branding that you might want to do.
The list is endless. Step number five is literally going through the process and inventory. Everything that you’ve created, even if it is incomplete. And this is the gold, you are going to mine for gold within your own content because it is there. And this is a very first step in the process of really outlining a signature program and offer and scaling your business to the next level is inventory and what you’ve already done and taking a look at it and assessing it.
And then the question is, okay, April, what do I do with all of that? Step number six is grouping together your common assets. So this is literally taking your inventory sheet and you can do it old school. You can pick up one of your kids colored pencils, or you can really organize it out and build an air table spreadsheet and drop each one of the assets under a common,
similar topic, core area or the solution that it provides. Step number six is gathering together your common assets and organizing them into a common area, similar topic, or a solution that it provides. So I literally want you to go through the process of dumping your brain and then rebuilding it into common buckets. And once you complete this process, you’re going to have a clear brain dump in front of you.
And you’re going to know exactly what you bring to the table with a clear direction on what you can deliver right now. You’re going to be surprised at how much you’ve created. I know so many of you out there have created and created and you felt the need and the desire and the pull to create something or to write something or to make a video on something or just to outline something.
But there really wasn’t a place for it yet. And I believe that that’s all part of a bigger plan and a picture. I believe it’s God or whatever you believe that is, that is kind of saving and planting those seeds to come back for a time like now, where it’s time to scale your business and really created into your signature methodology or program or offer or course or whatever it is you’re building.
Because those little hidden treasures that you’ve created over the years are what makes your program yours unique? Nobody can steal it from you because nobody else has that idea in those thought processes that they’re putting into their program, it’s uniquely yours. So once you create this process, you’re going to have a clear brain dump in front of you. You’re going to have organized columns or sheets of what you can deliver right now,
your signature offer. And this is a very first process that I teach entrepreneurs and experts and that most people miss, and by taking an inventory of what you already have, we guide you through the process of then getting more clarity on the transformation outline that your signature offer will have. So we talk about transformation, our outlines in my masterclass. This means your outline and how you take your clients from point a to point Z,
whatever your definition of how many steps in between those things are. The other thing that is so amazing is when you pull from your assets, you are going to be able to get a clear understanding of your niche and who you really want to serve because your assets and your ideas and the things that even haven’t been brought to the table yet, or maybe you’re going to tap into a list of other markets that you know,
that you’ve always wanted to get into. You’re going to assess that list, going through this process and get more clarity and that moving forward. Remember though, don’t start this process until you’ve already completed the prerequisites that we mentioned in last week’s episode, number one 95. So this is hard work. This is not sexy. Quick button push work, you guys.
And that’s why few people do it. And that’s why few people have industry leading signature offers because the work in order to do it and mining for your own gold and developing your own intellectual property is hard work. But I promise you it’s the best, most rewarding, and frankly, most important work that you’ll do in your business, but make sure you’ve checked out episode number one 94 on the two different types of signature offers and that you have connected and gone through the prerequisites of a signature offer that we talked about in episode number one 95.
Okay. Let’s do a little recap here today. We talked about how to do an asset inventory in order to move forward and outline your signature offer course or program step number one was asking yourself what you can deliver right now. Step number two, what are you an expert at? Number three? What do you feel most comfortable offering right now? Number four.
What do you love so much that you would do it for free step number five is getting to work in inventory and all of your assets, finding everything that you’ve created, the list of things that you want to create, things your clients have told you, they want from you. PDF downloads, podcasts, recordings, books, journals, Evernote, files,
everything that you have done. Your current services, take an inventory of those. And step number six is grouping those back together into common areas. And I promise you when you see your assets, if you’ve ever had any question about how awesome you are, you will stop asking yourself that question. Some of the things that I get to look at with businesses when I see their asset,
that I had no idea these entrepreneurs had just sitting in their back pocket and they had never shared it with anybody before. It’s insane. You’re literally sitting on a gold mine. So let’s go ahead and turn it into gold. Don’t forget to add your name to the waitlist for my next signature offer and program creation masterclass by visiting signature offer.com. If you’re ready for that level of business development.
And of course you can grab the free cheat sheet and the little six minute quick start video I have for you also@signatureoffer.com. All right, you guys, I love chatting with you about this. Thank you so much for being a listener here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And if you haven’t yet, please leave us a review. It really helps other businesses to find this show where it’s our goal to give you proven business strategies and trainings and different solutions you can literally take to the bank of your business at other business coaching firms charge thousands of dollars for we pour it into you here totally free on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast.
Check out all of our show notes and our other business services by visiting Sweetlife<inaudible> dot com. Thanks so much. Bye. Bye

Episode 195: 4 Initial Steps To Creating An Awesome Offer, Program or Course – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab the cheatsheets and a 6-minute video to get started building your Signature Offer.

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to understand the fundamentals of what a Signature Offer or Program really is and isn’t
C) Want to know how to get started in creating your company’s Signature Offer or Program and you’re wondering what to do first. 

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Service or Process. In this episode talking about what you need to do to be ready to create your first signature offer for. Prerequisites are important to hit so you know that what you’re creating is going to deliver the results you want need and expect. So, if you’ve been wondering how to create a signature offer or program this episode is for you. 
 
Businesses are always launching new offers and services. It’s part of staying relevant and giving your customers what they really need. But when it comes to creating a signature offer a signature program or your own new signature methodology, there are a few important things you must do first. 

Highlights:

  1. The four pre-work steps you need to complete before creating your signature offer
  2. Save time and not costly mistakes 
  3. Complete clarity so that you can create your signature offer or program faster.

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheet: Must-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process.
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. You guys Welcome back to another episode here at the sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast. Last week on the show, we kicked off our series on how to create your signature offer program or your methodology.
We have talked about the two types of signature offers that you can consider launching or creating in your business. And we’ve talked about what a signature offer actually is and what isn’t a true signature offer. So if you missed that episode, go back and listen to episode 194, because this is a continuation on this series. As we dive more today, we’re talking about four things you need to do before creating your signature offer.
We’re talking about the prerequisites here on today’s show and why this is going to save you so much time and so much money. So again, like I said, this is part of a series we’re doing how to create your signature offer program service or process. So if you’ve been wondering about how to do this in your business and how to really take the lead,
then these episodes are for you and a spoiler alert. There’s another episode in this series coming next week for you. So a lot of gold here in these podcast shows, you know, the issue is, is it experts in entrepreneurs and small businesses everywhere are always striving to be known. And there’s one way to lead your niche and to profit the way you want to.
And that’s by developing a unique signature offer or program, even your methodology, your core principles, it could be a course or a membership community. It could be your content, the you license out to other businesses. We’re talking about a lot of those examples and really get your juices flowing here in these episodes. And the issue is, is that in order to do that,
you have to understand what to do, what creates profitable results for your company, and actually how to go about creating a true signature offer or program that’s going to help you take the lead. How does that sound? So that’s what we’re talking about more on today’s show. So the end of this episode, you are going to know the four pre steps that you need to complete before creating your signature offer.
So the four prerequisites let, just like you’re joining a college course. You have to meet these prerequisites. And by knowing these, by doing these, you’re going to save a ton of money and a ton of time. So we don’t want you to make mistakes. This episode is going to help you avoid a lot of the errors that some businesses that just go off and start creating what they think is their signature program.
And we’re going to avoid the challenges that those companies face and pouring into you today with, with knowledge. And at the end of this episode, you’re going to have complete clarity so that you can create your signature offer or program faster. So if you’ve been a listener to this show for the last almost four years, thank you so much. If you’re new here,
I’m April beach. I help offline companies scale online and entrepreneurs and experts develop industry leading signature offers. And this is a business coaching podcast. We give you trusted, proven business strategies that most business coaches charge thousands of dollars for. So sit back, take notes and start implementing. And I promise you, you will be glad that you did. And the initial,
like many of our episodes comes with some serious bonuses. Today. We are giving you a cheat sheet that includes the components of what every leading signature offer has. And you also are going to receive a short little six minute video to kickstart your signature offer creation process. We love short, fast things because none of us have any extra time. And you can also add your name to the wait list to join my next signature offer masterclass,
which is coming up here soon. And you can get all of that by cruising over to signature offer.com. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training episode.<inaudible> Okay. On today’s show, we’re talking about four things you need to do before creating your signature offer. And here’s the deal a foundational piece. Again, go back and listen to one 94.
If you’ve not listened to that show yet, but a signature offer is in essence, the most important part of your business, it helps you to become known. It helps you to lead in your niche. It helps you to cut through all of the noise of other businesses that are in your same area, or maybe even if you’re a new company, it helps you really stand out in the very beginning of perhaps even a new industry,
a signature offer will also give you predictable results in your business, and it gives your clients predictable results, which is the most important thing. And of course, a signature offer is going to help you control your profit. So that is why having a signature offer. And we use this word offer loosely. It could be a program, a course, a membership.
It could be your signature system or methodology. It’s turning your ideas and your expertise into your intellectual property, and then choosing the business model of distribution that’s right for you. And so today we’re diving into the four prerequisites to building your signature offer. So if you skip even one of these, you can create the wrong thing. Waste years of time spend like truckloads of money that you don’t want to lose.
Just like wave goodbye to that truck, driving away with your money in the back, blowing everywhere in the wind. And you could brand your business incorrectly, which I’m not going to go down that road. You know, we, we don’t, we don’t want to give the wrong message about your business branding because that really takes years of time and money to correct.
So let’s not do that. Don’t forget to grab your signature offer cheat sheets and the quick start video over@signatureoffer.com. Okay. Prerequisite number one is to know who you serve. And we talk about this a lot on the show, you as a business owner, if you are an established business owner, then you know what I’m talking about, because you’ve probably nailed this.
You’ve gotten over that threshold of kind of wondering who this is, who are the people that are desperate for the solution you provide. What we’re talking about here is going even further into that. It’s niching down hard. And for those of you guys that are new entrepreneurs and listening to this show, I get that this is so hard to choose in the beginning,
but once you nail this down and you get more and more specific about who you serve, your business is going to be more successful faster. And one of the ways that you can do this is pulling from your expertise and the experience you have here is a great example of this. This week. I got a call from a woman who is launching a new life coaching business and life.
Coaching is a powerful thing. I’ve worked with a lot of life coaches in the past life. Coaching is also a very popular thing that a lot of people are doing. And so she really needed to differentiate herself from the other businesses that were also in her market and in that place that she wanted to go with her company. And so we had a really nice long conversation.
And at the beginning of this conversation, she went from wanting to be a life coach and helping women and men just get clarity and be high achievers. And at the end of our conversation, she was able to nail it down enough to know that she wants to help men and women get clarity and business advancement. Particularly for those people in the construction industry,
see the difference. It was super specific because her area of expertise and her background is working within that industry. And so you have to go from this high level of generally wanting to provide a solution you’re in your business to asking yourself who specifically am I so providing this solution for and pull from your own expertise and your own experience that you have had in the past.
So prerequisite number one is really knowing who you serve. Now, if you’re a new business and you’re not sure then launch offers launch services, but it’s not going to be your signature offer or program on this show. We’re talking about launching your signature, offer your signature methodology and your signature program. And in order to do that, you have to know specifically who you serve.
That’s prerequisite. Number one, prerequisite. Number two is you need to be able to answer this question. What problem do you solve? Not what do you do or what do you offer? But what problem do you solve? Here’s an example of this. I help busy experts and entrepreneurs who are struggling to take the lead scale, their business, and become the undisputed leader by launching their signature offer.
That’s my statement. And here is a prompt for you. If somebody asks you, what problem do you solve? Here are some words that can get you to craft your own problem. Solution statement. I help blank. So just while I’m talking through this, fill in the blank with me, I help blank. This is who you serve. So I help and then fill in who you serve,
who are struggling with, and then fill in their problem to do, and then fill in the solution or the end results you provide. So I help. And then you can just put like a blank line there. If you’re visual like me, and you’re driving your car blank, who are struggling with blank to do blank. If you can fill in those blanks,
you can answer that question. What problem do you solve? And here’s just a side note. And it’s a question that I get asked actually really often, because I work with a lot of lifestyle businesses as well. If you don’t actually solve a problem, you can also fulfill a deep desire. So if you have retreats or masterminds or things that are more of a fulfillment solution,
that is awesome as well. So it doesn’t always have to be this deep rooted fear or problem. You can fulfill an amazingly deep passion or desire for your clients as well. So prerequisite numbers too, is being able to answer this question. What problem do you solve? Or what desire do you fulfill? Okay, prerequisite, number three, decide what you want to become known for.
You’re not going to get stuck there. I promise you’re not going to get stuck there, but in order to develop a signature offer, you need to choose what you want to become known for because spoiler alert, signature offer is going to make you known, especially when you build it. Right? So really think about that. But let me just share with you a little timeline so that you can see from my own personal experience,
I promise you you’re not going to get stuck there. I first became known for creating the parent coaching industry back in 2006. And my first signature program was called baby university. It taught individuals how to become parent coaches. As a matter of fact, that program is still alive today in my other company, right? You probably had no idea that that’s how I got started now almost 15 years ago.
And then after that, my next signature program was called baby savvy, which was a corporate program for hospitals who wanted to include parent coaching. And then after that I created the baby dream gear class, which was an international class. It was licensed by parenting experts around the world. And then after that, I created the lifestyle business roadmap and launched my second company in 2014,
you guys had no idea, right? See, not stuck. Okay. So when you do it, right, each program you create is a springboard for the next and the springboard for the next. I promise you, you won’t get stuck, but you have to pick one that you’re going to start with and you have to do nail it. So you can own that space.
I own that space and every single signature program I’ve created, you will too, especially when you do it. Right. Okay. So prerequisite number three is to decide what you want to become known for. And then prerequisite number four is to understand right now what you’re qualified to do. So take from your current assets, pull from your current experience, use your unique story.
What have you been through? What have you done, who are the main people you’ve worked with so far and use your unique story to identify, you know, really who am I awesome at getting Results for? Who do I love working with? Who are my favorite people that I love taking care of right now? What have you overcome for these people?
Even personally, within your own business, as it applies to creating a signature offer in your company and the bottom line is what can you create right now? Yes, you can create a signature offer where you also need to learn other skills and bring in other skills to make your offer complete. But we have to understand that for it to be a real signature offer,
it’s pulling from your intellectual property, your expertise, your experience. And so prerequisite number four, to creating your signature offer or program is understanding what you are qualified to do right this second. And I promise you if you’re stumped on this one, no worries. Next week’s episode, I’m going to be diving in with you to show you how to inventory your assets and your ideas and your expertise,
and organize them into a beautiful outline for your signature program or offer. So don’t miss episode number 196, cause that’s what we’re talking about next week, but I promise you when you nail these four prerequisites, then it’s going to save you years of incorrect branding and tons of money and help you to be known in your space faster. So let’s do a recap on today’s show.
We talked about the four different prerequisites, the four things you need to do before you start creating your signature offer or program. Number one was know who you serve. Number two was be able to answer the question, what problem do I solve? Or what desire do I fulfill? Number three is to decide what you want to become known for right now.
And number four is to understand what you’re qualified to do and what you can teach right now to get all the secret weapons that go along with all of these episodes that we have for you when it comes to creating your signature offer program, make sure that you cruise over to signature offer.com right now, where you can also join the wait list for my next masterclass coming up called your signature offer and receive the cheat sheets.
And the quick start video I have. So you can get started creating your signature offer today. All right, you guys, I love chatting with you. Thanks so much for tuning into another episode here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And I can’t wait to keep talking about this subject. This conversation’s one of my favorite things to talk about, and I can’t wait to see the signature offers that you guys create.
So if you already have a signature offer that you’ve created connect with me over on Instagram at April beach life, just shoot me a DM and let me know what you’re working on or what you’ve already created. I would love to talk about your signature offer here on the show. All right, you guys have an awesome week and I can’t wait to tell Bye bye for now.

Episode 194: What (Really) Is a Signature Offer or Program? And Why Does Your Company Need One? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Waitlist to Create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process with April Beach – Masterclass reopening soon! 

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to understand the fundamentals of what a Signature Offer or Program really is and isn’t
C) Want to know the two types of Signature Offers and determine which type may be best for them

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Service or Process. What really is a signature offer or program? Spoiler alert, it’s not just a common service you slap the Signature Logo on. No… your signature offer, program, course or process is something that sets your company apart. So, if you’ve been wondering how to create a signature offer or program this episode is for you. 
 
Experts, entrepreneurs and small businesses are always striving to be known, but there’s one true way to lead a niche and profit, and that is by developing a unique signature offer, program, process, service, course, membership, system, event, or deliverable which makes it clear for others to understand what you do, creates profitable results for your company, helps you become known and gives your clients incredible results. In this episode we dive into part 1 in discussing “What (Really) Is a Signature Offer or Program and Why Does  Your Company Need One?”

Highlights:

  1. Know what truly is and what is not a true, authentic signature offer or program
  2. Understand the 2 types of signature offers or programs
  3. Be able to identify which type of signature offer or program your company should create first

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheet: Must-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process. 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. Welcome to another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I’m super glad you’re here because we are diving more, a little bit more step-by-step each week into one of my favorite topics to talk about.
So two weeks ago, we started talking about creating your services and making sure that what you’re selling in, what you have available to your audience is in fact selling right now, we talked about your primary offer and your primary programs and doing any sort of pivoting based on the crazy 2020 and how it has been. And we also talked about making sure that your services are solving an immediate problem for people.
Well, on this week’s show, we’re diving in more and discussing what really is a signature offer or program. And why does your company need one? And this is kicking up a brand new series that we’re doing here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast called how to create your signature offer program, service or process. And I’m super excited to geek out on this with you.
This topic is actually my Ninja skill and my zone of genius. And so over the next few weeks, I’m going to be sharing with you case studies from signature offers and programs. My clients have built over the years to inspire you, to see what’s possible in the huge result that you can make in your business by creating a signature process program or system.
And so this particular episode, we’re starting out and we’re answering the question, what really is a signature offer or program, and why does your company need one? And this show is for those of you, whether you are established businesses or you are brand new to this space, this show is for you. So that means that your business is anywhere from phase two to phase five of my start to scale business system.
If you aren’t sure what phase of my start to scale business system that you are in, you can just pause this episode real quick and go take a very short, quick question quiz@sweetlifeco.com forward slash forward slash quiz. And what that’s going to do is it’s going to tell you what phase of business you’re in on my start to scale up business system. And it’s going to give you a list of things that you should working on and focusing on right now in your business.
If you’ve been listening to this show for a while, you know that I try to attack the episodes based on the business phase, so that if you’re in phase two, you know, that this particular show in this training is for you. Or if you’re in phase four, you might want to opt out and not listen to certain shows. But today is particular show is for almost everybody across the board,
in any phase of my start to scale up business systems. So that means whether you’re new, whether you’re just launching or you’re ready to scale for you guys that are offline companies going online. This is a perfect episode for you to listen to this episode is for experts, entrepreneurs, and businesses who a want to know more about creating a signature offer B.
You want to understand the fundamentals of what a signature offer or program really is and what it’s not. And see, you want to know the two types of signature offers and determine which type might be best for your company. If you want to know the answers to those questions, stay with me here in this show. And as a super, very special bonus tool to this episode,
I’m inviting you to check out my signature offer masterclass. This is a class I first launched way back in 2015, 16, 17, and I am bringing it back. I’m so excited about it. It’s a step by step training to extract your expertise, expand your reach and explode your sales. And you can find all the details about your signature opera masterclass by visiting signature offer.com.
And when you add your name to the list for interest in joining the, your signature program masterclass, I am going to give you tools that you can use right now. So you don’t even have to wait. You can get started right away, and I’m going to give you number one, the components, it’s a list of components that every winning and leading signature offer should have.
And I’m going to give you a really short six minute video helping you kick off your creation of your own signature offer right now immediately. So again, that’s the awesome bonus that comes with this episode, and you can find that by going to signature offer.com, okay, this is episode number 194. Let’s go ahead and dive into the show.<inaudible> Okay.
Diving in here, we’re going to answer three really important and foundational questions for you regarding a signature offer and a signature program and helping you to determine really what is the right path in your business. And first of all, what really is a signature offer or program? So that’s question number one, what really is a signature offer or program? The long is a true signature offer is a program service method or a process that you extract from your own IP,
your own intellectual property, your expertise and your experience. So what, you know, what you’re good at, what your ju your zone of genius is what your zone of excellence is in that gives your clients predictable transformational results. So let me simplify that for you, a true signature offer or program is a process in which you create again, from your own IP that gives your clients predictable transformational results.
And it makes you known in your space. That is the official definition that I’ve given to a signature offer. And it, hopefully that will help you to understand exactly what it is and what it isn’t. But let’s go ahead and dive into it even more, a signature program, or offer, extract your expertise. It’s derived from your intellectual property. So it’s pulled from your experience in winning and in failing in a certain area in order to be a winner,
and to be an expert in something, we have to usually fail at it quite a few times until we figure out the ways to overcome it. Your signature offer is the result of that. It’s a ways you’ve overcome something. It’s a ways you’ve gotten yourself or other people really awesome results in a certain area. So your signature offer is pulled from your experience.
It’s nothing like anyone else’s. So your signature offer isn’t like anybody else’s because it contains your unique skillset, your systems, and your processes as true signature offer also disrupts your niche. So it improves or simplifies or changes the way things have been done to give better results, a signature offer, or a true signature offer and program provides predictable transformational results that people can count on.
And a signature offer a program meets your profit goals that your company has set. And it is something that you want to be known for. That’s what a real true signature offer program is. So let’s kind of talk about the flip side of that. What it isn’t a signature offer or program is not a copycat of popular programs that everybody else is doing.
It is not what just happens to be selling. And what’s trending right now in this space. And it’s not something you choose just because it happens to be your main offer. In fact, a signature offer is not something that gives people the same results in the same way that other programs and companies are doing it. So your signature offer program should be uncommon,
but it can solve a common problem, but the way you go about doing it, the way you go about understanding how to get people results is your intellectual property, your IP, your methodology. So again, a true signature offer extract your expertise into your methodology by creating your own unique content that becomes your program. It is not something that just happens to be selling it.
Isn’t something that is the first offer, just because it’s your first offer. Doesn’t mean it’s your signature offer just because it’s your only offer. Doesn’t mean it’s your signature offer. It shows signature offer leads the way in certain aspects and the goals that you set forth in your business. So now you might be asking yourself, Oh, okay, well, what,
what does that mean? And how do I know what type of signature offer to bill once you understand what type of signature offer you’re building, then you’re going to understand the goals that your business is going to set for that signature offer. So now let’s go ahead and I want to share with you the two types of signature offers or programs, they are a foundational signature offer or program or an influencing signature offer or program.
So the two types are foundational or influencing. This is a system that I created. It’s part of my service creation system that I watched about 10 years ago in once you understand which one you fall into, either influencing or foundational, then this is going to help you get more clarity. So I want to impact this with you here and break out the two types of programs,
a foundational signature offer. This is ideal for new businesses entering the market or established businesses going from offline to online, a foundational signature offer introduces you to the marketplace. It gets you on the map, and it helps you as a business owner to simplify your services and your systems, a foundational signature offer can be your first online offer. If you are going through the scaling up or the scaling online process,
or again, going from offline to online to grow your business, or it can be the first program or service that you’re introducing as your company is emerging, maybe into a new marketplace, whether it’s online or offline, a foundational signature offer can have huge profit results. Okay? So just because your business might be new, if that’s the arena you fall into,
or just because you might be new to online, it doesn’t mean that your foundational offer can make you a lot of money. It doesn’t mean it has to be some rinky dink offer. We just call it foundational because it’s setting the expectations for a new marketplace for you. It’s setting the foundation for how you’re first going to become known in a certain space.